Home

Panasonic KX-TVP200 Answering Machine User Manual

1. 230 Automated Attendant Parameters i 230 wi agde ER T re 237 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters ii 240 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS 242 System Group ASSIQNINIGNN ses euius s ci lan bna EO bed Sapa xa i T EE D RE 242 Time Group SEVICE araldica 244 Holiday Settingiano 248 Daylight Saving Time DST 250 B6 4 Installation Manual 11 12 B6 5 Prompt SS MING ninna erat 251 B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement 252 B6 7 Other Parameters taniera nnne nn ne ennn 253 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS 264 B7 1 RS 232C ParametersS 264 B7 2 Poli SOIT PRE cessit recie dtmoucdo tuque urget toes up dau EU Er Ud aes 265 B7 3 PBX Interface Paramelers e eee ter tte uter tete e i UE EERR DEN 265 pppoe C SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX eee 274 E SETTING UP MAILBONXES 1 esee eese namen nana rada aum a aa aaa aaa 275 C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS 278 C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK rr rrrrerre seni 284 C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING eene eene nnn 286 C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING SETTING e eeeee 288 C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYS
2. Table B 16 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Description Up to 32 The information typed in this field is for reference only characters Any ASCII character except can be used None Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language of services within Custom 2 User 1 Service 3 User 2 System Note This parameter overrides Incoming Call Service Prompt Menu Repeat 1 3 times Specifies the number of times Custom Service menu Cycle 3 messages will be repeated to the caller Installation Manual 237 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table B 16 238 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Call Transfer Anytime Extn Mbx No Extn Specifies the destination to which the call will be transferred The Extn setting enter E enables callers to be transferred directly to their intended party by dialling the extension number The Mbx setting enter M enables callers to leave messages in a mailbox by entering the mailbox number The No setting enter N disables extension transfer and mailbox transfer only 1 digit entries work following the Custom Service menu Note This parameter should be set to No when Subscriber Service is specified as a Custom Service option and it is desired that digits can be entered very quickly to specify a mailbox Therefore in most cases No is the best setting for this parameter Thi
3. Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Maximum 5 60 s Specifies the length of time in seconds that the VPS Silence Time 10 must wait until it disconnects the call when silence is detected Installation Manual 263 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS For System Administration system setup mailbox setup and system diagnosis an RS 232C terminal must be connected to the serial interface of the VPS To access the proper menu for Hardware Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 B7 1 RS 232C Parameters shown To access the proper menu for RS 232C Parameter follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 6 1 Table B 37 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Baud Rate 300 bps 600 bps 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 9600 ONDARON Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred in bits per second Word Bit Length 1 7 bits 2 8 bits 8 bits Defines the number of bits in each byte or character Parity 1 None 2 Odd 3 Even None Specifies the parity to use for error detection Stop Bit Length 1 1 bit 2 2 bits 1 bit Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of the byte 264 Installation Manual B7 SYS
4. Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 289 hours time 87 289 374 87 289 290 HUNDRED 290 291 have a call for name 291 291 271 292 have a call for mailbox mailbox 292 number 292 271 293 have a message for name 293 798 775 293 798 775 301 294 was unable to reach name 294 295 I ll notify by pager 295 296 I ll notify by telephone 296 297 l Il redial number 297 379 298 I ll redial only once 298 299 If you are using a rotary telephone 299 678 stay on the line 299 300 If you really want to erase press 1 300 If not press 2 301 If you want me to call back later 293 798 775 301 press 3 302 If you would like to hold press 1 302 432 303 Incorrect entry 303 304 Initialisation completed 304 305 Initialisation failed 305 306 Intercom paging disabled 306 307 Intercom paging enabled 307 308 Intercom paging group number is 308 number 309 Interview mailbox number is mailbox 809 number 310 Interview mailbox number is deleted 810 311 Interview mailbox number is not 311 assigned 312 is Automatic mode 75 812 313 is Manual Break mode 75 813 Installation Manual 327 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No
5. 75 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION esee nennen nnn 76 4 1 1 Why DPT Integration is Important rca 76 4 2 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION 78 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND DO CI er 86 4 3 1 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Managers EXIBISIQfiL 5 cis isi ehii iR ha sess Cenc eux a nep iude acti susce ccc E pna LA Md 86 4 3 2 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance TOOl nna 91 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 96 4 4 1 Live Call Screening LCS Programming sese 96 4 4 2 Live Call Screening Password Assignment ssssesseeee 96 4 4 3 Live Call Screening Password Cancelling 96 4 4 4 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via System Programming 97 4 4 5 Live Call Screening Private Hands Free Mode Assignment via Station PROOFAMTIMINIG e d 97 4 4 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming ssss 98 4 4 7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station Programming 99 4 4 8 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station Programming 99 4 4 9 TWR Two Way Recording Button Assignment via Station Program
6. E gt gt gt gt gt 5 E 3 6 Total number of Registered 3 Total number of TURN OFF 1 gt gt gt T ist of Registered User Prompt 1 No 1 2 931 Blank Prompt No Prompt No with an Note The prompt has not been recorded but the default System Prompt is active WILL BE HEARD The prompt has been recorded WILL BE HEARD The prompt has been recorded but is turned off WILL NOT BE HEARD The Total Number of Registered shown at the bottom of the screen includes the prompts that have been turned off 7 2 16 Utility Command List HELP Use the HELP command to display the list of all available utility commands 1 Type HELP then Press RETURN Installation Manual 159 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS HELP OFLN ONLN PASS TIME PSET ELOG SAVE LOAD GPRN VERS CREP no CCLR no MWL MRL MPLT opt QSET LMON PUTD WCID System Off line System On line Password setting Time amp Date setting Report Print Out Time setting Device Error Log Listing VPS Program amp Date Save VPS gt PC Xmodem VPS Program amp Date Load VPS PC Xmodem Parameter Global Printing only ASCII Terminal mode Program Version Check Custom Menu Information
7. Installation Manual B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 31 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default System 1 9 min Specifies the maximum telephone connect time allowed External 3 for an external message delivery call to prevent excessive Message telephone charges Time begins counting when the Delivery destination number answers the call The VPS terminates Duration Time the call when it exceeds the specified length of time However the VPS does not terminate a call until the whole message is played even though the specified time expires Company s Up to 32 digits Specifies the Company s Telephone Number When the Telephone No None recipient has failed to retrieve the sender s message because of incorrect password entries the VPS announces the Company s Telephone Number for him to call in order to retrieve it Other Parameters Call Hold Table B 32 To access the proper menu for Call Hold follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 5 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Call Hold Mode 1 Disable If set to Enable the VPS gives callers the option of 2 Enable either holding for a specific extension or selecting one of Enable several Incomplete Call Handling service options While on hold the VPS periodically gives callers the choice to either continue to hold or select
8. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Installation Manual 23 1 4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION 1 4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION 1 4 1 General DPT Integration To the Panasonic KX TD digital PBX the VPS ports look like digital extensions The PBX thinks that the VPS is a digital phone and the VPS mimics all actions of a digital set Another advantage of DPT Integration is that the 2B D communication provides 2 VPS ports for each Digital Extension port Communication between the VPS and the PBX through DPT Integration requires the proper software level in the PBX and 4 wire connections for each port To communicate between the VPS and the PBX through DPT Integration the PBX and VPS must be programmed to work together DPT Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a KX TD digital PBX with the proper software level Note To use DPT Integration the lowest numbered jack of the VPS must be connected to the lowest numbered jack assigned as a Voice Mail Port in the KX TD See the DPT connection example s in the following section 1 4 2 Connection Examples Connect the other jacks to the VPS in the order of Voice Mail Port Assignment in the PBX Inband None Integration To the PBX the VPS looks like SLT sets through standard single line tip ring telephone interfaces 1 4 2 Connection Examples DPT Integration For example when you mount 3 KX TVP204 cards you can use 12 VPS ports in total by connecting 6 jacks of the KX T
9. Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Table Input digit Up to 8 Do not assign more than 1 code to an incoming digits signal If this occurs the system will take the first consisting of assignment 0 9 A D None VPS Port Parameters These parameters specify the extension numbers of VPS ports shown To access the proper menu for VPS Port Parameters follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 4 Table B 47 1 12 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Extension No 2 4 digits Specifies the extension number of each VPS port of the VPS port None Note Extension numbers of the VPS ports will automatically be assigned when 1 Auto Configuration is executed or 2 PBX type has been changed 272 Installation Manual Appendix C SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Installation Manual 273 C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX The System Manager s Mailbox must be accessed before performing any System Manager task To access the System Manager s Mailbox three items of information must be known the telephone number answered by Voice Mail Service the System Manager s Mailbox Number and the Password for that mailbox if assigned The System Manager s Mailbox Number is 99 999 default 9999 or 99999 depending upon the mailbox number length specified in System Programming The
10. See External Message Delivery Service in this Table See External Delivery Message External Message Delivery List and External Message Delivery Redial in GLOSSARY See 3 3 Setting up an External Message Delivery List in the Subscriber s Guide See The Extension of the Owner in Table B 4 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Authorization for External Message Delivery in Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters External Message Delivery in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See External Delivery Message External Message Delivery List and External Message Delivery Redial in GLOSSARY See 3 4 Sending External Delivery Messages in the Subscriber s Guide See 3 5 Receiving External Delivery Messages in the Subscriber s Guide See 3 6 Replying to External Delivery Messages in the Subscriber s Guide 186 Installation Manual Table A 1 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES External Message Delivery Status Fax Management Allows the subscriber to check the status of undelivered and pending external delivery messages This feature is only available when External Message Delivery has been authorised for the subscribers COS Allows the VPS to automatically route an incoming fax signal to a specific fax machine Up to 2 f
11. 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment OK Apply Cancel Help 4 Assignment of the extension ports connected to the VPS a Continue the programming in the 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment screen b Select the extension port number of the card DLC DHLC to which the VPS DPT jack is to be connected in the Port No menu Notes You can assign a maximum of 6 jacks 12 ports with the KX TD500 e This menu is displayed only when the attribute of the ports is assigned to VPS DPT in step 2 This programme tells the KX TD500 which extension ports are connected to the VPS This allows the KX TD500 to send the proper Digital Integration information to these ports Jack No 1 must be assigned because its port is used as the channel to control the VPS C Assign DN for the port click DN Refer to check the available directory numbers Note This programme allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port Since each port connected to the VPS provides two extensions this enables you to assign extension numbers to each port To reach the Voice Mail system users dial these extension numbers d Assign Extension Group No for the port Note Specify the extension group number 126 or 127 by default to which VM or AA is assigned Group numbers 1 to 128 are available to the VPS through additional programming Selecting VM has the same effect as selecting AA regardless of how the VPS is programmed
12. as shown To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing Delete follow the menu path System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 2 Caller ID List No 1 120 Caller ID Call Routing Listing Displays all Caller ID List numbers To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing Listing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 3 Installation Manual 241 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS B6 1 System Group Assignment shown To access the proper menu for System Group Assignment follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 System Group Assignment Mailbox Group This parameter allows a caller to send a message simultaneously to several mailboxes These mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List The VPS is able to maintain up to 20 System Group Distribution Lists Each list can have up to 20 destination mailbox numbers Mailboxes can be added to or deleted from these lists and reviewed as needed To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 Mailbox Group Enter shown To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group Enter follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 1 Group List No Table B 18 Parameter Value
13. D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 718 To change the voice label press 5 699 700 702 701 718 786 711 714 702 701 718 786 711 714 719 To change this question press 1 719 841 842 774 720 To change to the next person press 2 679 720 849 721 To change user prompt 1 press 1 721 To change user prompt 2 press 2 722 To change press 1 722 663 591 722 432 592 722 432 722 663 737 722 663 759 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 777 722 673 722 663 808 722 663 820 668 778 779 722 663 820 668 778 779 777 53 722 432 52 722 663 722 843 722 843 850 722 843 851 723 To change press 2 672 723 737 821 724 To check the mailbox distribution 798 739 724 224 234 236 746 press 3 798 739 724 224 234 746 725 To check the mailbox distribution 798 739 728 725 223 236 746 press 4 726 To clear all mailbox usage counts 844 726 press 2 727 To continue holding press 1 727 432 728 To customise your mailbox press 3 845 838 728 835 785 746 845 838 728 835 785 832 746 798 739 728 72
14. caller may leave a message in Operators mailbox Disconnect Message caller is disconnected from the VPS after hearing Thank you for calling Next Operator caller is transferred to the next operator Operator 2 or 3 extension 1 Assignable for Operator 1 2 and 3 2 Assignable for Operator 1 and 2 Mode in Table 5 6 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters See No Answer Coverage Mode in Table B 12 Table B 13 and Table B 14 in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters Operator Service Permits callers to request a live operator by pressing 0 on the telephone keypad Up to 3 operators can be specified to receive calls in the Day Night Lunch and Break Modes See 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters See Operator s Parameters in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Operator s Extensions in D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Password Administration Allows the System Administrator or System Manager to clear a subscriber password so that a new one can be assigned See 5 5 4 Password Reset See Deleting a Mailbox Password in C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES PBX Integration Allows the VPS and PBX to work together as an integrated unit Two integration options are available Inband Integration and DPT Integration See 2 7 CONNECTIONS See Section 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS See Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD DIGITAL
15. 5 Press 1 for AM or 2 for PM Note This selection is not available if 24 h is selected in Position of AM PM in Time Stamp in Table B 26 in B6 5 Prompt Setting 6 Press 2 to accept the time 7 Press 1 to change the current date 8 Type the current month and Press t Note Press 0 for help For example to enter January press 1 and 9 Type the day and Press Installation Manual D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK 10 Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press 11 Press 2 to accept the date entered Installation Manual 305 D6 RECORDING MESSAGES D6 RECORDING MESSAGES 306 The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages specifically menus voice labels user prompts and system caller names He is responsible for maintaining the following e Company Greetings Up to 32 company greetings for business non business and Lunch Break hours as well as holidays can be selected recorded or deleted as necessary Company Name e The Department Dialling Menu maximum length 6 min A caller can access departments with the touch of one key Nine Department Dialling selections 1 to 9 can be recorded The Custom Service Menus maximum length 6 min each Up to 100 custom service menus can be recorded These menus guide callers to the services they require without the need for a human operator This is the most useful and powerful feature of your
16. 5 1 STARTING UP Table 5 1 PBX Type Required Procedures KX T308 T616 1 52 3 4 5 6 7 8 KX T1232 TA series 1 53 54 55 6 7 58 T336 T96 Non Panasonic System 12354 55 6 7 8 KX TD816 1232 500 612 1 4 5 6 8 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup The sequence must be followed through to the end to take effect If you press you will have to start over Quick setup may be performed again without erasing prior data Note Depending on PBX extension numbering the mailbox numbers might be 2 to 5 digits long At the System Administration Top Menu Type 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER See 7 2 17 Quick Setup QSET for more information Screen output System Administration Top Menu 5 or System Administration Top Menu 3 QSET Quick Setup Utility for connection to Panasonic KX T series telephone systems This utility provides a quick way of programming the Voice Processing System to operate in a standard automated attendant or voice mail configuration when connected to a Panasonic KX T series telephone system The system will prompt you to enter modify or confirm settings based upon which PBX type you select By entering the appropriate information in the following screens the system sets PBX integration parameters identifies the extension numbers connected to it creates default mailboxes sets its ports to handle callers with a
17. 833 746 834 To set the clock press 3 837 827 834 837 827 834 692 689 837 827 834 692 689 776 835 To set the clock press 4 845 838 728 835 785 746 845 838 728 835 785 833 746 836 To set the group distribution lists 709 708 706 836 press 4 709 708 706 836 698 709 708 706 836 698 691 837 To set up mailbox press 1 837 827 834 837 827 834 692 689 837 827 834 692 689 776 838 To set up message waiting 838 notification press 2 845 838 728 835 785 746 845 838 728 835 785 832 746 839 To skip setting the password press 138 839 the hash sign 176 839 840 To skip setting the password press 138 840 the pound sign 177 840 841 To skip to the next question press 2 695 841 842 774 719 841 842 774 758 841 842 774 841 842 774 842 To skip to the previous question 695 841 842 774 press 3 719 841 842 774 758 841 842 774 841 842 774 843 To skip press 2 722 843 722 843 850 722 843 851 844 To specify the mailbox range press 1 844 814 844 726 845 To transfer General Delivery Mailbox 845 838 728 835 785 746 messages press 1 845 838 728 835 785 833 746 354 Instal
18. B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters The Automated Attendant Service has 3 main functions Department or Speed Dialing Operator s Parameters and Alternate Extension To access the proper menu for Automated Attendant Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 Department Dialing Department Dialing is a speed dialling feature that permits a caller to reach the intended extension by dialling a single digit 1 9 To access the proper menu for Department Dialling follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 1 Table B 11 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Department 2 5 digits Specifies the department extension number Dialing No 1 9 None Note 1 The Extension Group List or Logical Extension Numbers cannot be assigned Note 2 The Message Manager must record the Department Dialing menu Operator s Parameters Use these parameters to specify the operator s operator 1 2 3 extensions and mailboxes as well as how to treat operator seeking calls Operator s parameters can be individually set for Day Night Lunch and Break Modes To access the proper menu for Operator s Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 230 Installation Manual B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table B 12 Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator
19. Note If an Extension Group List number is assigned to a mailbox all group members are able to share the information stored there Installation Manual B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Table B 4 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Owner s First Name Owner s Last Name Up to 16 alphabet characters None The first 4 letters of both the first and last name is printed on the Mailbox Assignments report The Dialling by Name feature uses the last name Class of Service No COS No 1 62 1 Used to define the set of services available to the subscriber Note 1 We recommend that parameters for each COS number be defined before assigning a Class of Service COS number Note 2 COS No 63 pertains to the Message Manager while COS No 64 pertains to the System Manager These numbers cannot be entered in the COS No data field Covering Extension 2 5 digits None Identifies the extension number that will receive unanswered subscriber calls The Automated Attendant Service accomplishes this call transfer The caller is given the option of transferring the call or leaving a message in the subscriber s mailbox The Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call Handling Service options that can be enabled or disabled by the subscriber using the telephone keypad Note The Extension Group List or Logical Extension Numbers cannot be assigned as coveri
20. Notification is terminated when the subscriber Message Manager has received the message when the last number has been called a specified number of times or at the completion of the programmed time period See Message Waiting Notification from an SLT in 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration See Notification Setting in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Authorization for Message Notification in Table B 7 and Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION See Message Waiting Notification in GLOSSARY See 4 8 Message Waiting Notification in the Subscriber s Guide 194 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Message Waiting Automatically illuminates the message See Message Waiting Notification Lamp waiting lamp on the subscriber s or the Message Manager s telephone when there are unplayed messages waiting in the mailbox Note The extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is the Message Manager s telephone However its default extension number 0 cannot be used with this feature When using this feature you must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan Notifi
21. System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 2 3 A Time Group is a time frame in which Day Night Lunch and Break time periods can be programmed The VPS maintains 8 Time Groups and each of which can be assigned a specific setting It is necessary to assign a specific Time Group for use in each Port and Trunk Service in its Day Mode setting menu see Time Group No in Table B 9 in B4 1 Port Assignment and Table B 10 in B4 2 Trunk Group Assignment 244 Installation Manual B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS To access the proper menu for Time Group Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 Time Group Service Service Mode The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time Service setting Day Night Lunch and Break Services for each Time Group 1 8 however the System Administrator or the System Manager can change the current call handling method by assigning a specific Service Mode to the desired Time Group To access the proper menu for Time Group Service Service Mode for the selected time group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 1 Time Group No 1 8 Table B 20 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Time Group 1 Automatic Assigns a specific Service Mode to the Time Group 1 8 Mode There are 6 options available 2 Manual Day Mode 1 Automatic Mode
22. e For FWD Cancel Go to Step 10 5 Type the extension number 6 Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Go to Step 11 Note Press 1 to change the extension number Return to Step 5 7 Press 1 or 2 to select Telephone number 1 or Telephone number 2 Go to Step 9 or Press 3 to select another telephone number 8 Type the telephone number using 0 9 and X Notes Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code to seize an outside CO line e When connected to the KX TD500 the maximum number of characters allowed to be entered is 24 when connected to other types of PBX 16 9 Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Go to Step 11 Note Press 1 to change the telephone number Return to Step 7 10 Call Forwarding is cancelled Press 2 to accept it 11 Call Forwarding setting data is transmitted to the PBX If the forwarding setting or cancelling has been completed properly you will hear Call forwarding accepted or Call forwarding is cancelled Note If you hear Call Forwarding not accepted Please check the destination number the forwarding setting has not been completed properly at the PBX possibly because a nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination It is also possible that the model of the connected PBX does not support the Remote Call Forwarding Set feature or its software version is lower than required for
23. i ircuit T pedi Pn Pin No Pin No a Ea AA FG 1 lt q i FG AA BA TXD 2 o 3 RXD BB BB RXD 3 lag 2 TXD BA m n 20 DTR CD 7 SG AB CD DTR 2 _ 5 CTS CB __ 6 DSR cc 8 DCD CF Table 2 6 Pin Configuration of the RS 232C Pin i Circuit Type Number zo RS 232C CCITT 1 FG Frame Ground AA 101 2 TXD Transmitted Data BA 103 3 RXD Received Data BB 104 4 RTS Request To Send CA 105 6 DSR Data Set Ready CC 107 7 SG Signal Ground AB 102 8 DCD Data Carrier Detect CF 109 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready CD 108 2 2 8 3 RS 232C Signals Frame Ground FG Connects an external ground to the unit frame usually the earth pin of the AC power cord Transmitted Data TXD output Conveys signals from the unit to the terminal printer A mark condition is held unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitted Received Data RXD input Conveys signals from the terminal printer to the unit Request To Send RTS output This lead is held on whenever DSR is on Signal Ground SG Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals Installation Manual 47 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION Data Terminal Ready DTR output This signal line is turned on by the unit to indicate that the RS 232C is on line Circuit DTR ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the terminal printer It is switched off when the RS 232C is off line 48 In
24. 119 ELEVEN 119 120 ELEVEN HOUR 120 121 ELEVEN MINUTE 121 122 ELEVENTH 122 123 Enter 1 for AM or 2 for PM 123 124 Enter a class of service number from 124 1 to 62 125 Enter a class of service number from 125 1 to 64 126 Enter a group number from 1 to 17 126 127 Enter a group number 1 through 4 127 128 Enter a mailbox list number 128 129 Enter a message length from 1 to 6 129 minutes or 0 for unlimited length 130 Enter a message retention time up to 130 30 days 131 Enter a message retention time up to 131 30 days or 0 for unlimited days 132 Enter a personal greeting length from 132 8 to 60 seconds Installation Manual 319 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 133 Enter delivery list number 1 or 2 133 134 Enter device number 1 through 3 134 135 Enter extension number 135 136 Enter question number followed by 136 the hash sign 137 Enter question number followed by 137 the pound sign 138 Enter the 4 digits password 138 840 138 839 139 Enter the caller ID number 139 918 99 140 Enter the caller name announcement 140 number 1 through 120 141 Enter the company greeting number 1 141 through 32 142 Enter the custom service prompt 142 number 1 through 100 To record custom service exit prompt press 0 143 Enter
25. 2 00 59 min Notification service for all days of the week MON AM PM TUE amom Note These parameters are active only when Use WED HD Mode is set to Scheduled THU X All Day FRI Space No Use SAT No U SUN Mouse Remote Call Forward to CO Follow the procedure below to specify the destination outside telephone number s to which the callers are forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding feature is set to an outside CO line Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 can be specified per mailbox Class of Service programming determines if the mailbox owner is able to use this feature This feature is only available with DPT Integration Installation Manual 213 B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES To access the proper menu for Remote Forward to CO follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No 3 Telephone Number 1 or 2 Table B 6 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Telephone Up to 24 digits Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are Number 1 2 With the KX forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to an TD500 outside CO line or Up to 16 digits The telephone number can contain the digits 0 9 and With other KX TD u yu o PBXs The telephone number should begin with a Line Access None Code to seize an outside CO line Note Pressing back space will clear the paramet
26. 226 463 Please enter the person s mailbox 463 752 number 463 752 678 463 751 463 751 678 464 Please hold while page the person 464 Installation Manual 333 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 465 Please inform System Manager 559 465 550 428 465 466 Please leave a message at the tone 466 467 Please wait a moment 467 60 467 468 PM 468 469 Port number is number 469 470 POUND 470 471 Prompt mode for external message _ 471 delivery is caller select 472 Prompt mode for external message 472 delivery is system 473 Prompt mode for external message _ 473 delivery is user 1 474 Prompt mode for external message 474 delivery is user 2 475 Prompt mode is system 475 476 Prompt mode is user 1 476 477 Prompt mode is user 2 477 478 Prompt number number 478 479 Prompt restored 479 480 PULSE DIALLING MODE 480 481 Question erased 481 482 Question number number 482 483 received on date 345 483 19 484 Record caller name at the tone 484 485 Record company name at the tone 485 486 Record greeting at the tone 836 487 Record label at the tone 487 488 Record menu at the tone 488 489 Record owner s name at the tone 489 490 Record the group name
27. 6 X and Dial the Number of the mailbox for which you wish to record Personal Greetings 3 Enter your Password if programmed then Press t You are now inside the mailbox Press 5 for Mailbox Management Press 1 to change the Personal Greetings Press 1 again to change the No Answer Greeting oc a The system will then say No Answer Greeting is not recorded Record greeting at the tone 8 State your Greeting at the tone Example Hi this is Tom am away from my desk right now but please leave a message at the tone and will return your call as soon as possible 9 Press 1 when finished The system gives the options of reviewing accepting or erasing the message 10 Press 1 to review the greeting 11 Press 2 to accept the greeting 12 The system will then play the menu for changing the No Answer Greeting Busy Signal Greeting and the After Hours Greeting Record the Busy Signal Greeting as you did for the No Answer Greeting 13 Continue on to the After Hours Greeting and hang up when finished 6 2 2 Recording the Owner s Name 1 Dial the Extension Number of the VPS 2 When the VPS answers Press 6 X and Dial the Number of the mailbox to which you wish to record the Owner s Name Installation Manual 141 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES 3 Enter your Password if programmed then Press t You are now inside the mailbox Press 5 for Mailbox Management Press 3 to c
28. 820 668 778 830 779 777 722 663 820 668 778 779 722 663 820 668 778 779 777 779 To insert a wait for dial tone press 7 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 777 722 663 820 668 778 779 722 663 820 668 778 779 777 780 To keep press 2 735 780 734 780 781 To leave a message press 1 781 781 750 782 To let the caller select prompt 853 854 855 782 665 language press 4 783 To make this message private press 783 432 1 Installation Manual 349 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 784 To message scan press 8 804 811 793 756 813 822 760 846 784 804 811 793 756 822 760 846 784 785 To modify message press 5 845 838 728 835 785 746 845 838 728 835 785 833 746 786 To modify the user prompt press 6 699 700 702 701 718 786 711 714 702 701 718 786 711 714 787 To notify the person by pager press 4 787 788 To page your person press 3 788 789 To pause and restart recording press 745 789 2 744 789 789 572 745 789 790 To play the entire message press 3 810 793 790 791 To
29. Rotary Telephone Service Provides guidance to callers using rotary telephone systems or when several seconds pass without anything being entered by the caller See Other Parameters Rotary Telephone Service in B6 7 Other Parameters See Rotary Telephone in GLOSSARY Installation Manual 199 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Service Access Commands Allow the caller to directly access several standard features 0 to repeat the Help Menu or call the operator X to return to previous menu 1 to dial by name 3 Department Dialling 5 Login 6 Voice Mail Service 7 to restart Subscriber s main menu 8 to call transfer 9 to exit 1 Hn I 4 See 5 2 6 Voice Mail See 5 2 10 Automated Attendant See 1 5 Service Access Commands in the Subscriber s Guide Service Mode Allows the System Administrator or the System Manager to change the call handling method that is programmed for each Time Group 1 8 Once the Service Mode has been changed it is retained unless the System Manager or System Administrator changes it again even after the power turns off There are 6 Service Modes available Automatic Mode Operates according to the setting in Time Service Manual Day Mode Operates only in Day Mode Manual Night Mode Operates only in Night Mode Manual Lunch Mode
30. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS 264 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES 210 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE 225 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS 230 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS 216 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS 242 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 205 SYSTEM BASICS 17 System Caller Name Announcement 252 System Caller Name Announcement Delete 253 System Caller Name Announcement Enter 252 System Caller Name Announcement Listing 253 System clock 201 284 System Components 17 18 SYSTEM FEATURES 177 178 System Group Assignment 242 System Group Assignment Extension Group 243 System Group Assignment Mailbox Group 242 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 145 System Management 16 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 273 SYSTEM NAVIGATION 206 SYSTEM REPORTS 163 201 System Service Report 165 T Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to CO 302 TERMINAL CONNECTION 46 The Number of Ports VPS Cards Can Support 44 The VPS does not support 15 Time group 201 Installation Manual 377 Time Group Service 244 Time Group Service Service Mode 245 Time Group Service Time Service 246 Time service 202 Time Service 1 5 2 2 115 Time Service Time Group 1 8 Break Service 247 Time Service Time Group 1 8 Day Service 246 Time Service Time Group 1 8 Lunch Service 247 Time synchronisation 202 To Access the Message Manager s
31. To establish a mailbox group 1 From the System Administration Top Menu Type 1 5 1 1 1 Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Mailbox Group Enter 2 Assign a List Number to the Mailbox Group This number can be from 2 5 digits same as mailbox numbers This number must be an unused number In other words the number assigned to this group cannot be the same as another System Group Distribution List number or mailbox number For example we will use the number 250 There are 2 ways to use a System Group Distribution List Option A For inside messages The System Group Distribution List number can be designed so that any subscriber can press 2 and then enter the list number which is 250 in this example to deliver a message The message will be delivered to all specified mailboxes Option B For outside messages The System Group Distribution List number can be designed as a custom greeting for incoming callers For instance the greeting might be To leave a Installation Manual 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS message for the parts section press 3 The digit 3 would be assigned to System Group Distribution List number 250 in Custom Service Setting Each message waiting lamp will remain on until the message is cleared from the individual extension 5 2 8 Extension Groups An extension group places several extensions into the same mailbox These extensions may be assembled into a list called an Extension Gr
32. a Go to the 1 1 Slot Assignment screen b Assign the slot card type to be installed to DHLC HLC SLC ESLC or SLC M SLT interface supports C Click Apply to save the slot card type assignment d Set Card Status to INS Screen output Basic Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2 Card Type Status Card Type Status Card Type Status INS isla ae se eae EE d ea ei cu pesi pi Fa Fen Ea onu ee eee a us deri e iens meat gt mer pe Taie Cr f common i uet CCR ess emma I ccce scent ae eeu o rem gps ess Pen e e siae e fee eee veli aet aen 2 Hin ez 13 CPU ee E es ae 14 TSW li mu En 4 Ee 1 1 Slot Assignment Close Help 2 Assignment of the extension ports to be connected to the VPS a Go to the 1 3 Extension Port Assignment screen b Assign Attribute of the port to be connected to TEL default c Assign DN for the port click DN Refer to check the available directory numbers Note This programme allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port To reach the Voice Mail system users dial these extension numbers d Assign Extension Group No for the port Note Specify the extension group number 126 or 127 by default to which VM or AA extension groups have been assigned Group numbers 1 to 128 are available to the VPS through additional programming e Click Apply to save the changed data f Set Port Status to INS 60 Inst
33. depending on the software version This DPT Integration provides the VPS with more information than Touchtone Integration This information enables the system to identify the extension number of the caller know where from and why the call is forwarded and recognise what the caller wants to do Some features are available only with DPT Integration Remote Call Forwarding Set Live Call Screening Two Way Recording Two Way Transfer Direct Mailbox Access Intercom Paging Auto Configuration Caller Name Announcement system personal Caller ID Call Routing Personal Greeting for Caller ID Time Synchronisation with PBX Installer Equipment and Software Requirements The installer must have a personal computer or data terminal equipped with terminal emulation software We suggest that you use something like HyperTerminal by HILGRAEVE Use the personal computer to program the VPS Terminal emulation software enables the keyboard to be used as a data entry device While both the personal computer and data terminal are working the personal computer allows screens to be saved in a file throughout the process It is often helpful to retrieve these files later if technical support is needed Specifications Compression Rate 32 kbps Ports maximum 12 ports Voice Storage approximate 32 h Custom Services 100 Message Retention 1 to 30 days or unlimited Number of Mailboxes 1022 Subscriber and 2 Manager Mailboxes
34. ee 123 5 3 c xg clzelcipl fe aiar 124 5 3 1 Port Service Menia 124 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS eere 126 5 4 1 Automated Attendant MENU 126 5 4 2 Department Dialing HT 126 5 4 3 Operator S Parameters sesinin a Ed aal pauta ct ud 127 5 5 SETTING MAILBONXES aucciannt ona endn nnn tasas cuna an i sa nin DEI RAM Ld a Pa PREX RARE PR 130 5 5 1 Mailbox Setting Menu seessessesseeseeeenee nennen enn nnne 130 5 5 2 Entering a MANION dem M 130 5 5 3 Deleting a Mailbox fuc 134 5 5 4 Password OSC MTM 134 5 5 5 cles dic 134 5 6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER iii 136 6 FINAL SETUP iiieieseesicocuuci ii oaa coenae ca cha o eno rre nuo re c eneunEs 137 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 138 6 1 1 Accessing the Message Manager s MailbOX i 138 6 1 2 Main Menu of Message Manager s Service sssssseeeese 138 6 1 3 Company Greetings Enter 4 6 998 5 1 ssseeeseeees 138 6 1 4 Custom Service Greetings Enter 46 998 5 4 ssssssssssssesss 139 6 1 5 Customising User Prompts Enter 4 6 998 5 6 ssssssssess 139 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBONXES cccusa proi uun nam iaia 141 6 2 1 Recording Personal Greetings nent 141 6 2 2 Recording the Owner s Name rea 141 6 3 BACKING
35. 12 SYS AA SYS A A SYS AA SYS AA Trunk Day mode Night mode Lunch mode Break mode Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv Holiday List Name of Holiday Start End Grt Srv Port Trunk NEW YEAR DAY 1 JAN 15 C S 100 1 12 1 48 SPRING HOLIDAY 24 MAR 5 APR 16 C S 99 1 12 1 48 V M Voice Mail Service C S Custom Service A A Automated Attendant l S Interview Service Service Grt Company Greeting Trunk data Trunk 1 is shown above is shown only when 1 or more service mode is not NONE By default all trunks for all modes are NONE 7 3 4 Call Account Report The VPS can store information for up to 64 outgoing calling sequences for accounting and billing purposes Outgoing calling information includes the mailbox numbers that executed outgoing calls the telephone numbers called the call dates and call duration times When the number of outgoing calling sequences reaches 64 the first 10 items are automatically sent to the terminal Any information sent to the terminal is automatically deleted from the system s memory To select the Call Account Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 4 Call Account 14 NOV 2001 3 40 PM MBOX 211 4 JAN 7 46 PM 00 01 32 DIAL 91111111 MBOX 216 7 JAN 2 26 PM 00 03 32 DIAL 92222222 MBOX 214 7 JAN 5 06 PM 00 02 45 DIAL 93333333 MBOX 218 8 JAN 9 07 AM 00 01 15 DIAL 94444444 MBOX 212 8 JAN 10 24 AM 00 04 51 DIAL 95555555 Note
36. 2 Type 1 to enable this function or Type 2 to disable it Enter The Print Out Time HH MM AM PM 3 Type the time to print the reports Note The reports will be displayed only if the system is in the mode where you see the following prompt 7 2 6 Error Log Display ELOG Use the ELOG command to diagnose VPS problems Selection of this command will display an error log COM Communication error between CPU and DSP DATA Process error of voice data MEM Memory error PRG Program error in CPU card R W Read Write error of Hard Disk Type ELOG then Press RETURN Installation Manual 151 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS ELOG DEVICE ERROR TIME 1 CPU MEM GET 14 JUL 2 00 PM 2 CLOCK 14 JUL 2 00 PM 3 DISK DATA R W xx yyyy 14 JUL 2 00 PM 4 DSP SCAN 14 JUL 2 00 PM 5 DSP FIFO 14 JUL 2 00 PM 6 CPU APPLICATION x 14 JUL 2 00 PM port number 1 12 Note The following tables display and explain the errors that the system can identify Table 7 2 Device Error Log Indications Indication Meaning CPU MEM GET CPU board software memory acquisition error CPU board is short of memory temporarily because of too much traffic CLOCK Clock access error Clock IC is out of order Check the hardware DISK DATA R W xx yyyy HDD access error If there is a sector that often causes errors check the disk XX IDE error code yyyy read write err
37. ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Covering Extension in GLOSSARY See 4 2 Covering Extension in the Subscriber s Guide Installation Manual 183 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Custom Service Allows callers to access specific functions by entering numbers or symbols through the telephone keypad The Message Manager can record up to 100 Custom Service menus These menus can be recorded in various foreign languages and help guide outside callers to the desired extension mailbox System Group Distribution List Department Dialling menu operator fax machine etc Note Callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times See 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS See 6 1 4 Custom Service Greetings Enter 6 998 5 4 See 7 2 11 Custom Service Report CREP See 7 2 12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR See B5 2 Custom Service See Recording Menus and Voice Labels in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Custom Service Setting in GLOSSARY Daylight Saving Time Assignment Changes the internal clock of the VPS for the start and end of Daylight Saving Time See B6 4 Daylight Saving Time DST Delete Message Confirmation Requests confirmation from mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the mailbox This feature can be enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings See Delete Message Confirmation in T
38. Follow on ID from the PBX to the VPS The Digit Translation Table is applied to the digits received within this time Installation Manual 55 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS Input Output up to 8 alphanumeric characters When the system receives digits within the inter digit time it checks them against the input table If they are found the system utilises the output digits in their place The remainder of this section consists of step by step guides for software verification and programming of the recommended Panasonic PBX systems If you have any problem as you go through this section please consult your dealer 56 Installation Manual 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs 3 3 1 VPS Programming for Inband Integration Set parameters from the System Administration Terminal The table below lists recommended parameters for Panasonic KX T series PBXs Table 3 5 Other T1232 TD816 PBX Type Manufacturers X908 Tete TA series TRO 1938 1232 612 1m Integration Mode None Inband Inband None Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Operator Transfer FX A FTX FTX FTX A FTX FTX FTX A FTX A Sequence A A A A Extension FX A FTX FTX FTX A FTX FTX FTX A FTX A Transfer A A A A Sequence Alternate FX A FTX FTX FTX A FTX FTX FTX A FTX
39. INTERACTIVE Mode Note When you select INTERACTIVE Mode you must connect the RS232 c cable between your PC and the TD1232 unit 2 Select Extns gt Station Hunting and change the Hunting type to AA for Automated Attendant into the Type column of group 16 106 Station Hunting Type Intercept UCD Table Agent Extension 1 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 2 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 3 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 4 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored 5 Disable Busy n Not Stored Not Stored E Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored i Disable Busy o Not Stored Not Stored 8 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored 3 Disable Busy n Not Stored Not Stored 10 Disable Busy n Not Stored Not Stored 11 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored 12 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored ils Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored 14 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored Busy a Not Stored Nat Stored Busy Not Stored Not Stored 18 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored 19 Disable Busy n Not Stored Not Stored 20 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored 21 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 22 Disable E ii Buy 0 Not Stored NotSteed i E 23 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored 24 Disable Busy u Not Stored Not Stored 25 Disable Busy Not Stored Not S
40. Installation Manual 81 4 2 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION 82 e Click Apply to save the changed data f Set Status to INS Screen output 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment TYP No VPS Card 101 DHLc Type TVP 200 1 DN Refer Status Ext No 1 Ext No 2 JackNo PortNo DN Group No DN Group No 1 1065 126 11066 126 1069 126 41070 126 1073 126 11074 126 ajojn l l 1 l a Cr a Ww N orn 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment 1 Anply_ Cancel Help To set the trunk outside line features follow the instructions in Settings for the trunk outside line features 3 3 3 KX TD500 Programming for Inband Integration in 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software i e HyperTerminal Procomm Plus Smartcom Communication Parameters 9600 8 Bit None 1 Turn the power switch off at the VPS and set the Rotary Switch to position 5 Only perform this step when initially setting up the system CAUTION Setting the Rotary Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages except User 1 and User 2 prompts Turn the power switch back on at the VPS and wait approximately 7 8 min while the system initialis
41. Length ranges from 8 60 s in increments of 4 s New Message Retention Time Maximum time is 30 days Saved Message Retention Time Up to 30 days 0 Unlimited Message Length Length ranges from 1 6 min 0 Unlimited Number of Messages The number of messages range from 5 100 Total Message Time Total message time ranges from 5 100 min 0 Unlimited Message Retrieval Order Settings are LIFO Last In First Out or FIFO First In First Out Message Scanning with Information Settings are enable or disable Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting Settings are enable or disable Call Waiting on Busy Settings are enable or disable Message Cancel for Live Call Screening Settings are enable or disable Direct Mailbox Access Settings are enable or disable Intercom Paging Group Number 1 17 Subscriber Service Prompt Mode 1 System Prompt 2 User 1 Prompt 3 User 2 Prompt Remote Call Forward to CO Settings are enable or disable Delete Message Confirmation Settings are enable or disable Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement 0 30 Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID Settings are enable or disable Caller ID Screening Settings are enable or disable Message Notification Settings are enable or disable External Message Delivery Settings are enable or disable Auto Forwarding Settings are enable or disable Not available for COS No 63 Message Manager and COS No 64
42. MINUTE 393 394 NINETEENTH 394 395 NINETY 395 396 NINETY EIGHT 396 397 NINETY FIVE 397 398 NINETY FOUR 398 399 NINETY NINE 399 400 NINETY ONE 400 401 NINETY SEVEN 401 402 NINETY SIX 402 403 NINETY THREE 403 404 NINETY TWO 404 405 NINTH 405 406 No answer greeting is message 406 407 No answer greeting is not recorded 407 408 No external delivery message 408 pending 409 No letters have been specified 409 410 No messages to verify 410 411 No more messages 411 412 No one specified by this number 412 413 No previous message 413 414 No question recorded 414 415 NOVEMBER 415 416 O CLOCK 416 417 OCTOBER 417 Installation Manual 331 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 418 of Company name 652 418 419 Old message 419 420 on date 182 420 19 421 ONE 421 422 ONE HOUR 422 423 One attempt was busy 423 424 One attempt was no answer 424 425 One attempt was successful 425 426 One message to verify 426 427 One other person is queing 427 428 Only extension call is available 550 428 465 429 Operator transfer disabled 429 430 Operator transfer enabled 430 431 number other people are queing 431 432 Otherwise press 2 753 432 783 432 591 722 432 727 4
43. Operates only in Lunch Mode Manual Break Mode Operates only in Break Mode PBX Control Mode Operation changes depending on PBX time period DPT Integration only See Time Group and Time Service in this Table See Time Group Service Service Mode in B6 2 Time Group Service See C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING 200 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Special Feature Authorisation Permits mailbox owners to use the following special features Remote Call Forward to CO Delete Message Confirmation Message Waiting Notification External Message Delivery and Auto Forwarding But the Message Manager can only utilise the following features Remote Call Forward to CO Delete Message Confirmation and Message Waiting Notification and the System Manager can only utilise the Delete Message Confirmation feature See Remote Call Forward to CO Delete Message Confirmation Authorization for Message Notification Authorization for External Message Delivery and Authorization for Auto Forwarding in Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Remote Call Forward to CO Delete Message Confirmation and Authorization for Message Notification in Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PAR
44. Remote Call 1 Yes If set to Yes Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an Forward to CO 2 No outside CO line the Message Manager can program his No extension from a remote location to forward various types of calls to either Telephone No 1 or Telephone No 2 preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting or to any other telephone number Note The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available if DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TD series telephone system Important Note With respect to PBX programming it is possible that Call Forward to CO is disabled To enable VPS Remote Call Forwarding the KX TD1232 for example must be programmed properly For the COS of the extensions whose calls are to be forwarded to an outside CO line enable the following 504 Call Forward to Outside Line Delete 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS requests confirmation from the Message 2 No mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the mailbox Confirmation No If set to No the message is erased immediately Authorization 1 Yes If set to Yes the Message Manager is able to utilise the for Message 2 No Message Waiting Notification feature The sub parameters Notification Yes to be set include Beeper Callback No Entry Mode MWL Notification for Unreceived Message and Device Notification for Unreceived Message If set to No sub parameters cannot be assigned Installation Manual 223 B3 SYSTEM ADMINI
45. Silence Detection T Dial Tone Detection W Wait for 1 s X Extension dialling A Answer 1 9 0 X st Dial Codes Table B 42 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls Transfer FX to the operator s extension Sequence Extension The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls Transfer FX to any extension except the operator s Sequence 268 Installation Manual B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Table B 42 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Alternate The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls Extension FX to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group Transfer Sequence Reconnect If an extension is busy this sequence allows the VPS to Sequence on FWW reconnect to the caller Busy Reconnect If the extension does not answer this sequence allows the Sequence on FWW VPS to reconnect with the caller No Answer Reconnect The VPS performs this sequence to retrieve a call placed Sequence on FWW on hold after the extension in the Call Screening mode Refuse Call has refused to accept it Light On This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must perform to Sequence for enable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension M None essage Waiting Lamp Light Off This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must perform to Sequence for disable the Message Waiting
46. To access the proper menu for Day Mode features for the selected PBX trunk outside line group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 48 1 Installation Manual 227 B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Table B 10 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Company 1 32 Specifies the company greeting to be played on the trunk Greeting No S System outside line group Greeting N None The System Greeting is Good Morning Afternoon System Evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System Greeting Incoming Call 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services Service 2 Auto Attn 3 Interview Note 1 When you specify the Interview Service one of 4 Custom subscriber s Interview Mailbox numbers should also be 5 None specified None Note 2 When you specify the Custom service one of 100 1 100 Custom service numbers should also be specified Incoming Call 1 System Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on Service Prompt 2 User 1 this trunk outside line group When set to Selective the 3 User 2 caller can select the language of his choice provided the 4 Selective Message Manager has recorded the Multilingual User 1 Selection Menu and the System Administrator has specified Prompt Selection Number in System User 1 User 2 Prompt Selection Number in Table B 26 in B6 5 Prompt Setting No
47. When using a VT100 or compatible terminal perform either of the following steps to choose options from screen menus Move the cursor to the desired listed option and Press RETURN e Type the number of the option desired and Press RETURN Table B 1 KEY FUNCTIONS 1 Moves the cursor up one line i Moves the cursor down one line gt Moves the cursor to the right lt Moves the cursor to the left 1 9 Typing any number 1 through 9 will select the corresponding option for that number RETURN Also the ENTER key Selects the number entered Exits the current screen and returns to the previous step within the menu Back space Used to correct any mis typed entry Other RS 232C Terminals ASCII Terminals When using RS 232C Terminals Type the number of the option desired and Press RETURN to choose menu options Table B 2 KEY FUNCTIONS 1 9 then RETURN Typing any number 1 through 9 will select the corresponding option for that number Pressing RETURN will select the number entered Exits the current screen and returns to the previous step within the menu 206 Installation Manual B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION Using the Interface Programming Guidance Each parameter is accessed through a series of menu screens The Programming Menu Structure Diagram provided below depicts this menu flow A menu flow that corresponds to the Programming Menu Structure
48. enter the extension number in DN 102 Installation Manual 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES Example screen output Flexible CO Key 10 KeyType 2WAY TRN DN OK Cancel Help 6 Click OK Flexible CO Key screen for all CO Keys displays again 7 Click OK 4 2 Extension Line 1 2 screen displays again 8 Click OK or Apply 9 Repeat these steps for each extension 4 4 13 Live Call Screening Activation To activate the Live Call Screening status follow the steps below PC programming is also possible Press the assigned LCS Button Press the assigned LCS Password Confirm the assigned LCS Button is red on Repeat these steps for each telephone k ON Conditions To activate the Live Call Screening features it is necessary to light the LCS button after assigning the LCS password and LCS button 4 4 14 Live Call Screening Password Control This feature allows Operator s and the Manager of the PBX to cancel the password for LCS at any extension If a user forgets the pre programmed password Operator s and the Manager of the PBX can cancel the LCS password 1 Enter PITS Programming a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode 2 Dial 03 Installation Manual 103 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 3 Dial the desired Extension Number or Press X to remo
49. gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday Service is disregarded When a call is received through a PBX in the PBX Control Mode the VPS obtains the Time Service Day Night Lunch or Break setting from the PBX and operates accordingly When the Integration Mode is other than DPT Integration and the PBX Control Mode is selected the VPS will operate in the Automatic Mode Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX the PBX Control Mode may not function properly For more information consult your dealer Follow the steps below to assign a Service Mode to each Time Group 1 8 1 Log in the main menu 2 Press 6 for other features Installation Manual C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING 3 Press 4 to change Service Mode setting 4 Type the Time Group number 1 8 5 The VPS plays the current setting Press 1 to change the setting 6 Press 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 to choose the desired Service Mode entry 1 Automatic Mode Operates according to the setting in Time Service default 2 Manual Day Mode Operates only in Day Mode 3 Manual Night Mode Operates only in Night Mode 4 Manual Lunch Mode Operates only in the Lunch Mode 5 Manual Break Mode Operates only in the Break Mode 6 PBX Control Mode Operation changes depending on PBX time period 7 Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual 287 C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GR
50. press 9 556 Sorry there are no more matching names 564 Sorry this name cannot be found 303 Incorrect entry 299 If you are using a rotary telephone stay on the line 678 To call the operator press 0 60 Calling the operator 467 Please wait a moment 914 Welcome to the general delivery mailbox 466 Please leave a message at the tone Installation Manual D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE Table D 1 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 744 To end recording hang up or press 1 for more features 789 To pause and restart recording press 2 819 To review press 1 663 To accept press 2 755 To erase and try again press 3 674 To add press 4 754 To erase and exit press X 783 To make this message private press 1 432 Otherwise press 2 590 Thank you for calling VM Prompts Table D 2 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 463 Please enter the person s mailbox number AA Prompts Table D 3 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 462 Please enter the person s extension 921 You have a call 553 Sorry no one is available to answer the call 781 To leave a message press 1 749 To enter another extension press X 561 Sorry this line is busy 302 If you would like to hold press 1 683 To cancel holding press 2 now Otherwise lIl try your party again Installation Manual 313 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS The tab
51. 1 Use this parameter to enable or disable the Operator Service It specifies Operator 1 s extension and the treatment of the calls transferred to that extension The extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will be for the Message Manager When Operator service is enabled operator seeking calls first reach Operator 1 s extension Notes e Because the extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is for the Message Manager you cannot assign this extension to any other mailbox e By default the extension number for the Message Manager s extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is 0 However the default setting cannot be used with the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature and the Remote Call Forwarding Set feature When using these features You must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters Day Mode Operator 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 1 1 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator 1 Disable Enables or disables the Operator Service feature Service 2 Enable Enable Note All non touchtone input calls in Automated Attendant Service will be transferred to the General Delivery Mailbox when the Operator Service is disabled Operator s 1 5 digits Specifies the extension number for Operator 1 Extension 0 No
52. 1 C0001 for zj prwr eo Destination BUBSCHBER Mak Temata Day 1005 wight 1005 Lunch 1005 Break t005 E DDE wgittoreceive WoD Callect Call Digite to delete z Enable Disable Umberto be added z liec Anita r Answer Wait Timer 3 rVVITTEESTHTTRTHETTTE SEGUE e sonal None z C Immediate Wink NEUE CPC Signal d ST Detection Nau Detection Time None ee i ne Disable None Geneitivitye ili ous IN Detection C Enable Detection Time None Sensitivity OUT fous Disable m Signal Detection TiE ta GO Security Made vo 7 First Ring Delay Timer ss C Enable Disable Bending We CaleriD vo z 4 1 Trunk Line x OK Leo Cancel mes b Assignment of IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer destination 1 Go to the 3 1 Trunk Group 1 2 screen 2 Assign Intercept Destination Day Night for the trunk outside line group 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Note Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned 64 Installation Manual 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Screen output 3 1 Trunk Group 1 2 c Assignment of IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer timer 1 Go to the 2 4 System Timer 1 2 screen 2 Assign Intercept Time parameter 3 Click Apply to save the changed data No
53. 3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL The wall where the VPS is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the VPS If screws other than the ones supplied are used use the same sized diameter screws as the enclosed ones Mounting on a Wooden Wall 1 Place the template included on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions 2 Install the 3 screws included accessories into the wall Wooden Wall S Drive the screw to this position 3 Hook the unit on the screw heads R ZA Mounting on a Concrete or Mortar Wall 1 Place the template on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions 34 Installation Manual 2 3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL 2 Drill 3 holes and drive the rawlplugs user supplied with a hammer flush to the wall Concrete or Mortar Wall 6 4 mm 3 Install the 3 screws included accessories into the rawlplugs To the wall surface Rawlplug Drive the screw to this position fieno 4 Hook the unit on the screw heads A AUT R 7 ZAT Installation Manual 35 2 4 FRAME EARTH CONNECTION 2 4 FRAME EARTH CONNECTION IMPORTANT Connect the frame of the main unit to the earth 1 Loosen the screw 2 Insert the earthing wire 3 Tighten the screw 4 Connect the
54. 37 82 88 Rotary telephone service 199 RS 232C Parameters 264 RS 232C Settings 53 RS 232C Settings 1 6 1 116 RS 232C Signals 47 S SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 30 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 3 Sample Company Greeting 1 114 Sample Custom Service for Foreign Languages 115 Sample Custom Service Message 114 Sample Custom Service Tree 114 SAVE 143 153 Saved Message Retention Time 279 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device SAVE 153 Screened Transfer from an SLT 52 Sending Messages 14 Service access commands 200 Service mode 200 286 Set Password PASS 149 Set Time TIME 150 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS 278 Setting Device Status 299 SETTING MAILBOXES 130 Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status 299 Setting Minimum Recording Length MRL 158 Setting Notification by Calling Status 299 SETTING PORTS 124 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK 284 304 SETTING UP MAILBOXES 141 275 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION 299 Signal Ground SG 47 Single Line Tip Ring Port Circuits 51 Software Verification 86 Special feature authorisation 201 SPECIFICATIONS 175 Specifications 21 Specifications hard disk 32 Specifications outline 21 Specifications VPS 175 Standard IBM25 Pin Connection 47 Starting the Quick Setup 107 STARTING UP 106 Subscriber Service Prompt Mode 281 Subscriber service prompt selection 219 Subscriber Use 16 System Administration 16 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MANAGEMENT AND USE 16
55. 5 1 STARTING UP Screen output when Quick Setup is finished ON LINE MODE gt Installation Manual 113 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS 5 2 5 2 1 PORT SETTING OPTIONS Design each system according to the needs of your customer You should be familiar with all options for port assignment so that customers get exactly what they need and expect Each port can be assigned as Voice Mail Interview Service Automated Attendant or Custom Service Custom Service is the most flexible of all the services because it allows access to the other services by pressing one key We recommend programming all ports as Custom Service for caller convenience Custom Service Setting Example Custom Service incorporates all features of the Automated Attendant and Voice Mail Custom Service offers callers a menu of single digits that they may use to reach the desired location quickly and easily Sample Company Greeting 1 Thank you for calling ABC company Company greeting should be short Sample Custom Service Message If you know the extension number of the person you are calling you can dial it at any time For a list of extensions Press 1 to reach the sales section Press 2 to reach the service section Press 3 if you would like to place an order Press 4 all other callers please wait and an operator will be right with you Sample Custom Service Tree Create a tree to design a route that leads callers to the
56. 802 To set the answer length press 2 To erase the question press 3 803 To record press 1 803 To erase press 2 804 To repeat this message press 1 804 812 746 804 812 822 760 746 804 793 756 813 846 232 804 811 793 756 813 822 760 846 784 804 793 756 846 232 804 811 793 756 822 760 846 784 805 To repeat this name press 3 662 238 805 748 806 To repeat this schedule press 3 815 794 806 796 794 806 796 807 To repeat press 1 807 746 807 432 808 To repeat press 3 722 663 808 809 To replay the previous message 809 information press 1 To play the next message s information press 2 To play the message press 3 810 To replay the previous message 810 793 790 press 1 Installation Manual 351 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 811 To replay the previous message 804 811 793 756 813 822 760 846 press 1 twice 784 804 811 793 756 822 760 846 784 811 793 811 812 To reply press 2 804 812 746 804 812 822 760 746 813 To reply press 4 804 793 756 813 846 232 804 811 793 756 813 822 760 846 78
57. 9 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current number b Type the number of messages 5 100 C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Total Message Time 10 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current time b Type the total message time 5 100 min or 0 unlimited C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Retrieval Order 11 8 The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current order LIFO or FIFO b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Scanning with Information 12 8 The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting 13 8 The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Call Waiting on Busy 14 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Cancel for Live Call Screening 15 8 The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it 280 Installation Manual C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Direct Mailbox Access 16 a The current setting plays Press 1 to chan
58. A Extension A A A A Transfer Sequence Reconnect FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW Sequence on Busy Reconnect FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW Sequence on No Answer Reconnect FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW Sequence on Refuse Call Light On N A N A T701X T491X Tx9x T701X T701X Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp Light Off E N A N A T702X T 90X T49X T700X T700X Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp Call Waiting N A N A 2 N A N A 2 2 Sequence Release P N A N A F N A N A F F Sequence for Call Waiting Installation Manual 57 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Check with manufacturer Not Available Adding A for answer to the operator and extension transfer eliminates the message You have a call when the AA transfers a call The VPS disconnects when the call is answered Adding D for disconnect creates a blind transfer Note The UK version KX T1232 does not support Inband Integration 3 3 2 KX TA Series Programming for Inband Integration via 58 the Manager s Extension 1 Enable System Programme 102 for each extension connected to the VPS Jack 07 or jacks 07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS as the Voice Mail port This parameter is used to tell the KX TA series which extensions are connected to the VPS Ports with this parameter enabled can send Follow on ID and touchtone call status Signalling busy answered disc
59. CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time Service setting Day Night Lunch and Break Services for each Time Group 1 8 however the System Manager or System Administrator can change the current call handling method by assigning a specific Service Mode to the desired Time Group Once the Service Mode has been changed it is retained unless the System Manager or System Administrator changes it again even after the power is cut and restored Note While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer the System Manager cannot change the Service Mode setting The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available Assigning the Service Mode There are 6 Service Modes available Automatic Mode Operates according to the setting in Time Service default e Manual Day Mode Operates only in Day Mode e Manual Night Mode Operates only in Night Mode e Manual Lunch Mode Operates only in Lunch Mode e Manual Break Mode Operates only in Break Mode e PBX Control Mode Operation changes depending on PBX time period available only with DPT Integration In the Automatic Mode services have this order of priority Holiday Service gt Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday service has the highest priority In the Manual Modes Day Night Lunch or Break Holiday Service is disregarded Caller ID Call Routing
60. CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Recommended Settings 1 If the VPS is answering all incoming outside calls a Assignment of DIL 1 1 line 1 Go to the 4 1 Trunk Line screen 2 Assign Destination Day Night Lunch Break for each trunk outside line to a specific extension number VPS port 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Notes Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned Please Set First Ring Delay Timer to 5 s default 0 s Screen output 4 1 Trunk Line t E eue pres Sl 80 C16 Digits fe Enable gui C Immediate te VITE Tita Secuni ice Sendo NE aller Installation Manual 63 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Recommended Settings 2 If the VPS is only answering incoming outside calls not answered by the Operator Operator backup a Assignment of DIL 1 1 line 1 Go to the 4 1 Trunk Line screen 2 Assign Destination Day Night Lunch Break for each trunk outside line to a specific extension number 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Notes Specify the FDN for the extension group to which Operator has been assigned Please Set First Ring Delay Timer to 5 s default 0 s Screen output Card No 106 ELCOT PotNo NNNNNE Copy Name n Incoming ivpe Dial Type 4 Group No
61. CPU Card Information 2 Assignment of the ports to be connected to the VPS a Go to the 1 3 Extension Port Assignment screen b Select the appropriate VPS card 101 DHLC in the Card No menu C Set the attribute of the valid ports to be connected to the VPS to VPS DPT d Click Apply to save the changed data Note The parameters except for Attribute will disappear and the DN Directory Number will be cleared Installation Manual 79 4 2 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION Screen output 1 3 Extension Port Assignment Card No 101 DHLC Port NO Attribute Tel Type DN Group No Parallel XDP Status 1 esor al s 2 rs cem s a es orm a a Meson al s ra crm al s es crm al 7 rs cem al ERPS DPT DN Refer 1 3 Extension Port Assignment OK Apply Cancel Help 3 Assignment of VPS card and its model a Go to the 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment screen b Select the corresponding equipment number in the TVP No menu C Select TVP200 1 in the Type menu d Select the card 101 DHLC for jacks 1 6 which connects with the VPS in the VPS Card menu 80 Installation Manual 4 2 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION Screen output 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment TYP No fi VPS Card None Type VP 200 1 DN Refer Status Ext No 1 Ext No 2 JackNo PortN DN Group No DN 1 o ELL UL RIUNIRE Hi lshsbsael ao cc 4 WwW N
62. Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 11 Jl Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 12 Jl Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 13 Jl Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 14 I Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 15 JI Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 16 Il AA 0 BSY Disable Disable 8 Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu Select Line and then select CO Line Setting 1 Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group CO Line Setting CO CPC DIL 1 1 DDI No Detencion EXT No Service Mode Out Day Night Day Night 01 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 02 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 03 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 04 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 05 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 06 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 07 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 08 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 09 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 10 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 11 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 12 44 Disable EXT 305 EXT 305 Disable Disable 72 Installation Manual 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs B Programming based on Windows Application 1 Select File gt New Open BATCH Mode or Connect gt DSHS Connect Disconnect
63. Do not install the unit near water or moisture heating appliances or electrical noise generating devices such as televisions monitors fluorescent lamps or electric motors Do not overload wall outlets Overloaded outlets could result in fire and or electrical shock Do not use solvents liquid cleaners water or abrasive powders to clean this unit Use only a damp soft cloth for cleaning Do not use the telephone during a lightning storm or to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE Installation Manual 3 4 The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft MODEL NO SERIAL NO For your future reference DATE OF PURCHASE NAME OF DEALER DEALER S ADDRESS DEALER S TEL NO WARNING THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS BECOMING ACCESSIBLE DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECT TH
64. Extension Transfer Sequence Auto Configuration Available with DPT Integration only The VPS can automatically draw information from the KX TD500 the KX TD816 the KX TD1232 or the KX TD612 This information includes among other things extension number assignments for each VPS port This saves time in the initial setup Auto Configuration can be executed by Rotary switch settings or by System Administration Quick Setup Auto Forwarding Allows unretrieved messages to be copied or moved to another mailbox Automated Attendant The Automated Attendant feature of the VPS requests the caller to enter an extension number and then the VPS dials the number If there is no answer or the line is busy the caller is given some options including the option to leave a message in a mailbox This is the advantage of calling an extension indirectly through the Automated Attendant rather than calling it directly Call Blocking Connects the caller to the Incomplete Call Handling Service without ringing the subscriber s extension Call Screening Allows subscribers to screen calls The VPS prompts the caller with the message Record your name at the tone and records the caller s name it then puts the caller on hold while playing the name to the subscriber who decides whether to take the call or not Call Transfer Transfers a call to the requested destination Called Party ID Sometimes referred to as Follow On ID The PBX sends the VPS digits t
65. Fax Call Report Clear Enter the Number 7 3 1 Mailbox Assignments The Mailbox Assignments report provides information about the mailbox authorised features and current parameter settings Note Depending on the PBX extension numbering the mailbox numbers might be 2 to 5 digits long Installation Manual 163 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS To select the Mailbox Assignments Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 1 Mailbox Assignments 28 JUL 2001 11 30 AM MBOX Extn Name Fir Lst COS CExtn IVMBOX AITrf MNist MN2nd MN3rd 510 201 JONE DELY 2 601 621 511 202 SCHE 2 602 611 Bep Tel 512 203 MAY 16 603 612 Tel Bep 520 310 JONE 1 X Tel Bep 521 320 DAVE 1 888 E 522 410 CLUS ALCC 21 523 421 WHIT BLUE 32 642 COS Class of Service CExtn Covering Extension IVMBOX Interview Mailbox AITrf All Call Transfer to Mailbox MN 1st Message Notification Device 1 MN2nd Message Notification Device 2 MN3rd Message Notification Device 3 Bep Beeper Pager Tel Telephone Note An X displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to uw YES w 7 3 2 COS Class of Service Assignments The COS Class of Service Assignments report provides information concerning all Class of Service numbers For a complete explana
66. Forwarding Feature of the PBX to permit a caller to leave a message when the mailbox number of the called extension is not known Touchtone Integration works with the Automated Attendant Service to enable the VPS to immediately recognise the state of the call busy answered ringing etc and improve its call handling performance See Voice Mail in 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible See 1 4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION See 2 7 CONNECTIONS See 3 1 1 DPT or Inband Signalling See Section 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS See Inband Signalling in GLOSSARY Incomplete Call Handling Service Allows the subscriber to offer callers several service options when the extension is busy or there is no answer Leaving a Message Transfer to Covering Extension Returning to the Automated Attendant Top Menu Intercom Paging Calling a Beeper Pager or Calling Operators See Calling a Beeper Pager and Intercom Paging DPT Integration Only in this Table See Incomplete Call Handling Service in GLOSSARY See 4 3 Incomplete Call Handling Status in the Subscriber s Guide 188 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Intercom Paging DPT Integration Only Permits callers to page subscribers by PBX paging there are different kinds of PBX paging and these can be specified by VPS programming whe
67. Lamp at an extension M None essage Waiting Lamp Call Waiting The VPS carries out this sequence when performing call None da i Sequence waiting if the extension being called is busy Release The VPS performs this sequence to release call waiting Sequence for None Call Waiting Inband Signaling Parameters Use these parameters if the PBX sends touchtones to the VPS to indicate the state of a call busy answered disconnected etc The integration mode must be set to Inband If PBX type is set to a KX T series telephone system the Inband Signaling parameters will automatically default to the proper codes as shown To access the proper menu for Inband Signaling Parameters follow the menu path System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 2 The following parameters can be programmed using 0 9 X and A D Installation Manual 269 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Table B 43 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Ringback 1 Indicates Ringback Tone Sent to the VPS when the extension dialled is ringing Busy Indicates Busy Tone Sent to the VPS when the 2 extension dialled is busy Reorder Indicates Reorder Tone Sent to the VPS when an 3 invalid extension number is dialled or when inadvertently connected to another VPS DND 4 Indicates Do Not Disturb Tone Sent to th
68. M Defines how the VPS treats calls received from rotary Telephone Call 2 Operator telephones or calls from callers that are unfamiliar with Coverage Extension the VPS operation in the Voice Mail Service Day Night G D M Note G D M General Delivery Mailbox Other Parameters Intercom Paging Parameter Intercom Paging is a PBX feature that makes it possible to page the caller s party through telephone speakers To utilise this feature the PBX must have the Intercom Paging feature available and the VPS must be properly programmed This feature is available for DPT Integration mode only shown To access the proper menu for Intercom Paging Parameter follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 7 260 Installation Manual B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 34 for Group 1 16 Paging Code for All Groups Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Intercom Up to 12 digits con Specifies the intercom paging sequence required by Paging sisting of 0 9 x the PBX This can be programmed using up to 12 of Sequence and special codes the following 8 letters and 12 dial codes FXW D Disconnecting F Flash Recall R Ringback Tone Detection S Silence Detection T Dial Tone Detection W Wait for 1 s X Pager Dialling A Answer 1 9 0 X st Dial Digits Release for Up to 12 digits con S
69. M Service 3 FAX Transfer x Subscriber 3 Custom 3 User 2 Access 3 Menu Msg Vietnamese service N Operator 0 Operator 1 A A Service 2 V M Service 3 FAX Transfer None None x Exit 4 Dept Dial 5 Repeat Menu x Exit Main Menu Custom 100 System Access 9 Menu Msg None N Xfer Mbx 998 1 Custom 1 2 Custom 2 3 Custom 3 4 Dept Dial Indicates that Custom Service No is 100 Indicates that System prompts are active Indicates that the callers have accessed this Custom Service 9 times This counter can be cleared See 7 2 12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR Indicates that the menu message for this Custom Service is None not recorded If menu message is recorded Rec will appear Caller will be sent to General Delivery Mailbox GDM if he dials nothing Custom Service 1 will play when the 1 key is pressed Custom Service 2 will play when the 2 key is pressed Custom Service 3 will play when the 3 key is pressed Department Dialling menu will play when the 4 is pressed 7 2 12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR Each Custom Service has an access counter that counts the number of times the service has been accessed This command clears this counter Type CCLR Press Space and Enter Custom Service Menu 1 100 then Press RETURN Installation Manual 157 7 2
70. Message Waiting Notification 3 User 2 Call and Subscriber Service User 1 Note If User 1 is specified as Prompt Mode but not recorded by the Message Manager the VPS will automatically play the factory recorded System prompts in English By default User 1 prompts are not recorded Remote Call 1 Yes If set to Yes Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an Forward to CO 2 No outside CO line a subscriber can program his No extension from a remote location to forward various types of calls to either Telephone No 1 or Telephone No 2 preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting or to any other telephone number Note The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available if DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TD series telephone system Important Note With respect to PBX programming it is possible that Call Forward to CO is disabled To enable VPS Remote Call Forwarding the KX TD1232 for example must be programmed properly For the COS of the extensions whose calls are to be forwarded to an outside CO line enable the following 504 Call Forward to Outside Line Delete 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS requests confirmation from the Message 2 No mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the Confirmation No mailbox If set to No the message is erased immediately Number of 0 30 Specifies the maximum number of Caller IDs which CIDs for Caller 30 subscribers can assign for the Personal Caller Name Name An
71. Number of Messages per Mailbox 100 maximum programmable Hardware One Hard Disk Drive Three Optional Port Card Slots for KX TVP102 and or KX TVP204 Cards One RS 232C Connector e One Rotary Switch Installation Manual 21 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS 1 3 7 Expansion Capabilities Expansion requires additional port card s KX TVP102 or KX TVP204 The KX TVP102 card has 2 digital analogue ports and the ports are increased in increments of 2 e The KX TVP204 card has 4 digital ports and the ports are increased in increments of 4 1 3 8 Recommendations for System Configuration 22 General guideline a ratio of 6 1 for every 6 lines 1 port There are 2 questions to ask when considering how many ports are desirable Are the ports answering all incoming calls or just forwarded transferred calls e If they are answering incoming calls how busy are the lines The guideline above 6 1 usually works well with moderate traffic However this may have to be modified for heavy traffic Recommendations are outlined in the following charts PBX VPS Outside CO Lines pd ek Nm SO OLED Gr RA UN m One port may not support an Automated Attendant configuration with 5 outside CO lines The preceding recommendations for Automated Attendant ports may have to be modified for heavy traffic Installation Manual 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS Outside CO Lines E
72. Operates according to the setting in 3 Manual the Time Service Night Mode 2 Manual Day Mode Operates only in Day Mode 4 Manual 3 Manual Night Mode Operates only in Night Mode Lunch Mode 4 Manual Lunch Mode Operates only in Lunch Mode 5 Manual 5 Manual Break Mode Operates only in Break Mode Break Mode 6 PBX Control Mode Operation changes depending 6 PBX Control on PBX time period Mode Automatic Note Once the Service Mode has been changed it is Mode retained unless the System Manager or System Administrator changes it again even after the power is cut and restored PBX Control Mode is available only if DPT Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TD series telephone system If PBX Control Mode does not function after it has been selected the VPS will operate in Automatic Mode In Automatic Mode services have this order of priority Holiday Service Caller ID Call Routing Trunk Service Port Service Holiday service has the highest priority Installation Manual 245 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS In Manual Modes Day Night Lunch or Break services have this order of priority Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday Service is disregarded Time Group Service Time Service Time Service is a timer function that selects the desired call handling method based upon time of day Day Night Lunch and Break Services are availa
73. Panasonic Voice Processing System For example the Message Manager can record menus in a wide variety of foreign languages e The Voice Labels maximum length 6 min each Up to 20 System Group Distribution Lists can be created by the System Administrator Each list can have a voice label e The User Prompts maximum length 6 min each There are 3 kinds of voice mail prompts 1 System Prompts 2 User 1 Prompts and 3 User 2 Prompts Generally the System Prompts should be left alone they are recorded by the factory in English However the Message Manager can record User 1 Prompts and User 2 Prompts in any language he wishes e The Multilingual Selection Menu maximum length 6 min With this menu callers can select the language they prefer to hear all prompts mentioned in the previous paragraph The User Prompts For example the Message Manager can record a menu like this For English press 7 For Spanish press 8 For Chinese press 9 e The System Caller Names maximum length 4 s each Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be registered by the System Administrator The Message Manager is responsible for recording a name for each Caller ID number While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer the Message Manager cannot record the Voice Labels and System Caller Names The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available Recording Menus and Voice Labels 1 Log in the Main Menu Insta
74. Personal Greeting is being played or while a caller is leaving a message Custom Service Setting Allows one touch access to extensions other custom service menus fax machine mailboxes etc A greeting can be recorded for each of the 100 menus to give verbal directions to the non subscribers Default Setting A parameter defined for the system at the factory which can be changed through system programming by the System Administrator or the System Manager Installation Manual Delayed Ringing There are 2 kinds of delayed ringing applications 1 The VPS is used as the no answer destination for the Intercept Routing feature of your PBX 2 DIL 1 N outside CO line to several extensions terminates on telephones and VPS ports To give the telephone users a chance to answer calls the VPS lines should be programmed for delayed ringing Otherwise the VPS will answer the calls immediately Delete Message Confirmation The VPS requests confirmation from the mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the mailbox Delivery Time The time specified by the subscriber for the VPS to deliver a pre recorded message You can specify delivery time in External Delivery Message or when delivering a message to other subscribers Subscriber s Guide Section 3 1 Department Dialling A speed dialling feature that permits an outside caller to dial a single digit 1 9 to reach a specific extension Direct Mailbox Access Available with DPT Int
75. Press 1 to record a message 7 Record the message at the tone and Press 1 8 Press 2 to accept the entry 9 Press 1 to specify the delivery time and the private status Note Press 2 to send the message immediately and return to the Main Menu 10 Press 1 to specify the delivery time 11 Type the time and Press 12 Press 1 for AM or 2 for PM Note This selection is not available if 24 h is selected in Position of AM PM in Time Stamp in Table B 26 in B6 5 Prompt Setting 13 Type the date month and day and Press 14 Press 2 to accept the entry 15 Press 1 to make this message private otherwise Press 2 Checking Mailbox Distribution Use this feature to check if messages have been delivered to recipients 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 4 to check distribution status 3 Press 3 to cancel the message or delete verification Note Press 1 to listen to messages Press 1 twice to check the previous message Press 2 to check the next message 4 Press 1 to delete verification of this message or 2 to cancel message delivery 292 Installation Manual C9 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX C9 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX In order to ensure system security establish a password consisting of up to 10 numeric characters Anyone requesting access to the System Manager s service will be required to enter this password before proceeding N
76. Select 2 because Quick Setup is only available when using a personal computer that can emulate a VT100 terminal 12 Go to the System Administration Top Menu Select 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions TEST Press the INTERCOM button and then 265 If the VPS answers you have a DPT connection Set the Rotary Switch to position 0 after initialisation is complete The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX TD1232 should be able to communicate through DPT Integration We recommend that the KX TD1232 system has any optional extension cards installed and telephones connected before starting the VPS When running the Quick Setup command Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM from the VPS the PBX transmits the extension information automatically This saves time when programming the VPS 90 Installation Manual 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 4 3 2 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool Follow these steps after communication between the KX TD1232 and the programming software has been established Refer to the Operating and Maintenance manual for connection information A Programming based on DOS terminal 1 Check the software version a Go to the Main Menu Press the ALT key and the letter V at the s
77. System Manager Not available for COS No 64 System Manager Note While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer the System Manager cannot set COS parameters The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 278 Installation Manual C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 2 to set Class of Service 4 Type the Class of Service Number 1 64 Personal Greeting Length 5 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current length b Type the Personal Greeting length 8 60 s Note The value goes up in increments of 4 s C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it New Message Retention Time 6 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current time b Type the retention time up to 30 days C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Saved Message Retention Time 7 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current time b Type the retention time up to 30 days or 0 unlimited C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Length 8 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current length b Type the message length 1 6 min or 0 unlimited C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual 279 C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Number of Messages
78. System Manager s password is assigned through the System Manager s Service To Access the System Manager s Mailbox 1 Dial an Extension Number providing Voice Mail Service Or Dial any VPS Extension Number and Press 6 Service Access Command Please enter the person s mailbox number To enter by name press and 1 If you are using a rotary telephone stay on the line To call the operator press 0 2 Press x then Type the System Manager s Mailbox Number 99 999 9999 or 99999 Enter your password followed by 3 Type the Password followed by 4 The Main Menu of System Manager s Service will be played You have number new message s To receive the message press 1 To deliver a message press 2 To customise your mailbox press 3 To check the mailbox distribution press 4 For a system report press 5 For other features press 6 To end this call press X 274 Installation Manual C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES The System Manager s primary function is to create mailboxes for new subscribers and to maintain system organisation by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes Note While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer the System Manager cannot set up mailboxes The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available Creating and Editing a Mailbox The System Manager can both cr
79. TVP204 Card Latches aS Mii 42 Installation Manual 2 7 CONNECTIONS 2 7 CONNECTIONS Connecting to the PBX One jack of the VPS can be connected to 1 jack of the PBX Use a 4 conductor cable for connection with KX TD systems that use DPT Integration Use a 2 conductor T and R cable for connection to all other PBXs 4 Conductor Cable Y Y PB TT NE B B Modular Connection B BLACK R RED Outer Pins G GREEN Inner Pins Y YELLOW RJ11 Terminal wire BT431 or BT631 L 5 SS Ri T 4 i 3 R 3 H 2 2 7 2 Opening the Ferrite Core Insert your finger into the opening of the ferrite core and open it as shown below 2 7 3 Modular Plug Connection Insert the modular plug of the telephone cord into the modular jack on the port card Guide the telephone cord through the ferrite core Close the ferrite core Installation Manual 43 2 7 CONNECTIONS e Telephone Line Modular Jacks 2 4 Port Cards There are 2 types of port expansion cards see 2 6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS KX TVP102 OR KX TVP204 e Four Digital ports expansion card KX TVP204 Two Digital Analogue ports expansion card KX TVP102 One KX TVP204 card 2 jacks can support 4 VPS ports using the DPT Integration mode The KX TVP204 card does not function with any other integratio
80. Time Group 1 8 can have different Time Service setting See Service Mode and Time Group in this table See Time Service 1 5 2 2 in 5 2 2 Custom Service Features See Time Group Service Time Service in B6 2 Time Group Service Time Synchronisation DPT Integration only Occurs between the VPS and PBX when the PBX sets a new date and time or when DPT Integration is established The date and time are automatically sent from the PBX to the VPS See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION See 7 2 4 Set Time TIME See Time Synchronisation in GLOSSARY Trunk Service Universal Port DPT Integration only Allows call services to be assigned to each trunk outside line group The incoming call service determines which service is used when answering incoming calls These services include Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant Service Interview Service and Custom Service See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION See B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Two Way Recording DPT Integration only Permits a subscriber to record two way conversations into his mailbox See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION See 4 4 9 TWR Two Way Recording Button Assignment via Station Programming See 4 4 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming See 4 4 15 TWR Two Way Recording into Mailbox See 4 4 17 A Restriction on TWR TWT Activation See Two Way Recording in GLO
81. UP THE SYSTEM areali 143 7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 145 7 1 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM ioa cobi accede econ ee ened 146 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS qe w G G X 148 7 2 1 Off line Set OFLN mer 149 7 2 2 IS QUII Es Ris INL 149 7 2 3 Set Password PASS issued esu hd iesiituui ce Dlbasam Susa adian Coda dit us Utique 149 7 2 4 Set Time TIME ai a 150 7 2 5 Print Reports at Specified Time PSET i 151 Installation Manual 7 2 6 7 2 7 7 2 8 7 2 9 7 2 10 7 2 11 7 2 12 7 2 13 7 2 14 7 2 15 7 2 16 7 2 17 7 2 18 7 2 19 7 2 20 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 3 4 7 3 5 7 3 6 7 3 7 7 3 8 7 3 9 7 3 10 7 3 11 7 3 12 7 4 7 5 Al E B3 B4 B4 1 B4 2 B5 B5 1 B5 2 B5 3 B6 B6 1 B6 2 B6 3 Error Log Display BLOG recisi nnes aaa et o ced 151 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device SAVE 153 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS LOAD sseeeee 155 Print All of the VPS Parameters GPRN 156 Program Version Display VERS 156 Custom Service Report CREP et 156 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR 157 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times MWL 158 Setting Minimum Recording Length MRL in 158 Modified Prompt List MPLT ene 158 Utility Command List HELP aaa 159 Qu
82. and be notified by the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature if authorised when a message is present Extension Group Enter To access the proper menu for Extension Group Enter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 2 1 Group List No Installation Manual 243 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 19 B6 2 Time Group Service Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Group List 2 5 digits Specifies any vacant extension number No None Note The Extension Group List number can be assigned as The Extension of the Owner of a mailbox This permits all group members to share the information in the mailbox Group Name Up to 16 Specifies a group name If a group name is not required characters press RETURN and specify the mailbox numbers None Any alphanumeric character and space can be used Member 2 5 digits Specifies the extension number belonging to the group 1 20 None Note Members cannot have a personal mailbox Extension Group Delete Deletes specified extensions from the list shown To access the proper menu for Extension Group Delete follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 2 2 Group List No Extension Group Listing Displays all Extension Group List numbers as shown To access the proper menu for Extension Group List Numbers follow the menu path
83. can be recorded by the subscriber Length 16 This parameter applies to e Personal greeting on No Answer e Personal greeting on Busy e Personal greeting for After Hours e Personal greeting for Caller ID New Message 1 30 days Defines the number of days that an unplayed message Retention Time 14 will remain in the mailbox The storage period begins the day after the message reception Saved 1 30 days Defines the number of days that a played message will Message 0 Unlimited remain in the mailbox The timing is refreshed Retention Time 5 whenever the message is played back If 0 Unlimited is selected the saved message will remain in the mailbox until erased by the subscriber Message 1 6 min Defines the maximum message length Length 0 Unlimited set to 0 Unlimited a subscriber can record two way 3 conversations of unlimited length into his or another person s mailbox Two Way Recording or Two Way Transfer The maximum recording time for other messages will automatically be set to 6 min Mailbox 5 100 msgs Specifies the maximum number of both new and saved Capacity 10 messages that can be stored in a mailbox Maximum Messages Mailbox 5 100 min Specifies the total number of available minutes for Capacity 0 Unlimited storing both new and saved messages in each Maximum 10 mailbox Message Time Message 1 LIFO Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved Retrieval 2 FIFO played back for listening Orde
84. correct and Press 2 to accept it Caller ID Screening 23 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Notification 24 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable If the Message Notification is enabled go to Step 24b below b Press 1 2 3 4 or 5 to choose the desired Beeper Callback Number Entry Mode 1 Caller Select Mode 2 Without message mode 3 Before message recording mode 4 After message recording mode 5 Disable All Entry Mode Caller cannot access beeper pager C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 6 to accept it d The current setting of MWL Notification for Unreceived Message plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable e Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it f The current setting of Device Notification for Unreceived Message plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable g Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Return to Step 24a above 282 Installation Manual C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS External Message Delivery 25 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable If the External Message Delivery is enabled set the prompt mode for receiving External Delivery Messages go to Step 25b below
85. dealer Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Alternate Extension Group A group of extensions which require a different call transfer sequence than normal placed into a separate group See Dialing Parameters in 3 2 4 PBX Interface Parameters See Alternate Extension Assignment in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Alternate Extension Group in GLOSSARY Auto Configuration DPT Integration Only Creates mailboxes by obtaining extension numbers from the Panasonic KX TD series telephone system Also sets the time and date automatically by obtaining time information from the PBX See System Components in 1 3 2 System Components See4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION See Creating Mailboxes in 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup See The length of mailbox numbers in 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup See Auto Configuration in GLOSSARY Auto Forwarding Moves or copies unretrieved messages from one mailbox to another after a specified period of time This service is only available to subscribers you cannot auto forward messages to the System Group Distribution Lists Class of Service programming determines the mailboxes that can use this feature Messages marked as private cannot be forwarded Also a message is never forwarded to the original sender of the message See Private Message in this Table See Authorization for Auto Forwarding in Table B 7
86. earthing wire to the earth To earth 36 Installation Manual 2 5 INSTALLATION STEPS 2 5 INSTALLATION STEPS The following is an overview of the standard installation process using DPT Integration When necessary other sections in this manual have been referenced for more detailed descriptions or instructions 1 Obtain a list of current users their extension numbers their departments and the type of systems they use mailbox no mailbox beeper pager car phone etc 2 Assess your customers needs before setting up the system You will save yourself time later by giving customers what they need up front Ask the office manager how the VPS will be used Give examples Recommend that your customer use a word processor to log the greetings You will find these files much more easily than the worksheet pages if you need to make changes down the road 3 Connect the power cord to the VPS then turn the power switch on CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socket outlet is located installed near the equipment and is easily accessible 4 Install optional port expansion cards see 2 6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS 5 KX TVP102 OR KX TVP204 Standard Initialisation For DPT Integration Connection a Program the ports of the PBX for voice processing see Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD
87. if you are routed correctly Verify that each menu choice works as it should 5 2 6 Voice Mail Voice Mail service is a message taking service that allows non subscribers to leave messages for subscribers This service is often assigned when incoming calls are answered by a live person This person can then send the caller to the Voice Mail service if desired Callers can access Voice Mail service by Voice Mail Port This service can be programmed independently of any or all ports of the VPS Callers reaching these ports immediately access Voice Mail service Voice Mail Trunk This service can be programmed on a per trunk outside line basis Callers reaching these trunks outside lines immediately access Voice Mail service Service Access Command A caller can switch to Voice Mail service by dialling 6 during a call Via Custom Service This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom Service After pressing this key the caller enters Voice Mail service 5 2 7 Mailbox Groups 120 This programme allows a message to be delivered to several mailboxes at once The message activates the message waiting lamps on all of the proprietary telephones These mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List The Message Manager can record a voice label for each System Group Distribution List see D RECORDING MESSAGES There are 20 groups available and each group list can have up to 20 entries
88. in the Voice Mail Service as Private See Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes in C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES See Private Message in GLOSSARY See 3 1 Delivering Messages to Other Subscribers in the Subscriber s Guide Receive Message Allows subscribers to access messages left in their mailboxes Three options are available to subscribers Reply to Message Sender permits subscribers to reply to the message sender without specifying the extension Message Transfer permits subscribers to transfer their messages to other mailboxes Message Scan permits subscribers to listen to the first 4 s of each message See Message Transfer and Message Scan in this Table See 2 1 Receiving Messages in the Subscriber s Guide See 2 2 Replying to Messages in the Subscribers Guide 198 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Remote Call Allows a subscriber and the Message See 5 5 2 Entering a Mailbox Forwarding Set DPT Integration only Manager to program his extension from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside telephone There are 6 forwarding settings available FWD All Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number FWD Busy Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is busy FWD No Answer Forward all incoming calls to a desired ext
89. left in a mailbox It determines whether an alert tone is sent or whether the recorded message is played through the built in speaker of the extension The default mode is hands free This is station level programming and should be done at each individual telephone PC programming is also possible 1 Enter Station Programming a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode 2 Dial the code for the mode you want this telephone to have Hands Free 11 Private X12 Screen output Hands Free or Private 3 Press STORE To exit the Station Programming mode Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 5 Repeat these steps for each telephone A Conditions None A single line telephone that is connected to the same extension as a proprietary telephone can also be used to monitor an incoming message Be sure that Live Call Screening on the connected proprietary telephone has been activated This feature is useful when you are using a cordless telephone The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is being recorded To intercept the call hang up and go off hook Installation Manual 97 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 4 4 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming The KX TD500 users can program Live Call Screening features via PC programming Follow the procedure below to assign each feature Note The KX TD500 is not
90. mode press 1 To set Manual Day mode press 2 To set Manual Night mode press 3 To set Manual Lunch mode press 4 To set Manual Break mode press 5 To set PBX Control mode press 6 825 826 To set call transfer status press 1 To set up covering extension press 2 To set message reception mode press 3 To set incomplete handling status press 4 826 827 To set class of service press 2 837 827 834 837 827 834 692 689 837 827 834 692 689 776 828 To set delivery time or make this message private press 1 828 663 829 To set delivery time press 1 For immediate delivery press 2 829 830 To set dial mode press 6 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 777 831 To set leaving a message status press 1 To set covering extension transfer status press 2 To set intercom paging status press 3 To set pager access status press 4 To set operator transfer status press 5 To set returning to top menu automated attendant service status press 6 831 832 To set station call forwarding press 4 832 Installation Manual 353 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 833 To set station call forwarding press 6 845 838 728 835 785
91. of unlimited length into his or another person s mailbox Two Way Recording or Two Way Transfer The maximum recording time for other messages will automatically be set to 6 min Mailbox 5 100 msgs Specifies the maximum number of both new and saved Capacity 100 messages that can be stored in a mailbox Maximum Messages Mailbox 5 100 min Specifies the total number of available minutes for storing Capacity 0 Unlimited both new and saved messages in each mailbox Maximum 100 Message Time Message 1 LIFO Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved Retrieval Order 2 FIFO played back for listening LIFO 1 LIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the most recent 2 FIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest Installation Manual B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table B 8 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Message 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS adds the message sender s name Scanning with 2 No and the recording date and time to the message during the Information No message scan Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language used for voice prompts 2 User 1 3 User 2 Note If User 1 is specified as Prompt Mode but not User 1 recorded by the Message Manager the VPS will automatically play the factory recorded System prompts in English By default User 1 prompts are not recorded
92. sequence of codes used by the VPS Setup consisting of when calling an outside CO line You can set up to 12 Sequence 0 9 x F R S T digits The default value is T T indicates that the system will dial the telephone number only after detecting a dial tone Example QW 9 2 s wait dial telephone number 9 is the outside CO line access number F Flash Recall R Ringback Tone Detection S Silence Detection T Dial Tone Detection W Wait for 1 s 1 9 0 Dial Codes Installation Manual B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification Table B 30 Controls the handling of message waiting notification calls To access the proper menu for Message Waiting Notification Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 3 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Outgoing Call Port No Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting Ports 1 12 Notification Device feature The VPS makes outgoing calls using the port specified in this parameter At least 1 port must be specified Message Port No Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting Waiting Lamp 1 12 Notification Lamp feature Ports The VPS turns on the Message Waiting Lamp of the extension using the port specified in this parameter At least 1 port must be specified Message 1 No
93. services Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant Service Interview Service and Custom Service Intercom Paging Callers can page subscribers through built in speakers and external paging equipment For a Caller ID Caller if his name has been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature the name will be announced at the end of the page 76 Installation Manual 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION Table 4 1 DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES Caller Name Announcement The VPS announces the prerecorded Caller ID System Personal callers names when 1 extension users listen to messages from assigned numbers left in their mailboxes 2 the VPS transfers calls from assigned numbers to the users and 3 the VPS pages the users by intercom If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both system and personal caller name announcements the VPS will use the personal caller name Caller ID Call Routing The VPS automatically sends calls from pre assigned Caller ID numbers to the desired extension mailbox or Custom Service Personal Greeting for Caller ID Each subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting messages for special callers Time Synchronisation Whenever the PBX sets a new date and time or when DPT Integration is established the data is automatically registered in the VPS Caller ID Note 1 When an incoming outside call reaches the VPS via the PBX the VPS will wait
94. sold in the United Kingdom It is only available in some countries 1 Go to 4 2 Extension Line 1 2 screen Screen output 4 2 Extension Line 1 2 Card No 104 DHLC Porto fx on 1009 B Group No 128 Copy Name Max 10 Characters Message lamp Mailbox No Max 16 Digits CO Key C Yes No 1009 PE Key Caller ID x fo Primary 1 v Secondary 1 v Preferred Line Pickup Dialing Bii mE Mode El Outgoing Prime Line ICM PDN Keying 7 f Enable f Disable eama Ringing Line zl vay rls l Data Line Mode Call Waiting Tone Type LCS Setting C Yes No Tone1 C Tone2 Status Inactive Active Operation Mode C Private Hands free Recording Mode C KeepRec Stop Rec Enable Disable English C Option LCS Password 3 Digits m Station Lock Password ISDN Bearer Mode 3 Digits automate JOG Dial Speed CLIP COLP Number Max 16 Digits Automatic 3 Call Log Incoming Public Normal zl Overwrite Mode Yes C No Private Lock Password 3 Digits 4 2 Extension Line 1 2 OK Apply Cancel Help 2 Select the Card No and Port No which you are going to program 3 In LCS Settings 8 To set LCS Password Enter a 3 digit number using 0 9 in LCS Password Note To cancel the password erase the 3 digit number b To assign LCS Recording Mode Set Recording Mode to Keep Rec or Stop Rec C To assign LCS Private Hands free Mode S
95. some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information consult your dealer From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 116 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Installation Manual 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 c Enter the system number 0 or 1 master slave The system displays the ROM version and the date it was created This version must be the required version for DPT Integration to be utilised both systems if system connection is used Set the date and time using System Programme 000 Set PBX extension numbering using System Programme 003 Assign the Voice Mail Port This programme tells the PBX which jack will be connected to the VPS This allows the PBX to send the proper DPT Integration information to those ports Notes Youcan assign a maximum of 6 jacks 12 ports with the KX TD1232 or KX TD816 Ifyou are configuring a 2 cabinet system all Voice Mail Ports should be assigned to either the Master or Slave System From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 126 or 117 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output M c Enter the jack number 02 64 of the port you will use for the Voice Mail d Press STORE e Press END HOLD when finished Conditions Jack 01 cannot be used as a Voice Mail port A jack programmed as a Manager Extension System Programme 006 cannot be used in this programme Skip thi
96. telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface e Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Note If you live in an area that can have frequent power failures we strongly recommend that you purchase a suitable UPS uninterruptible power supply for your VPS and PBX if needed The power rating of your VPS may be found in the specifications Installation Manual 31 2 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 1 3 Environmental Requirements The hard disk is sensitive to cold heat dryness humidity shock vibration and magnetic fields Please observe the conditions specified below Table 2 1 Hard Disk Drive Usage Environment Operating Temperature 5 C to 40 C Operating Humidity See Graph 1 below Shock Under 5 G Vibration 5 Hz to 22 Hz 0 0042 cm displacement double amplitude 1 octave per minute 23 Hz to 350 Hz Under 0 5 G Magnetic Field DC 0 6 mT to 700 kHz 0 7 UT 700 kHz to 1 5 MHz 3 UT Graph 1 Allowable Relative Humidity vs Temperature Relative Humidity 96 100 90 80 70 60 50 Operating Area 40 30 20 5 15 25 35 45 55 C Temperature 32 Installation Manual 2 2 UNPACKING 2 2 UNPACKING Unpack the box and check the items below Table 2 2 Main Unit AC Cords Screws Wall Mounting WwW ow N Anchor Plugs Wall Mounting Installation Manual 33 2 3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL 2
97. that of the connected PBX and reset see CPC Signal in Table B 38 in B7 2 Port Setting Unable to call an outside party Improper setting of the outside call dial procedure Reset the outside CO line access sequence of the connected PBX see Dial Number in Table B 5 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES and Number of Digits to Access Outside Line in Table B 29 in B6 7 Other Parameters Also check Outgoing Call Setup Sequence in Table B 29 in B6 7 Other Parameters When setting a Dial Number for Device Notification or a telephone number for External Message Delivery keep in mind the Important Note for Dial Number in Table B 5 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Unable to call an extension Improper setting of extension numbering plan Adjust the extension numbering plan properly see Numbering Plan 1 16 in Table B 28 in B6 7 Other Parameters Unable to access the mailbox Improper setting of the mailbox number Re adjust the number of digits in the mailbox number see Mailbox Number in Table B 3 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Installation Manual 173 7 4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Table 7 5 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Unable to call Operator 1 Improper setting of the operator extension number Adjust the operator extension number to that of the connected PBX see Operator s Extension in Tabl
98. that the subscriber can establish a new password Explain the purpose of the General Delivery Mailbox The Message Manager will periodically check it and forward the contents to the appropriate subscriber Explain the purpose of the System Group Distribution Lists They can be created by the System Administrator to facilitate the distribution of messages to several subscribers In particular senior staff members ought to know how to take advantage of System Group Distribution Lists Twenty lists can be created with 20 mailboxes in each list Finally if Custom Service menus are used subscribers should be encouraged to listen to these menus often and make suggestions for improvement Custom service is a very powerful feature of the Panasonic VPS Make the most out of this feature Installation Manual Section 6 FINAL SETUP Installation Manual 137 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 The Message Manager is responsible for recording and updating a wide variety of system messages Please refer to DE RECORDING MESSAGES to see the full array of recording tasks Follow the instructions below to record Custom Service prompts and user prompts Note The Message Manager s mailbox might be 98 998 9998 or 99998 6 1 1 Accessing the Message Manager s Mailbox 1 Enter an Extension Number that is connected to Voice Mail You will hear the initial prompt Good morning Good a
99. the Move messages are retained in the original mailbox after forwarding When set to Move messages are forwarded to the receiving mailbox and are not retained at the original location Installation Manual 221 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table B 8 222 COS Nos 63 amp 64 for Managers To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 63 amp 64 for Managers follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No 63 64 Only the parameters listed below can be assigned for COS numbers 63 and 64 COS number 64 cannot assign the parameters relating to the Message Waiting Notification and the Remote Call Forward to CO features Parameter Value Range Description Function Default New Message 1 30days Defines the number of days that an unplayed message can Retention Time 30 remain in the mailbox The storage period begins the day after massage reception Saved 1 30days Defines the number of days a played saved message will Message O Unlimited remain in the mailbox The timing is refreshed whenever Retention Time 30 the message is played back If 0 Unlimited is selected saved messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the mailbox owner Message 1 6 min Defines the maximum message length Length 0 Unlimited 6 If set to 0 Unlimited a manager can record two way conversations
100. the current Telephone number 2 setting Press 1 to change the telephone number If a telephone number has not yet been assigned go to Step 14 Press 2 to accept the current setting 14 Type the telephone number using 0 9 and X 15 The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual 303 D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK 304 The Message Manager can set the system clock directly from the telephone It is important to set the exact time because Message Waiting Notification External Message Delivery redialling and rescheduling of External Message Delivery and Automatic Message Deletion are all scheduled using this setting The System Administrator and System Manager are also able to set the clock The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins and ends Note The Message Manager cannot set the system clock while the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer the System Manager sets mailboxes and Class of Service COS and customises the System Manager s Mailbox The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 4 to set the time and date 3 Press 1 to change the current setting 4 Type the current time and Press t Note Press 0 for help For example to enter 5 o clock press 5 and or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and
101. the day of the month followed 143 by the hash sign 144 Enter the day of the month followed 144 by the pound sign 145 Enter the day followed by the hash 145 sign 146 Enter the day followed by the pound 146 sign 147 Enter the delay time followed by the 147 hash sign 148 Enter the delay time followed by the 148 pound sign 149 Enter the destination extension 149 number for forwarding 150 Enter the destination mailbox number 150 752 150 751 151 Enter the destination telephone 151 918 99 number for forwarding 152 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the 152 221 222 person s last name 152 320 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 153 Enter the first 4 letters of the owner s 153 last name 154 Enter the interview mailbox number 154 155 Enter the last 2 digits of the year 155 followed by the hash sign 156 Enter the last 2 digits of the year 156 followed by the pound sign 157 Enter the mailbox number 157 157 908 157 909 158 Enter the maximum number of caller 158 IDs for caller name announce Valid entries are from 0 to 30 159 Enter the maximum number of 159 messages per mailbox Valid entries are from 5 to 100 160 Enter the month followed by the hash 160 232 sign 161 Enter the mon
102. the mailbox number for Operator 3 Callers to Mailbox No None Operator 3 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are set Installation Manual B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table B 14 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Busy Coverage 1 Hold Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 3 Mode 2 No Answer extension is busy Coverage 3 Call Waiting 4 Disconnect 1 Hold Automatically places the caller on hold and the Message Operator 3 extension is called again Hold 2 No Answer Coverage Offers the option specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller 3 Call Waiting Signals Operator 3 when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message Disconnects the call after playing Thank you for calling No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how to handle Operator 3 calls when not Coverage 2 Leave answered within the time period set by the Operator No Mode Message Answer Time mode 3 Disconnect Message Caller Select 1 Caller Select Allows the caller to leave a message or call another extension In some cases a call to another extension is not available For more information see the Note on Caller Select in Table 5 6 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters 2 Leave Message Instructs the caller to leave a message in Operator 3
103. to enter the callback number that will display on the beeper pager System Programming determines if the Callback Number Entry is to be entered before after or without the message It is also possible to have the caller select whether or not to enter a callback number The System Manager must authorise the use of the Beeper Callback No Entry Code 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to set Message Waiting Notification 3 Press 3 to assign Telephone Number 4 Press 1 to change the first telephone number 2 to change the second telephone number or 3 to change the third telephone number 5 Press 1 to set the telephone number 6 Type the telephone number 7 Press 2 to accept the entry e 1 Change the telephone number 2 Accept 3 Review 4 Add more digits e 5 Insert a pause 6 Set dial mode 300 Installation Manual D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION 7 Insert a wait for dial tone 8 Insert a beeper pager display command 8 Press 1 to be notified by telephone or 2 by a beeper pager Installation Manual 301 D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S 302 MAILBOX The Message Manager is able to customise the Message Manager s mailbox by specifying 1 the password 2 the extension numbers of Operator 1 2 and 3 or 3 Telephone numbers 1 and 2 as the call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding
104. 0 to be modified Note Enter x to return to Step 3 Torecord system caller names first Caller ID numbers must be assigned see B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement 5 The VPS plays the Caller ID number and its name To change the name Press 1 If a name has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number go to Step 6 Note Press 2 to accept the current name Return to Step 4 Press 3 to erase the current name Return to Step 4 6 Record the name at the tone and Press 1 7 The VPS plays the recorded name Press 2 to accept it Note Press 1 to change the recorded name Return to Step 6 Press 3 to erase the recorded name Return to Step 4 8 Repeat Steps 4 7 to record names for other Caller ID List numbers Guidance is Caller Name Announcement number Installation Manual 309 D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET The Message Manager can program his extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside telephone There are six forwarding settings available e FWD All Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number e FWD Busy Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is busy e FWD No Answer Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when there is no answer e FWD Busy or No Answer Forward all incoming ca
105. 1 207 JYYYYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 07 2 307 JY YNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 08 1 208 YYYYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 08 2 308 Y YNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 5 Return to the Station 6 Choose Hunting Group Setting 1 from the Menu Menu 01 Day Night 14 Opera Manager EXT Group 02 Class of Service 15 Miscellaneous 03 Emergency Quick Dial 16 Caller ID Modification 04 Speed Dial 17 Switch Type 05 Absent Message 18 DID 06 Flexible Numbering 19 Lunch Break Time 07 Account Code 20 System Time 08 Special Carrier 21 Version 09 Timer 22 ISDN Card 10 Voice Mail 23 T1 Card 11 Voice Mail Integration 24 T1 Minor Error 12 UCD 13 Phantom Select the number 15 7 Choose the Hunting Group Setting 1 extension group Set the last extension group to AA for Automated Attendant Installation Manual 71 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs GRP FLT Name Hunting Wait Over Intercept UCD No No Type Queue flow Day Night Day Night 01 JI Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable E 02 JI Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 03 JI Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 04 JI Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 05 JI Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 06 JI Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 07 JI Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 08 JI Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 09 JI Disable 0 BSY Disable Disable 10 Jl
106. 162 232 160 232 233 For interview mailbox management 233 press 1 234 For mailbox management press 5 798 739 724 224 234 236 746 798 739 724 224 234 746 235 For notification by telephone press 1 235 For notification by pager press 2 236 For other features press 6 798 739 724 224 234 236 746 798 739 728 725 223 236 746 237 For Port setting press 1 237 For Trunk service setting press 2 324 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 238 For the next name press 2 662 238 805 748 239 FORTY 239 240 FORTY MINUTE 240 241 FORTY EIGHT 241 242 FORTY EIGHT MINUTE 242 243 FORTY FIVE 243 244 FORTY FIVE MINUTE 244 245 FORTY FOUR 245 246 FORTY FOUR MINUTE 246 247 FORTY NINE 247 248 FORTY NINE MINUTE 248 249 FORTY ONE 249 250 FORTY ONE MINUTE 250 251 FORTY SEVEN 251 252 FORTY SEVEN MINUTE 252 253 FORTY SIX 253 254 FORTY SIX MINUTE 254 255 FORTY THREE 255 256 FORTY THREE MINUTE 256 257 FORTY TWO 257 258 FORTY TWO MINUTE 258 259 Forwarding mailbox number is 259 mailbox number 260 Forwarding mailbox number is not 260 assigned 261 Forwarding mode is copy 261 262 Forwarding mode is mo
107. 2 3 Choose Station Setting from the Station Menu Station Menu 1 Station Setting 1 16 PS Setting 1 2 Station Setting 2 17 PS Setting 2 3 Station Setting 3 18 PS Setting 3 4 CO Line Outgoing 19 PS Setting 4 5 DIL 1 N 20 PS Setting 5 6 ISDN Internal 1 21 PS Setting 6 7 ISDN Internal 2 22 PS Flexible Keys 8 TD286 Internal 1 23 PS System 9 TD286 Internal 2 24 PS Registration 10 Hunting Group Setting 1 25 PS Termination 11 Hunting Group Setting 2 26 CS Information 12 Flexible CO Keys 27 PS Data Clear 13 Flexible PF Keys 14 DSS 15 Doorphone Select the number 1 4 Enable XDP ports Place Voice Mail extensions in Extension Group 16 70 Installation Manual 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Station Setting 1 Jack EXT Name CXC Extension Group Doorphone ODH 000000001 11 1 1 1 1 Day Night NPG12345678901 4 612341234 01 1 201 JY NY YN NN NN NN N N N N N N NN N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 01 2 301 JY YNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 02 1 202 JYNYYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 02 2 302 JY YNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 03 1 203 JYYYYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 03 2 303 JY YNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 04 1 204 JYYYYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 04 2 304 JY YNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 05 1 205 JYYYYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 05 2 305 Y NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 06 1 206 JYYYYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 06 2 306 JY NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 07
108. 3 756 813 846 232 804 811 793 756 813 822 760 846 784 804 793 756 846 232 804 811 793 756 822 760 846 784 Installation Manual 347 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 757 To erase this prompt and use system 801 757 850 prompt press 2 801 757 851 758 To erase this question press 1 758 841 842 774 759 To erase press 3 722 663 759 760 To fast forward press 6 804 812 822 760 746 804 811 793 756 813 822 760 846 784 804 811 793 756 822 760 846 784 761 To forward all calls press 1 761 762 764 763 765 681 761 762 764 763 681 762 To forward busy calls press 2 761 762 764 763 765 681 761 762 764 763 681 763 To forward busy or no answer calls 761 762 764 763 765 681 press 4 761 762 764 763 681 764 To forward no answer calls press 3 761 762 764 763 765 681 761 762 764 763 681 765 To forward to a CO line press 5 761 762 764 763 765 681 766 To forward to the other number press 766 3 767 To forward to your telephone number 767 1 press 1 768 To forward to your telephone number 768 2 pr
109. 3 Emergency Dial 13 UCD Time Table Message Rec Time 04 Speed Dial 14 Miscellaneous 05 Absent Message 15 Quick Dial 06 Flexible Numbering 16 System Time 07 Account Code 17 Version 08 Timer 18 ISDN Card 09 Voice Mail 19 CS INF Card 10 Voice Mail Integration Select the number 10 5 First enter the port numbers that will be connected to the VPS If desired change the default extension numbers of the Voice Mail ports 92 Installation Manual 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 Voice Mail Integration VM Port No Master 07 08 1 1L Slave EIE 1E Jt 1E VM Jack EXT VMG VM Jack EXT VMG Master O1 07 1 265 1 Slave 13 1 271 1 02 07 2 266 1 14 2 272 1 03 08 1 267 1 15 1 273 1 04 08 2 268 1 16 2 274 1 05 1 269 1 17 1 275 1 06 2 270 1 18 2 276 1 07 1 277 1 19 1 279 1 08 2 278 1 20 2 280 1 09 1 281 1 21 1 285 1 10 2 282 1 22 2 286 1 11 1 283 1 23 1 287 1 12 2 284 1 24 2 288 1 Note 6 The extension numbers are different depending on your PBX e g 265 266 267 Step 6 should only be done if the VPS is going to answer all incoming Telephone Company lines directly Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu Select Line and then select CO Line Setting 2 Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voic
110. 314 is Manual Day mode 75 814 315 is Manual Lunch mode 75 815 316 is Manual Night mode 75 816 317 is PBX Control mode 75 817 318 JANUARY 318 319 JULY 319 320 JUNE 320 321 Leaving a message is disabled 321 322 Leaving a message is enabled 322 323 Lunch Mode first operator s extension 323 is extension number 324 Lunch Mode first operator s extension 324 is not assigned 325 Lunch Mode second operator s 325 extension is extension number 326 Lunch Mode second operator s 326 extension is not assigned 327 Lunch Mode third operator s 327 extension is extension number 328 Lunch Mode third operator s 328 extension is not assigned 329 Mailbox 329 329 90 330 Mailbox is in use 330 331 Mailbox list label erased 331 332 Mailbox list number number 332 333 Mailbox number already specified 333 334 MARCH 334 335 Maximum number of caller IDs for 335 caller name announce is number 336 Maximum number of messages per 336 mailbox is number 337 MAY 337 338 number members maximum 338 339 Message back up disabled 339 340 Message back up enabled 340 328 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 341 Message cancel for live call 341 screening disabled 342 Message ca
111. 32 302 432 592 722 432 730 432 807 432 729 432 53 722 432 433 OWE 433 434 OWE EIGHT 434 435 OWE FIVE 435 436 OWE FOUR 436 437 OWE NINE 437 438 OWE ONE 438 439 OWE SEVEN 439 440 OWE SIX 440 441 OWE THREE 441 442 OWE TWO 442 332 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 443 Owner s extension is extension 443 number 444 Owner s extension is not assigned 444 445 Owner s extension number is deleted 445 446 Owner s name erased 446 447 Owner s name is name 447 448 Owner s name is deleted 448 449 Owner s name is not recorded 449 450 Password deleted 450 451 Password entry failure 451 Check the password 452 Password is number 452 453 Password not assigned 453 454 PAUSE 454 455 Personal greeting for caller ID 455 disabled 456 Personal greeting for caller ID 456 enabled 457 Personal greeting length is time 457 507 458 Play system prompt after personal 458 greeting disabled 459 Play system prompt after personal 459 greeting enabled 460 Please call telephone number 460 461 Please enter your callback number 461 918 99 461 918 99 916 462 Please enter the person s extension 462 752 462 752 226 462 751 462 751
112. 4 234 4 Next Operator Caller Select Parameter Value Range Description Function Default No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how to handle Operator 2 calls when not Coverage 2 Leave answered within the time period set by the Operator No Mode Message Answer Time mode 3 Disconnect Message Caller Select Allows the caller to leave a message or call another extension In some cases a call to another extension is not available For more information see the Note on Caller Select in Table 5 6 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters 2 Leave Message Instructs the caller to leave a message in Operator 2 s mailbox 3 Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling 4 Next Operator Transfers the caller to Operator 3 Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 3 Operator 3 receives operator seeking calls when Operator 2 is busy or unanswered and Operator 2 s parameters are set as follows Busy Coverage Mode No Answer Coverage No Answer Coverage Mode next Operator To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters Day Mode Operator 3 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 1 3 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator s 1 5 digits Specifies the extension number for Operator 3 Any valid Extension None extension number can be assigned Operator s 2 5 digits Specifies
113. 4 814 To report all mailbox usage press 2 844 814 815 To reschedule press 1 815 794 806 796 816 To retrieve the call press 2 816 817 To review the mailing list press 4 848 670 817 848 847 670 817 818 To review this group press 4 690 666 732 818 819 To review press 1 819 663 755 674 754 819 661 755 754 819 663 755 820 To review press 3 671 733 820 712 663 820 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 777 722 663 820 668 778 779 722 663 820 668 778 779 777 672 736 820 672 736 820 664 821 To review press 4 672 723 737 821 822 To rewind press 5 804 812 822 760 746 804 811 793 756 813 822 760 846 784 804 811 793 756 822 760 846 784 352 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s 823 To select caller select mode press 1 To select without message mode press 2 To select before message recording mode press 3 To select after message recording mode press 4 To disable all entry modes press 5 To accept press 6 823 824 To send to 1 recipient press 1 To send by mailing list press 2 824 825 To set Automatic
114. 5 223 236 746 729 To delete all caller ID numbers press 729 432 1 730 To delete all group members press 1 730 432 731 To delete distribution verification of 731 this message press 1 To cancel message delivery press 2 Installation Manual 345 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 732 To delete group members press 3 690 666 732 818 733 To delete members press 2 671 733 820 734 To delete the password press 1 734 780 735 To delete press 1 735 795 735 792 735 780 736 To delete press 2 672 736 820 672 736 820 664 737 To delete press 3 722 663 737 672 723 737 821 738 To deliver a broadcast message 738 739 press 1 739 To deliver a message press 2 798 739 724 224 234 236 746 798 739 724 224 234 746 798 739 728 725 223 236 746 738 739 740 To deliver now press only the hash 171 740 232 sign 741 To deliver now press only the pound 172 741 232 sign 742 To enable call blocking press 1 742 To enable call screening press 2 To enable intercom paging press 3 To enable pager access press 4 To disable all transfer service press 5 743 To end recording hang up 743 To cancel your message press x if you have a touchton
115. 5 Repeat these steps for each telephone 4 4 3 Live Call Screening Password Cancelling To cancel the password follow the procedure below It is not necessary to enter PITS Programming to activate this feature PC programming is also possible 1 Lift the handset or Press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number 799 3 Enter the password 000 999 You will hear a confirmation tone then a dial tone Screen output Password Cancel 4 Hang up or Press the SP PHONE button 96 Installation Manual 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 5 Repeat these steps for each telephone 4 4 4 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via System Programming This programme allows the VPS to continue recording the conversation in the mailbox after the extension intercepts the call during the Live Call Screening PC programming is also possible 1 Enter 617 or 616 from system programme 2 Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output Jack No gt 3 Enter the jack number Screen output _ _ Stop Rec __ the jack number you entered Press the SELECT button AUTO ANSWER until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Repeat the steps 4 to 6 until all jacks are programmed NOAA 4 4 5 Live Call Screening Private Hands Free Mode Assignment via Station Programming This programme assigns a VPS response for when a message is being
116. 5 3 Deleting a Mailbox From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 2 Program Mailbox Setting Delete Enter the Mailbox Number Are you sure Y N 5 5 4 Password Reset To reset a subscriber s password go to the Password Reset Menu Enter the Mailbox Number appears on the screen Enter the mailbox number you wish to reset Enter the Mailbox Number appears again Enter a new number if you wish to reset more than one password From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 3 Program Mailbox Setting Password Reset Enter the Mailbox Number Enter the Mailbox Number 5 5 5 Mailbox Listing 134 This listing is a report of mailbox number assignments From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 4 Program Mailbox Setting Mailbox Listing 1 203 2 201 3 202 4 204 5 205 6 206 7 207 8 208 9 209 10 210 11 211 12 212 13 213 14 214 15 215 16 216 17 901 if 19 20 Mica Die Mae Mo Ma 26 Mica 28 29 30 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 System Manager s Mailbox No 999 Message Manager s Mailbox No 998 Installation Manual 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES Note Depending on the PBX extension numbering the mailbox numbers might be 2 to 5 digi
117. 6 1232 TD500 TA series TD612 Forward to VM N A N A N A 7 C2 C2 7 7 Busy Forward to N A N A N A 8 C3 C3 8 8 Other Extension Confirmation N A N A N A 9 D1 D1 9 9 Disconnect N A N A N A 9 DD DD 9 9 N A Not available Note The UK version KX T1232 does not support Inband Integration Digit Translation Table Parameters Use the Digit Translation Table to translate the Follow On ID Signal from the PBX into the proper codes for the VPS This translation table is only effective for the incoming signal To access the proper menu for Digit Translation Table Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 3 Digit Translation Table Parameters Inter Digit Timeout To access the proper menu for Inter Digit Timeout follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 3 1 Table B 45 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Inter Digit 1 4s Defines the incoming signal interval Follow on ID The Timeout 1 Digit Translation Table will translate signals received within the specified time period Installation Manual 271 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Digit Translation Table Parameters Input Output To access the proper menu for Input Output follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 3 2 Table B 46 1 8 Output digit
118. 7 2 20 Wait for Caller ID WCID Use the WCID command to specify the length of time in seconds the VPS must wait for the Caller ID after the VPS has received the incoming call from the PBX If Caller ID is not needed at all set the waiting time to 0 to accelerate the VPS response to incoming calls Type WCID then Press RETURN WCID WAIT TIME FOR CALLER ID 5 sec 0 60 sec 0 162 Installation Manual 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS The System Administrator is able to generate 8 System Reports to monitor VPS operating status The reports can be displayed on a data terminal or printed The terminal or printer must be connected to the RS 232C port The System Manager is also able to output System Reports To select the System Reports Menu follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 System Reports System Report Menu Mailbox Assignments COS Assignments System Service Report Call Account Report Port Usage Report Disk Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report Fax Call Report Enter the Number NAUWARWNS oo The following 4 reports can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again To clear the following 4 reports follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 System Reports System Clear Menu 1 Port Usage Statistics Clear 2 Disk Usage Statistics Clear 3 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear 4
119. 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS Type Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Port Usage Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding 7 3 Disk Usage Report The Disk Usage Report indicates the amount of disk storage used and the disk availability in minutes It also presents the following statistics e The number of messages that were recorded by callers and were copied since the last clearing of this report e The number of messages that were copied since the last clearing of this report e The number of messages that were deleted by subscribers and expired and were removed by the system since the last clearing of this report The number of messages that expired and were removed by the system since the last clearing of this report To select the Disk Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 6 Disk Usage Report 29 MAR 2001 1 32 PM Drive Avail Used 96 1 1958 min Omin 0 FROM 29 JAN 2001 1 25 PM New Cpy Del Exp MSGs 0 0 0 0 FROM The date and time of the last clearing of this report Cpy Copy Transfer Del Deleted Exp Expired and Removed 7 3 8 Disk Usage Statistics Clear The Disk Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again To clear the Disk Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 2 System Reports System Report
120. 7 7 This feature is only available with DPT Integration When needed change the paging code for each of the paging groups Example for KX TD1232 All sales telephones have been placed in extension group 3 in system programme 602 No hunting type assigned in system programme 106 Assign each salesperson s mailbox to a different COS in the VPS and assign the paging group to that COS This tells the VPS which paging group to dial In the Intercom paging section assign the number 6303 or 333 to the paging group assigned to the sales dept Fax Management 1 5 7 8 Assigns up to 2 fax machines that can be extensions from the PBX If the CNG tone is heard the VPS will automatically forward the call to the first fax machine If the first fax machine is busy or does not answer is out of paper the VPS forwards the call to the second fax machine Installation Manual 115 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS This also allows an extension to be assigned as the fax manager to be notified on incoming faxes Disconnect Parameter 1 5 7 9 Determines how many seconds of silence the VPS allows during a caller s message before disconnecting the call RS 232C Settings 1 6 1 Allows the System Administrator to change the baud rate parity bit etc Port Setting 1 6 2 Only to be used when connecting the VPS to a PBX other than a KX T series PBX Use the CPC control of the PBX for normal disconnect problems Dialing Parameters 1 6 3 1 T
121. 8 778 779 777 52 722 663 664 To accept press 4 672 736 820 664 853 854 855 664 665 To accept press 5 853 854 855 782 665 666 To add group members press 2 690 666 690 666 732 818 667 To add more caller ID numbers press 667 747 1 668 To add more digits press 4 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 777 722 663 820 668 778 779 722 663 820 668 778 779 777 669 To add more members press 1 669 747 670 To add new mailbox number press 3 848 670 817 848 847 670 817 Installation Manual 341 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 671 To add new member press 1 671 671 732 820 672 To add press 1 672 672 736 820 672 736 820 664 672 723 737 821 673 To add press 2 722 673 674 To add press 4 819 663 755 674 754 675 To answer the call press 1 675 Otherwise press 2 and hang up 676 To assign or edit mailboxes press 1 676 To delete mailboxes press 2 To reset mailbox passwords press 3 677 To call message sender press 1 677 To record a message press 2 678 To call the operator press 0 299 678 463 752 678 678 463 751 67
122. 8 679 To call this person press 1 679 720 849 680 To cancel press 680 To continue press 1 681 To cancel call forwarding press 6 761 762 764 763 765 681 761 762 764 763 681 682 To cancel external message delivery 682 716 press 1 683 To cancel holding press 2 now 683 Otherwise l Il try your party again 684 To cancel mailing list review press 684 any key 685 To cancel this message or 685 verification press 3 686 To change caller ID greeting number 686 1 press 1 To change caller ID greeting number 2 press 2 To change caller ID greeting number 3 press 3 To change caller ID greeting number 4 press 4 342 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 687 To change caller ID number press 1 687 To change caller name press 2 To accept press 3 688 To change company greeting 688 number press 1 To set system greeting press 2 To disable press 3 689 To change company greeting setting 837 827 834 692 689 press 5 837 827 834 692 689 776 690 To change group name press 1 690 666 690 666 732 818 691 To change Remote Call Forwarding 709 708 706 836 698 691 to CO setting press 6 692 To change service mode setting 837 827 834 692 689 pres
123. AMETERS System Clock Allows the correct setting of the date and time to be made for proper VPS operation See 7 2 4 Set Time TIME See C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK See D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK System Reports Eight System Reports are available to the System Administrator and System Manager to monitor VPS operating status These reports include Mailbox Assignments COS Assignments System Service Report Call Account Report Port Usage Report Disk Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report and the Fax Call Report See 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS See C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS See System Report in GLOSSARY Time Group Is a time frame in which Day Night Lunch and Break time periods can be programmed It is possible to assign up to 8 different Time Groups It is necessary to assign a specific Time Group for use in both Port and Trunk Services in the Day Mode setting menu See Service Mode and Time Service in this table See Time Group No in Table B 9 in B4 1 Port Assignment and Table B 10 in B4 2 Trunk Group Assignment See B6 2 Time Group Service See C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING Installation Manual 201 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Time Service Is a timer function that initiates the appropriate call handling method depending on the time of day Day Night Lunch and Break Service periods Each
124. Beeper Callback No Entry Mode is enabled through COS the callback number entered by the caller will display on the destination beeper pager However if the caller fails to enter a callback number the System Callback No will display instead Other Parameters External Message Delivery Table B 31 258 Controls the handling of External Message Delivery calls To access the proper menu for External Message Delivery follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 4 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Retry Times 0 4 times Specifies the number of times to attempt an external 3 message delivery call when the destination is busy or if there is no answer Busy Delay 2 60 min Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS must wait 3 after a busy condition is received before trying to deliver the message again No Answer 2 120 min Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS is to wait Delay 60 after a no answer condition is received before trying to deliver the message again Outgoing Call Port No Specifies the port numbers used for the External Message Ports 1 12 Delivery feature Message 1 6 min Specifies the allowable message length of external Length 3 delivery messages that the subscriber can record Max 1 100 msgs Specifies the maximum number of external delivery Messages for 3 messages that can be stored in 1 mailbox Mailboxes
125. Clear Disk Usage Statistics Clear May I clear disk usage report data Y N Type Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Disk Usage Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding 168 Installation Manual 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS 7 3 9 Mailbox Usage Report The Mailbox Usage Report provides information about the usage of a specific mailbox It includes the number of recorded messages the total amount of outgoing calling time and external message message notification and group message delivery To select the Mailbox Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 7 Enter the Range 211 Note Specify the range or the mailbox number To obiain information on specific mailboxes from No 200 to No 209 Type 20 and Press RETURN or 200 209 and Press RETURN Mailbox Usage Report 4 JAN 2001 7 46 PM MBOX 1111 JONE BLUE New MSGs 4 Received MSGs 6 ED MSGs 0 FROM 3 JAN 2001 9 53 AM Subscriber Access Time 00 00 40 MBOX Use Time 00 00 12 of 01 40 00 1 Used ED MN IM GM AF Feature Usage 11 31 20 14 22 LD Lcl Beep Extn Outcalling 6 13 0 28 Time 00 05 10 00 10 45 00 00 00 00 31 21 Rcv Del Exp MSG Received 42 30 11 FROM The date and time of the last clearing of this report ED External Delivery MN Message Notification IM Interview message GM Personal System Group
126. D PORT SETTINGS Table 3 3 Integration Mode Specifies the method of integration to be used between the VPS and PBX DPT Integration is only available when a KX TD series PBX is connected and the software is upgraded SEQUENCE CODES D Disconnect F Flash Recall R Ring Detection S Silence Detection T Dial Tone Detection Ww Wait for 1 Second X Dial Extension A Answer 0 9 x 4 Touchtone Digits Operator Transfer Sequence Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to the operator Example FTX flash recall dial tone dial operator extn Extension Transfer Sequence Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension Example FTX flash recall dial tone dial extn Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension that belongs to the Alternate Extension Group This is useful for extensions that need a special transfer procedure i e blind transfer such as modem extensions Example FTXD flash recall dial tone dial extn hang up Reconnect Sequence on Busy Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension is busy PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Reconnect Sequence on No Answer Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension does not answer PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Reconnect Se
127. D series PBX to 6 jacks of the VPS 24 Installation Manual 1 4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION Connection Example KX TVP204 x3 PBX KX TD1232 VPS Assigned as DPT VPS ports SLOTS lo o ee stor2 LA SLOT I ir e ef T elephone Line Modular Jacks 4 e har The lowest numbered jack on the slot Installation Manual 25 1 4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION Connection Example KX TVP102 x3 DPT Integration Mode PBX KX TD1232 VPS Jack 5 Jack 6 Port 9 Port 10 Jack 3 Jack 4 Port 5 Port 6 Jack 1 Jack 2 Port 1 Port 2 Assigned as DPT VPS ports o le o M 9 SLOTS Do Te SLOT2 XT eo SLOT 1 SLOT1 S tpm _ Telephone Line CIE Modular Jacks The lowest numbered jack on the slot Connect the odd numbered jack on each KX TVP102 card to your PBX see the diagram above The VPS will support 2 ports for each KX TVP102 card with only one jack connected Note Do not connect the even numbered jacks on the KX TVP102 card 26 Installation Man
128. DE Rotary Switch Check the status of this switch only at start up Provides the following additional functions Position Additional Function 0 Normal setting 1 Initialises RS 232C parameters RS 232 default parameters 9 600 N 8 1 2 Auto Configuration is automatically completed and all ports are set for Automated Attendant service 3 Auto Configuration is automatically completed and all ports are set for Voice Mail service 4 Reserved 5 Initialises the VPS Clears all voice data except User 1 and User 2 prompts and returns all system parameters to the default setting 6 Test Mode Hard Disk Drive Read Write Test 7 Adjust VPS parameters to your PBX quickly 8 Initialises the VPS Clears all voice data and returns all system parameters to the default setting CAUTION User 1 and User 2 Prompts will be erased 9 Reserved For Panasonic KX TD series telephone systems with DPT Integration To change the position use an electrical or jewellers screwdriver etc When setting the Rotary Switch to any position except 0 1 Disconnect the extension wire s and wait a few minutes 2 Turn the power switch off at the VPS 3 Set the Rotary Switch 4 Turn the power switch back on at the VPS 5 Connect the extension wire s to the VPS and wait approximately 5 min 6 Return the Rotary Switch to position 0 Hard Disk Drive One system Stores the proprietary syst
129. DIGITAL PBX Program the KX TD500 the KX TD1232 the KX TD816 or the KX TD612 for Voice Mail integration e KX TD500 KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TD612 Note The KX TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom It is only available in some countries Programming may be performed on site or at the office All memory is stored and will be retained when the unit is powered up as long as the Rotary Switch has been reset to position 0 prior to turning the unit off b Turn the power switch off at the VPS C Plug extension wire s from the PBX into VPS see 2 7 CONNECTIONS d Connect the personal computer to the VPS with a Null Modem Cable see 2 8 2 Connecting the RS 232C Cable e Set the Rotary Switch to position 5 f Turn the power switch back on at the VPS g Wait until the warning appears on the screen h Set the Rotary Switch back to position O Installation Manual 37 2 5 INSTALLATION STEPS 38 CAUTION If the Rotary Switch is not reset to position 0 after initialisation all programming will be lost when the voice processor loses power 6 Perform Quick Setup see Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 7 Check Quick Setup The Power Indicator on the Voice Processor should be solid The screen output should be On Line If you do not see the On Line message check the following The line cord to the Voice Processor has 4 conductors The programming on the KX TD816 KX TD1232 or KX TD612 is corre
130. Depending on PBX extension numbering the mailbox numbers might be 2 to 5 digits long 166 Installation Manual 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS 7 3 5 Port Usage Report The Port Usage Report provides information about port usage and allows system and port traffic to be measured The report includes the accumulated duration times of incoming and outgoing calling services and the total connect time for each port To select the Port Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 5 Port Usage Report 21 FEB 2001 12 10 PM FROM 13 FEB 2001 6 08 PM Port ED MN Rev Connect Time 1 1 6 105 01 43 34 2 4 3 8 00 03 41 3 0 0 1 00 00 02 4 0 0 1 00 00 01 5 1 2 2 00 01 03 6 1 2 0 00 00 55 7 0 0 0 00 00 00 8 0 0 0 00 00 00 9 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 0 0 0 00 00 00 11 0 0 0 00 00 00 12 0 0 0 00 00 00 Total 7 14 121 01 49 16 Full line Time 00 00 00 FROM The date and time of the last clearing of this report ED External Delivery MN Message Notification Rev Receive Full line Time The total time that all ports were used simultaneously 7 3 6 Port Usage Statistics Clear Clears the Port Usage Report for use again To clear the Port Usage Statistics Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 1 System Reports System Report Clear Port Usage Statistics Clear May I clear port usage report data Y N Installation Manual 167
131. Diagram is given at the beginning of each section This flow is designed to guide the user through the appropriate menus to the parameter to be setup or changed The following example illustrates how the menu flow is used Example System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 1 1 Press 1 at the System Administration Top Menu Press RETURN 2 Press 4 at the Program Menu Press RETURN 3 Press 1 at the Service Setting Menu Press RETURN 4 Press 1 on the Automated Attendant Menu to select 1 Department Dialing when selected 5 Press RETURN Auto Attn Department Dialing Menu will be displayed on the terminal 1 Mallbox 1 Program Setting 2 Class of Service 3 Port Trunk Service 4 Service 1 Automated 1 Department Setting Attendant Dialing 2 Operator s Parameter 3 Alternate Extension _ 2 Custom Service Installation Manual 207 B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION Programming Menu Structure Diagram 1 1st Device 2 2nd Device 3 3rd Device 1 Telephone No 1 2 Telephone No 2 Continu
132. Distribution List AF Auto Forwarding LD Long distance call 8 digits or more Lcl Local call less than 8 digits Rcv Received Del Deleted Exp Expired Note New MSGs Received MSGs and ED MSGs are current status indications All else are accumulated indications since the last clearing of this report 7 3 10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear The Mailbox Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again Installation Manual 169 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS To clear the Mailbox Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 3 System Reports System Report Clear Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear Enter the Range May I clear mailbox usage report data Y N Type Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Mailbox Usage Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding 7 3 11 Fax Call Report The Fax Call Report provides information about fax transfer when the VPS receives a fax signal It includes the fax data receiving date the port number used and the fax transfer status for up to 64 fax messages To select the Fax Call Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 8 Fax Call Report 14 NOV 2001 3 50 PM DATE TIME PORT FAX 1 FAX 2 11 JAN 11 15 AM 1 connect 01 MAR 07 58PM 2 busy no ans O1 MAR 10 23 AM 1 busy connect e e e e e
133. E POWER FIRST THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG FOR SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAINS DISCONNECT DEVICE ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET OUTLET IS LOCATED INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE Installation Manual Note Before you start setting or changing system parameters we recommend that you turn off the Answer Mode with the OFLN command While off the power LED of the VPS will flash and the VPS will not answer any incoming call After you finish programming use the ONLN command to turn on the Answer Mode normal operation Please see 7 2 1 Off line Set OFLN and 7 2 2 On line Set ONLN for more details Trademarks HyperTerminal is either a registered trademark or a trademark of HILGRAEVE INCORPORATED in the United States and or other countries e IBM is either a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and or other countries Procomm Plus is either a registered trademark or a trademark of DATASTORM TECHNOLOGIES INC in the United States and or other countries Smartcom is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products Inc in the United States and or other countries e All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners
134. EETING SETTING C6 288 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING SETTING Company Greeting greets all incoming callers The System Manager or System Administrator can choose the appropriate company greeting to each individual Time Service period Day Night Lunch and Break for each port and trunk outside line group The default is set at the System Greeting prior to factory shipment Note While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer the System Manager cannot change the Company Greeting setting The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 5 to change Company Greeting setting 4 Press 1 to change the port setting or 2 to change the trunk service setting 5 Type 1 12 port number or 1 48 trunk group number 6 Press 1 2 3 or 4 to choose the desired Time Service period entry e 1 Day Time service 2 Night Time service e 3 Lunch Time service 4 Break Time service 7 The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting 8 Press 1 2 or 3 to choose the desired setting entry e 1 To change Company Greeting number 2 To set System Greeting Go to Step 10 3 To disable Go to Step 10 9 Type the Company Greeting number 1 32 10 Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM
135. EM NAVIGATION 1 Enter 5 System 1 System Group 1 Mailbox cone Assignment Group 2 Delete 3 Listing 1 Enter 2 2 Delete 3 Listing l Kme raup 1 Service Mode 1 Day Service 2 Time Service H Time Group 2 Lunch Service No Entry 3 Break Service Holiday Setting 1 Holiday Setting Enter 2 Holiday Setting Delete Daylight Saving Time 3 Holilay Listing Prompt Setting 1 Enter System Caller Name Announcement 2 Delete 3 Caller ID Listing Others 1 Extension Numbering Plan 1 16 2 Dialing Parameter 3 Message Waiting Notification 4 External Message Delivery 5 Call Hold 6 Rotary Telephone Service 7 Intercom Paging Parameters _ 8 Fax Management 6 Bard 9 Disconnect Parameter Hardware z Setting RS 232C Port Setting for each port PBX Interface 1 Dialing Parameter Parameter 2 Inband Signaling 3 Digit Translation 1 Inter digit Table Timeout 4 VPS Port 2 Input Output Installation Manual 209 B2 SYSTEM ADMINI
136. EM PARAMETER SETTINGS W T Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Number of 0 8 digits Specifies the number of digits necessary to access an Digits 1 outside CO line to Access If the PBX requires callers to dial 9 to access an outside CO line this parameter should be set as 1 This enables the system to recognise that an outgoing call setup sequence is completed once the initial 9 has been dialled 9 123 4567 The full sequence is therefore 9 outgoing call setup sequence 123 4567 The VPS can discriminate between local and long distance calls and can report outgoing calls and calling times for billing purposes on periodic port usage reports Call Transfer 10 60 s Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait No Answer 20 before retrieving the transferred call when there is no Time answer at the destination extension Note Make sure that the duration of Call Transfer No Answer Time is longer than the duration of Call Forwarding No Answer Time at the PBX Otherwise the PBX may forward the call transferred by the VPS immediately to its destination without leaving enough time to answer the call Outgoing Call 10 90 s Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait No Answer 30 before concluding that there is no answer at the Time outside number called Pause Time 1 9s Specifies the pause time between dialled digits 2 Outgoing Call Up to 12 digits Specifies the
137. INGS If the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax the VPS will forward the fax transmission to the alternate fax extension To access the proper menu for Fax Management follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 8 Table B 35 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Automatic 1 Disable Enables or disables the Automatic Transfer of Incoming Transfer of 2 Enable Fax Call Service Incoming Fax Disable Call Note Automatic detection works for only the first 30s Main Fax 2 5 digits Specifies the main fax extension number Extension No None Alternate Fax 2 5 digits Specifies the alternate fax extension number When the Extension No None main fax extension is busy or does not answer within the specified Fax No Answer Time the VPS forwards the fax call to the alternate fax extension Fax No Answer 5 60 s Specifies the length of time in seconds the VPS must Time 10 wait before taking other action when there is no answer at either fax extension Note This timer applies to the fax call that has been transferred to the main or alternate fax extension Fax Manager 2 5 digits Specifies the Fax Manager Mailbox Number The VPS Mailbox No None will notify the fax manager of the status of fax calls depending upon the settings of the Fax No Answer Coverage Mode and Fax Notification Mode parameters Fax No Answer 1 No If set to Mbx the VPS
138. ION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Personal Greetings in GLOSSARY See 1 2 Recording Personal Greetings in the Subscribers Guide Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting Allows the Guidance for Recording message to be played for the caller after the Personal Greeting The Guidance for Recording message instructs the caller how to terminate the call access more features and re record the message See Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting in Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Installation Manual 197 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Port Service Allows assignment of call services to each port The incoming call service determines which service is used when answering incoming calls These services include Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant Service Interview Service and Custom Service See 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS See B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Private Message Allows a subscriber and the System Manager to specify a message as Private when sending it to other subscribers the Message Manager and or the System Manager A message specified as Private cannot be transferred It is also possible to specify messages recorded
139. If set to Yes the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting Waiting Lamp 2 Yes Lamp of the extension each time a new message is for Every Yes recorded in the mailbox This will occur even if the Message Message Waiting Lamp was not turned off from a previous message This setting is useful when the first attempt is unsuccessful If set to No the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting Lamp for the first message only The VPS will not turn on the lamp for subsequent messages until the subscriber has accessed the VPS to retrieve the messages stored there Max Digits for 1 48 digits Specifies the maximum number of digits the caller can Callback No 20 enter as a callback number This number will display on beepers pagers if the Beeper Callback No Entry Mode is enabled Callback No 1 10 s Sets the maximum allowable time between each digit on Entry Interdigit 5 Beeper Callback No Entry If the caller does not enter Time Out any digits within the specified time the VPS will not accept entry of any additional digits Installation Manual 257 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 30 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default System Up to 32 digits Specifies a telephone number that will display on the Callback No None subscriber s beeper pager as a callback number The callback number entry mode X must be included in the telephone number Note If
140. Installation Manual 5 6 Precaution FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician WARNING THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code Green and Yellow Earth Blue Neutral Brown Live As the colours of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proc
141. L DELIVERY MAILBOX D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX One of the Message Manager s functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for messages and transfer them to the appropriate mailbox or mailboxes System Group Distribution Lists may be used This can be done at any time using the telephone Listening to Messages The Message Manager can monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox through his mailbox He can listen to the messages stored in the General Delivery Mailbox and if necessary transfer them to their intended recipients 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 The VPS plays the number of new messages Press 1 to listen to the messages 3 The VPS plays each message identifying the sender and indicating when the message was recorded Press 0 to listen to the entire menu 1 Repeat this Message 1 1 Replay the Previous Message 2 Play the Next Message 3 1 Erase this Message 4 Reply 5 Rewind 6 Fast Forward 7 Transfer 8 Message Scan Transferring Messages Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox must be transferred to their intended recipients with voice comments attached when necessary When a message has been transferred we recommend that the original be deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 1 to transfer messages from the General Delivery Mailbox 3 The VPS plays the first next last message Press 7 to tra
142. LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLII Caution Now System Initialization Starts LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLELLELLLLLLLLI Is it all right Y N 5 Type Y to start the system resetting System Initializing Wait a moment 7 1 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM 6 When system initialising is complete the following display will appear Note The execution time for System Reset Clear may differ each time it is performed because of system capacity and system programmes Generally initialisation will take about 5 min to accomplish Installation Manual 147 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS In the Utility Command Mode the System Administrator can access the functions described below by entering the appropriate command at the prompt and Pressing RETURN To select the Utility Commands Menu follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 3 Utility Command Type HELP for command list Table 7 1 OFLN Sets the system to off line mode ONLN Sets the system to on line mode PASS Sets the System Administrator s password TIME Sets the system clock date and time PSET Specifies the time reports will be printed ELOG Displays device error log SAVE Stores a backup of the programme or data in the hard disk LOAD Restores a backup of the programme or data to the VPS GPRN Displays all of the VPS parameters VERS Displays t
143. List no Custom Menu No 1 100 Custom Menu Access Counter Clear no Custom Menu No 1 100 0 0 Clear AII MWL Retry count Set 1 3 Minimum Recording Length Set 0 3 Registered User Prompt No List opt 1 gt User Prompt 1 2 gt User Prompt 2 None gt User Prompt 1 amp 2 Quick Setup Line Monitor DTMF Information Display Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting Wait Time for Caller ID 7 2 17 Quick Setup QSET Use the QSET command initially to perform a basic setup of your VPS when you use your VPS for the first time or after system initialisation Note Quick setup requires VT100 emulation software Type QSET then Press RETURN 7 2 18 Circuit Condition Display LMON Use the LMON command to display the circuit condition every 1 5 s To turn off this command enter The following circuit conditions may be displayed Ready Incoming Call Outgoing Call DSP Reset PT connect Error 160 Installation Manual Waiting for a call Answering a call Making an outbound call Processing DSP reset Processing PT connect DSP Card is not loaded 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS LMON No Status 1 Ready 2 Ready 3 Error 4 Error 5 Error 6 Error 10 11 12 Status Error Error Error Error Error Error 7 2 19 Touchtone Information Display PUTD Use the PUTD command to display the touchtones the VPS receives
144. M ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 22 Table B 23 Time Service Time Group 1 8 Lunch Service To access the proper menu for Lunch Service for the selected time group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 2 Time Group No 1 8 2 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mon 1 12 h Specifies the Start and End times of the Lunch Start End 00 59 min Service AM PM a m p m Sun None Start End Time Service Time Group 1 8 Break Service To access the proper menu for Break Service for the selected time group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 2 Time Group No 1 8 3 Start End Sun Break 1 Service Break 2 Service Break 3 Service Start End Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mon 1 12 h Specifies the Start and End times of the Break Break 1 Service 00 59 min Service Break 2 Service AM PM a m p m l Break 3 Service None Note When Break Service periods overlap Lunch Service period Lunch Service has priority Installation Manual 247 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS B6 3 Holiday Setting Table B 24 You can program special settings for up to 20 Holiday Services On the day s specified as holiday s settings in this parameter have priority over settings for Trunk Service Port Servi
145. MODE Installation Manual 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 Table 4 3 10 Change the PBX type in the VPS programming menu in the following sequence System prompts gt are displayed on the screen Press ENTER Screen output Please Select Your Terminal Type 1 ASCIT TERMINAL 2 VT100 Please Enter the Number e Go to the PBX type selection menu By selecting your terminal type 1 or 2 and press ENTER Select 1 and press ENTER Select 6 and press ENTER Select 3 and press ENTER Select 1 and press ENTER Screen output PBX Type Other 1 Other Manufacturers 2 KXT series Programm Hardware Setting PBX Interface Parameters Dialing Parameters Menu Select 2 and press ENTER Enter the Model Number 1 T308 2 T616 3 T1232 TA series 4 T96 5 T336 6 TD816 7 TD1232 612 8 TD500 9 Reserved Select 7 and press ENTER Escape the programming menu by entering Backslash Key until System prompt comes to be visible e Check the LED on the VPS unit If the light is on the DPT connection between VPS and PBX is established If the LED is flashing the DPT connection cannot be established Possible causes of the message DPT Interface Connection is not Established Cause Remedy The PBX is not a KX TD series system Since the VPS is configured to communicate with the KX TD1232 this
146. Mailbox 296 To Access the System Manager s Mailbox 274 To establish a mailbox group 120 To establish an extension group 121 To structure an interview mailbox 122 Total Message Time 280 Touchtone Information Display PUTD 161 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER 136 Transferring Messages 297 Transmitted Data TXD output 47 Troubleshooting 172 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 172 Trunk 1 48 Break Mode 229 Trunk 1 48 Day Mode 227 Trunk 1 48 Lunch Mode 229 Trunk 1 48 Night Mode 228 Trunk Group Assignment 227 Trunk service 202 Twenty four hour time stamp 252 Two Way Recording 202 Two Way Transfer 203 TWR Two Way Recording Button Assignment via Sta tion Programming 100 TWR Two Way Recording into Mailbox 104 TWT Two Way Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming 100 TWT Two Way Transfer into Mailbox 104 U UCD functions 15 Unlimited message length 203 UNPACKING 33 Using the Interface 207 Utility Command List HELP 159 UTILITY COMMANDS 148 203 V VM Prompts 313 VOICE MAIL 20 120 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION 24 Voice mail service 203 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station Pro gramming 101 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 13 Voice prompts 204 VPS Limitations 15 VPS Port Parameters 272 VPS Programming for Inband Integration 57 VT100 or Compatible Terminals 206 378 Installation Manual W Wait for Caller ID WCID 162 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO 14 Which Phone Syste
147. Month saving time The VPS advances 1 h on the starting None date of daylight saving time and restores the time on the ending date Both the starting date and the ending date must be set The same date cannot be used for both settings Note The VPS changes to and from DST at 2 00 AM Warning Time Synchronisation see 7 2 4 Set Time TIME overrides the DST setting of the VPS 250 Installation Manual B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS B6 5 Prompt Setting Table B 26 This setting is required when Multilingual Service is enabled To access the proper menu for Prompt Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 5 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default System Prompt 1 9 Assigns a selection number 1 9 to each prompt Callers Selection None use the numbers to select the desired language for their Number message prompts This setting is required when either one or both of the following parameters are set to Selective User 1 Prompt Selection 1 Number Port Assignment Incoming Call Service Prompt Authorisation of External Message Delivery Prompt User 2 Prompt Mode Selection Number Example For service in English press 7 For service in Spanish press 8 For service in Chinese press 9 The Message Manager is responsible for recording this Multilingual Selection Menu Note The Prompt Select
148. ORT 6 Auto Attend PORT 7 Auto Attend PORT 8 Auto Attend PORT 9 Auto Attend Attend Attend Attend All ports are currently set up to handle callers with standard automated atten dant operation day and night mode using the Custom Service feature Custom 1 You can change the operation to standard voice mail Custom 2 or leave it as automated attendant If necessary Custom 1 and Custom 2 can be modified under the menu Program gt Service Setting gt Custom Service Night Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Attend Attend Attend Attend Attend Attend Attend Attend Attend Attend Attend Attend A Auto Attend V Voice Mail S Next Screen Auto Attend using Custom 1 Voice Mail using Custom 2 Incoming Call Services for all ports Day Night can be defined by this setting Default values for all ports Day Night are Automated Attendant Service Custom 1 To select other incoming call services go to Setting Ports 6 Password Setting Screen output Quick Setup Password Setting Maximum 10 characters VERIFICATION Maximum 10 characters NEW PASSWORD NEW PASSWORD VERIFICATION System Administrator Password System Reset Clear Password You can assign the System Administrator Password and System Reset Clear Password in this screen if necessary IMPORTANT We strongly recommend th
149. PBX 196 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Personal Greeting Permits subscribers to record up to 4 See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT for Caller ID personal greetings for calls from pre INTEGRATION DPT Integration Only assigned Caller ID numbers Each greeting supports up to 8 caller ID numbers This feature can be enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings See Personal Greeting Length and Personal Greeting for CID in Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Personal Greeting for Caller ID in GLOSSARY See 4 10 Recording Personal Greetings for Caller ID in the Subscriber s Guide See 4 11 Assigning Caller ID Numbers for Personal Greeting for Caller ID in the Subscriber s Guide Personal Greetings Permit the subscriber to record the following 3 personal message greetings No Answer Plays when unavailable to answer the call during business hours Busy Signal Plays whenever the line is busy After Hours Plays when the VPS is in the Night Mode The No Answer Greeting will also play when the caller accesses the mailbox directly when the Busy Signal or the After Hours Greeting has not been recorded See 6 2 1 Recording Personal Greetings See Personal Greeting Length in Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRAT
150. PT Integration is established the PBX sends information to the VPS through the data link This information enables the VPS to identify the extension that is calling know where from and why a call is forwarded and recognise what the caller wants to do This communication allows features that are only available with DPT Integration several of which are described below Table 4 1 DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES Remote Call Forwarding Set The subscribers and the Message Manager can program their extensions from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside telephone Auto Configuration The VPS knows what extension numbers exist on the PBX and creates mailboxes for each extension automatically Also sets the VPS clock with data from the PBX clock Live Call Screening Extension users can monitor messages as they are being left in the mailbox or intercept if required Two Way Recording Extension users can record conversations into their own mailboxes by pressing one button Two Way Transfer Extension users can record conversations into another person s mailbox by pressing a button and dialling an extension number Direct Mailbox Access The subscriber can directly enter his mailbox when he calls the VPS He does not have to dial his mailbox number Trunk Service Universal Port Each PBX trunk outside line group can be assigned one of 4 incoming call
151. Panasonic Voice Processing System Installation Manual Model ye KX TV P2 00 p Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Voice Processing System Model KX TVP200 Please read this manual before installing customising or operating the Voice Processing System 2 Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic KX TVP200 Voice Processing System We are confident that it will provide your customer or client with many years of dependable service This Voice Processing System was especially tailored for the environment of your country For example it can be configured for English Spanish or a third language System prompts Recorded by the factory in English User 1 prompts Record in any language you like User 2 prompts Recorded by the factory in Spanish These prompts guide subscribers and non subscribers through specific VPS operations However we would like to stress that for outside callers who merely need to be guided to an extension a mailbox or other destinations e g a fax machine they can be greeted by a Custom Service This supports many languages as there are 12 keys on a touchtone phone and you can record up to 100 Custom Service menus One twelfth of these menus can be recorded in one language if you desire Another twelfth can be recorded in another language and so on Thus callers can be guided entirely in their native languages For a multi cultural
152. Parameter Setting System Caller Name Announcement 11 System Parameter Setting Others 12 Hardware Setting 13 System Reset Clear Parameter oo 109 tn 2 UG rbf 2 C Please select Note This command is only valid when in the ASCII TERMINAL mode 7 2 10 Program Version Display VERS Use the VERS command to display the version numbers of the hard disk and main ROM Type VERS then Press RETURN VERS V P S PROGRAM VERSION MAIN DISK VJ31AD 3 07 MAIN ROM VILIAA 1 01 Note The numbers are examples only Your system will show different numbers 7 2 11 Custom Service Report CREP Use the CREP command to display the Custom Service menu access count the keypad assignments message recording status and the tree structure of the Custom Service Type CREP Press Space Enter the Custom Service number 1 100 and Press RETURN 156 Installation Manual 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS N Xfer Mbx 998 0 Operator Custom 100 System Access 9 Menu Msg None multilingual pick gt 1 Custom 1 System Access 2 Menu Msg None 2 3 lt English service gt N Operator 0 Operator 1 A A Service 2 V M Service 3 FAX Transfer x Subscriber 2 Custom 2 User 1 Access 2 Menu Msg Spanish service N Operator 0 Operator 1 A A Service 2 V
153. REPORTS The System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to help monitor the VPS operating status The reports are sent from the RS 232C port to either a printer or a terminal The System Administrator is also able to output System Reports Obtaining System Reports 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 for the System Report Menu 3 Press 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 to generate the desired report 1 System Service Report 2 Disk Usage Report 3 Port Usage Report 4 Mailbox Usage Report 5 Mailbox Parameter Report 6 Call Account Report e 7 Class of Service Parameter Report 8 Fax Call Report Note The Mailbox Parameter Report is displayed as Mailbox Assignments The Class of Service Parameter Report is displayed as COS Assignments 4 For Disk Usage Report Port Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report or Fax Call Report Press 1 To generate the Mailbox Usage Report Go to Step 5 5 Mailbox Usage Report Type the mailbox number of the start of the range Note If a 4 is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers e g for 3 digit mailbox numbers reports for all mailboxes will be printed and the System Report Menu will appear In this case Step 6 can be skipped 6 Press 1 to specify the mailbox range and Type the mailbox number of the end of the range or Press 2 to obtain all mailbox usage counts This mailbox number is the end of the mailbox range The
154. ROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 38 Break mode third operator s 38 extension is extension number 39 Break mode third operator s 39 extension is not assigned 40 Busy signal greeting is message 40 41 Busy signal greeting is not recorded 41 42 Call blocking enabled 42 43 Call forwarding accepted 43 44 Call forwarding is cancelled 44 45 Call forwarding not accepted 45 Please check the destination number 46 Call screening enabled 46 47 Call transferred from the voice 47 processing system 48 CALLBACK NUMBER 48 49 Caller ID number 49 277 49 278 50 Caller ID number and caller name 50 deleted 51 Caller ID number entries for this box 51 are full there are 30 entries for caller ID allowed 52 Caller ID number is telephone 52 poe 52 722 663 53 Caller ID number is not assigned 53 53 722 432 54 Caller ID numbers assigned 601 54 55 Caller ID screen disabled 55 56 Caller ID screen enabled 56 57 Caller name is name 57 58 Caller name is erased 58 59 Caller name is not recorded 59 60 Calling the operator 60 467 61 Cannot be retrieved 61 316 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Mo
155. Range Description Function Default Group 2 5 digits Specifies any vacant mailbox number The caller can List No None specify that the VPS transfers or delivers messages to all members of a group by simply specifying the System Group Distribution List No Group Name Up to 16 Specifies a group name If a group name is not required characters press RETURN and specify the mailbox numbers None Any alphanumeric character and space can be used 242 Installation Manual B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 18 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Member 2 5 digits Specifies mailbox numbers belonging to this group 1 20 None Mailbox Group Delete Deletes specified mailboxes from the list To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group Delete follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 2 Group List No Mailbox Group Listing Displays all System Group Distribution List numbers To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group Listing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 3 System Group Assignment Extension Group You can assemble several extensions into a single list The VPS is able to maintain up to 20 Extension Group Lists Each list can support up to 20 extensions You can add delete and review the extensions Members within a list are able to share the same mailbox
156. Ready DTR output 48 Data loading new or saved data to the VPS LOAD 155 Data saving the system data to the backup device SAVE 143 153 Daylight Saving Time DST 250 Daylight saving time assignment 184 Delete Message Confirmation 184 281 Deleting a Mailbox 134 214 276 Deleting a Mailbox Password 276 DELIVERING MESSAGES 291 Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes Broadcasting Mes sages 291 Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes 291 Department Dialing 126 184 230 Department Dialing Service 122 Device Error Log Indications 152 Dialing by name 184 Dialing Parameters 53 266 Dialing Parameters 1 6 3 1 116 Digit Translation Table Parameters 55 271 Digit Translation Table Parameters Input Output 272 Digit Translation Table Parameters Inter Digit Timeout 271 Direct Mailbox Access 184 281 Disconnect Parameter 1 5 7 9 116 Disk Usage Report 168 Disk Usage Statistics Clear 168 DPT Integration 21 24 185 DPT or Inband Signalling 50 E Editing Mailboxes 210 Entering a Mailbox 130 Environmental Requirements 32 Error and Warning Indications During System Operation 153 Error Indications at System Startup 152 Error Log Display ELOG 151 Expansion Capabilities 22 44 Expansion Capabilities of the VPS 39 Extension group 185 Extension Group Delete 244 Extension Group Enter 243 Extension Group Listing 244 Extension Groups 121 Extension numbering plan 185 Extension to extension T
157. SSARY See 4 14 Recording a Two Way Conversation in the Subscriber s Guide 202 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Two Way Transfer DPT Integration only Permits a subscriber to record two way conversations into another person s mailbox See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION See 4 4 10 TWT Two Way Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming See 4 4 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming See 4 4 16 TWT Two Way Transfer into Mailbox See 4 4 17 A Restriction on TWR TWT Activation See Two Way Transfer in GLOSSARY See 4 14 Recording a Two Way Conversation in the Subscriber s Guide Unlimited Message Length Permits a mailbox owner to record two way conversations of unlimited length into his or another person s mailbox Two Way Recording or Two Way Transfer The maximum recording time for other messages will automatically be set to 6 min To allow unlimited recording time the Message Length parameter must be set to 0 Unlimited in the COS Class of Service settings See Two Way Recording and Two Way Transfer in this table See Message Length in Table B 7 and Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Unlimited Message Length in GLOSSARY Utility Commands Allow the System Administrat
158. ST Place an outside call from an SLT See if you can set up a screened transfer to another extension Next try the same test with an internal call The VPS may have to transfer both types of calls Follow on ID or Called Party ID When forwarding or transferring a call to the VPS a PBX with Follow on ID sends the mailbox number of the called subscriber to the VPS before connecting the caller The VPS responds by playing that subscribers personal greeting This operation is sometimes called Call Forward to Mailbox Without this feature the VPS cannot immediately play the greeting when the line is busy or there is no answer and allow the caller to leave a message 52 Installation Manual 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS General Guidelines and Definitions Optimal performance of the VPS PBX system relies on proper VPS programming There are 3 categories of hardware settings RS 232C Port Settings and PBX Interface Parameters Entering a number sets some of the parameters while others use sequence codes RS 232C Settings Baud Rate 300 38400 Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred in bits per second Word Bit Length 7 8 Defines the number of bits in each byte or character Parity N O E Specifies the parity used for error detection Stop Bit Length 1 2 Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of the by
159. STRATION MAILBOXES B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Up to 1022 Subscriber Mailboxes can be created or edited by following the correct sequence Table B 3 of steps To access the proper menu for mailbox setup follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mailbox 2 5 digits Specifies the subscriber s mailbox number Mailbox Number None number length is determined during setup or when initialising the system Mailbox numbers cannot begin with 0 If the length of the mailbox number has been defined as 3 digits for example the valid range for all mailbox numbers would be 100 through 997 998 and 999 would be reserved for the Message Manager and the System Manager The length of the mailbox number cannot be changed through the Mailbox Setting screen once it has been specified Editing Mailboxes Table B 4 210 The parameters of each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the subscriber To access the proper menu for mailbox editing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No 1 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default The Extension 2 5 digits Used to transfer calls through the VPS to a subscriber s of the Owner None mailbox Any valid extension number including an Extension Group List number can be assigned
160. STRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table B 8 224 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Beeper 1 Caller Permits the Message Manager to use the Callback Number Callback Select Entry feature No Entry 2 Without Mode 3 Before 4 After Caller After recording a message the caller is asked 5 Disable Select if the message is urgent If urgent the caller is Disable asked to enter the callback number Without Without recording a message the caller is asked to enter the callback number Before Before recording a message the VPS asks the caller to enter the callback number After After recording a message the VPS asks the caller to enter the callback number Disable Disables the Callback Number Entry feature Note To utilise this feature the callback number entry code must be included in the subscriber s beeper pager number When Disable is selected or if the caller does not enter a callback number System Callback No see Table B 30 will be displayed on the beeper s pager s display If a callers number is received through a telephone company s Caller ID service the callers number will be displayed instead of System Callback No MWL 1 Yes If set to Yes the message waiting lamp illuminates when Notification for 2 No unplayed messages remain after the Message Manager Unreceived Yes has accessed the mailbox Message Device 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS call
161. System Caller Name Announcement Listing Displays all Caller ID List numbers To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement Listing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 3 B6 7 Other Parameters To access the proper menu for Other Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 Other Parameters Extension Numbering Plan Specifies the extension numbers of the PBX so that the VPS is able to recognise the dialled extension as valid This setting promotes the call handling of the Automated Attendant Service We recommend that this parameter be set for better integration with the PBX Installation Manual 253 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS To access the proper menu for Extension Numbering Plan follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 1 254 Installation Manual B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 28 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Numbering 2 5 digits Specifies the first 1 or 2 digits of the PBX extension Plan consisting numbers You can add up to 16 entries to the list Each 1 16 of 0 9 X entry can contain 2 5 digits 0 9 and a letter X which Numbering matches any digit Extension numbers cannot begin with Plan 2 o 2XX Numbering Examples Plan 3 3XX a If valid PBX extension numbers are to be s
162. T OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 516 SEVENTEEN 516 517 SEVENTEEN HOUR 517 518 SEVENTEEN MINUTE 518 519 SEVENTEENTH 519 520 SEVENTH 520 521 SEVENTY 521 522 SEVENTY EIGHT 522 523 SEVENTY FIVE 523 524 SEVENTY FOUR 524 525 SEVENTY NINE 525 526 SEVENTY ONE 526 527 SEVENTY SEVEN 527 528 SEVENTY SIX 528 529 SEVENTY THREE 529 530 SEVENTY TWO 530 531 SIX 531 532 SIX HOUR 532 533 SIXTEEN 533 534 SIXTEEN HOUR 534 535 SIXTEEN MINUTE 535 536 SIXTEENTH 536 537 SIXTH 537 538 SIXTY 538 539 SIXTY EIGHT 539 540 SIXTY FIVE 540 541 SIXTY FOUR 541 542 SIXTY NINE 542 543 SIXTY ONE 543 544 SIXTY SEVEN 544 545 SIXTY SIX 545 546 SIXTY THREE 546 547 SIXTY TWO 547 548 Sorry 548 336 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 549 Sorry cannot add any more 549 550 Sorry cannot call this number 550 428 465 551 Sorry mailbox in use cannot be 551 deleted 552 Sorry maximum of 20 destinations 552 exceeded 553 Sorry no one is available to answer 553 the call 554 Sorry no space for recording 554 555 Sorry Operator is not ava
163. TEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS B7 2 Port Setting To access the proper menu for Port Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 2 Port Setting Menu To access the proper menu Port Setting Menu for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 2 Port No 1 12 Table B 38 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Flash Time 1 100 ms Specifies the duration of the flash recall signal that the 2 300 ms VPS will send to the PBX See the PBX manual to 3 600 ms determine the correct value 4 900 ms 100 CPC Signal 1 None Specifies the minimum time necessary to detect an 2 6 5 ms interruption in the CPC Calling Party Control signal 3 150 ms received from the PBX The VPS is able to determine 4 300 ms that the line has been disconnected when it detects an 5 450 ms interruption of the CPC signal 6 600 ms 6 5 Disconnect 1 8s Specifies the length of time the line will temporarily be Time 2 unavailable after a call has ended Dial Mode 1 DTMF Specifies the dial mode for DTMF touchtone or Pulse 2 Pulse 10 pps If Pulse is specified pulse speed 10 20 pps must be 3 Pulse 20 pps selected DTMF Note This setting only affects outward dialling from the VPS The VPS can only receive DTMF touchtone signals B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Three separate parameters are used to progra
164. TEM REPORTS 289 C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES 21svrs asa rer esere eee eee iene iii 291 C9 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX 293 C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES creen nen 294 gables D MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX n 296 o MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX nnn 297 D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION eene 299 D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX 302 D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK rr rrrrerre nennen nna nnne errans 304 D6 RECORDING MESSAGES s 11rrrrrrrere seen siii eee eee einen 306 D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET eese eene arene aan eee iii 310 D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE 312 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPT ccsccssscesccsssseseucnsseseeenneeseeseneeseeseeassenees 314 GLOSSARY A 361 INDEX M 373 Installation Manual Section 1 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW Installation Manual 13 1 1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO 1 1 1 1 1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO Why Voice Processing The VPS handles incoming and outgoing calls When a call comes in it answers forwar
165. TION SERVICE SETTINGS B5 3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to be automatically forwarded to a desired destination The VPS automatically forwards the calls from the assigned Caller ID numbers to a programmed extension mailbox System Group Distribution List included or Custom Service It also forwards Private caller s number is not received and Out of Area calls toa desired extension mailbox or Custom Service The company greetings will not play for calls forwarded by this feature Services have this order of priority Holiday Service gt Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday Service has the highest priority To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 Caller ID Call Routing Enter To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing Enter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 1 Caller ID List No 1 120 Table B 17 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Caller ID No P Oor Assigns the telephone number to which the VPS applies Up to 20 digits automatic forwarding to a desired destination x consisting of 1 9 substitutes any number wild card For example to 0 X route all calls from Area Code 201 enter 201 XXX None Xxxxx To have a Private call automatically forwarded t
166. Table 5 9 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Time Frame 1 1 12 h Specifies the daily schedule for the Message Waiting 2 00 59 min Notification service for 1 week for this device MON AM PM TUE ab Note These parameters are active only when Use WED i Mode is set to Scheduled THU All Day FRI Space No Use SAT No U SUN ause From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 1 Enter the Mailbox number Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Menu 1 Mailbox Setting 2 Notification Setting 3 Remote Call FWD to CO Enter The Number 3 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Remote Call FWD to CO 1 Telephone No 1 0 9 X Enter the telephone No 1 2 Telephone No 2 0 9 X Enter the telephone No 2 Enter the data using the following table as a guide Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Telephone Up to 24 digits Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are Number 1 2 With the KX forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to an TD500 outside CO line or Up to 16 digits The telephone number can contain the digits 0 9 and With other KX TD u y series PBXs None f i Note This feature is available with DPT Integration only Note The KX TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom It is only available in some countries Installation Manual 133 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES 5
167. There was one unsuccessful attempt 603 to enter this mailbox 604 There were number of failure 604 905 605 These are the brief segments of your 605 Message 606 THIRD 606 607 Third telephone number is telephone 607 number 608 Third telephone number is not 608 assigned 609 THIRTEEN 609 610 THIRTEEN HOUR 610 611 THIRTEEN MINUTE 611 612 THIRTEENTH 612 613 THIRTIETH 613 614 THIRTY 614 615 THIRTY MINUTE 615 616 THIRTY EIGHT 616 617 THIRTY EIGHT MINUTE 617 618 THIRTY FIRST 618 619 THIRTY FIVE 619 620 THIRTY FIVE MINUTE 620 621 THIRTY FOUR 621 622 THIRTY FOUR MINUTE 622 623 THIRTY NINE 623 Installation Manual 339 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 624 THIRTY NINE MINUTE 624 625 THIRTY ONE 625 626 THIRTY ONE MINUTE 626 627 THIRTY SEVEN 627 628 THIRTY SEVEN MINUTE 628 629 THIRTY SIX 629 630 THIRTY SIX MINUTE 630 631 THIRTY THREE 631 632 THIRTY THREE MINUTE 632 633 THIRTY TWO 633 634 THIRTY TWO MINUTE 634 635 This call is for name 635 635 271 636 This call is from name 636 637 This caller ID number already exists 637 638 This device is for continuous use 638 639 This device is for scheduled use 639 640 This d
168. UTILITY COMMANDS CCLR 20 Custom Menu lt 20 gt Access Counter Cleared Note Type CCLR 0 to clear the access counters of all Custom Services 7 2 13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times MWL Use the MWL command to specify the number of times the VPS will attempt to turn on the Message Waiting Lamp of the called extension Apply this setting when a PBX other than the Panasonic KX T series telephone system is used MWL Current Setting of M W L Retry Count is 3 Enter M W L Retry Count 1 3 Note This setting is not valid if Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message is set to Yes 7 2 14 Setting Minimum Recording Length MRL Use the MRL command to specify the minimum message recording length 0 3 s Messages shorter than the specified minimum recording length are discarded from the mailbox Note The minimum recording length can only be set using this command 1 Type MRL then Press RETURN MRL Current Setting of Minimum Recording Length is 2 Enter Minimum Recording Length 0 3 2 Type the message length 7 2 15 Modified Prompt List MPLT Use the MPLT command to display the user prompt recording status recorded not recorded or turned off 1 Type MPLT then Press RETURN MPLT gt both prompts MPLT 1 User 1 prompts MPLT 2 gt User 2 prompts 158 Installation Manual 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 3 MPLT 1 1
169. VE HOUR 865 866 TWELVE MINUTE 866 Installation Manual 355 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 867 TWENTY 867 868 TWENTY HOUR 868 869 TWENTY MINUTE 869 870 TWENTY EIGHT 870 871 TWENTY EIGHT MINUTE 871 872 TWENTY EIGHTH 872 873 TWENTY FIFTH 873 874 TWENTY FIRST 874 875 TWENTY FIVE 875 876 TWENTY FIVE MINUTE 876 877 TWENTY FOUR 877 878 TWENTY FOUR HOUR 878 879 TWENTY FOUR MINUTE 879 880 TWENTY FOURTH 880 881 TWENTY NINE 881 882 TWENTY NINE MINUTE 882 883 TWENTY NINTH 883 884 TWENTY ONE 884 885 TWENTY ONE HOUR 885 886 TWENTY ONE MINUTE 886 887 TWENTY SECOND 887 888 TWENTY SEVEN 888 889 TWENTY SEVEN MINUTE 889 890 TWENTY SEVENTH 890 891 TWENTY SIX 891 892 TWENTY SIX MINUTE 892 893 TWENTY SIXTH 893 894 TWENTY THIRD 894 895 TWENTY THREE 895 896 TWENTY THREE HOUR 896 897 TWENTY THREE MINUTE 897 898 TWENTY TWO 898 899 TWENTY TWO HOUR 899 356 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 900 TWENTY TWO MINUTE 900 901 TWENTIETH 901 902 TWO 902 903 TWO HOUR 903 904 TWO THOUSAND 904 905 u
170. VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD DIGITAL PBX 75 Intercom Paging 189 Intercom Paging 1 5 7 7 115 Intercom Paging Group Number 281 Interview Service 121 190 K Keyboard Use 206 KX TA Series Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s Extension 58 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager s Extension 86 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool 91 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRA TION 78 KX TD500 Programming for Inband Integration 59 KX TD816 and KX TD1232 Programming for Inband Inte gration via the Manager s Extension 69 KX TD816 and KX TD1232 Programming for Inband Inte gration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool 69 L Linked Prompts List 358 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS 314 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SER VICE 312 Listening to Messages 297 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES 294 Listing Mailboxes 215 Live Call Screening 191 Live Call Screening LCS Programming 96 Live Call Screening Activation 103 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming 98 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station Pro gramming 99 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station Programming 99 Live Call Screening Password Assignment 96 Live Call Screening Password Cancelling 96 Installation Manual 375 Live Call Screening Password Control 103 Live Call Screening P
171. Y See 2 1 Receiving Messages in the Subscriber s Guide Message Transfer Allows the subscriber to transfer messages to other mailboxes after playing The subscriber can also add a personal comment at the beginning of the message to be transferred if desired One or more individual mailboxes can be specified for message transfer Messages can also be transferred using either the System or Personal Group Distribution Lists See Transferring Messages in D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX See Message Transfer in GLOSSARY See 2 3 Message Transfer in the Subscriber s Guide Installation Manual 193 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Message Waiting Notification Device Automatically notifies the subscriber Message Manager of the reception of new message s by calling either a specified telephone or beeper pager number The message will automatically play when the subscriber Message Manager answers a call to the telephone When a beeper pager is called the subscriber Message Manager must call the VPS and access the message from the mailbox Notification can be scheduled either on or off for a maximum of 2 times during any 24 h period The subscriber Message Manager can program a maximum of 3 telephones or beepers pagers in sequence The VPS will redial the number or number sequence for a specified number of times until answered
172. a selected When performing this operation always wait until the process completion indication appears WARNING Never save back up and upload the Program without your dealer s support The memory required to save each data component is indicated below 1 2 3 Program approximately 2 Mbytes See Warning above Parameters approximately 4 4 Mbyte System Configuration System Prompts approximately 23 Mbytes Do not save prompts are saved as defaults in the drive Saving items 4 7 below will depend upon the length of the recorded messages 4 User Prompts 1 Modified prompts Modifications to default settings ON OD O User Prompts 2 Modified prompts Modifications to default settings Custom Service Menus Custom service recordings Personal Greetings Subscriber greetings Company Greetings 1 Type SAVE then Press RETURN Li ON tA BWP 8 SAVE VPS Disk Data Save VPS gt PC Xmodem Parameters System Prompts User Prompts 1 User Prompts 2 Custom Service Menus Personal Greetings Selection No Program Company Greetings 2 Select item to be backed up then Press RETURN The size of the file will be displayed To start press RETURN 3 Press RETURN SAVE Start 4 Perform a Standard File Transfer Set the data terminal to the receiving Answer mode Xmodem and specify the backup filename The sp
173. able B 7 and Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Department Dialing Is a speed dialling feature that permits the caller to quickly reach the desired extension by dialling a 1 digit number either during or after the playing of the Department Dialling message See 5 4 2 Department Dialing See Department Dialing in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Recording Menus and Voice Labels in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Department Dialling in GLOSSARY Dialing by Name Allows the caller to reach the intended mailbox extension when the number is not known by entering the first 3 or 4 letters of the mailbox owner s last name The VPS identifies all subscribers with that letter combination and states each name for the caller The caller selects the desired subscriber by entering the appropriate number See Owner Last Name in Table B 4 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES 184 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Direct Mailbox Access DPT Integration Only DPT Integration Allows subscribers to call the VPS and access their mailbox without entering the mailbox number Is the interface data link that permits certain information and command functions to be transmitted between the VPS and PBX The information and comma
174. about 2 rings before answering the call to receive the Caller ID information properly from the PBX This waiting time can be changed by using the WCID command see 7 2 20 Wait for Caller ID WCID in 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Caller ID Note 2 In the documentation for the KX TD816 1232 612 series PBX the Caller ID feature is called CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation Note Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX see 3 1 1 DPT or Inband Signalling you may not be able to utilise some of the features listed above For more information consult your dealer Installation Manual 77 4 2 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION 4 2 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION A maximum of 2 VPS cards for the VPS can be installed at the KX TD500 Follow the procedure below to program the VPS card s for DPT Integration Note The KX TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom It is only available in some countries 1 Assignment of the VPS card to be connected to the VPS Note If the VPS card to which the VPS will be assigned is already installed in the KX TD500 skip the steps a through d If a new VPS card is installed in the KX TD500 follow the steps below a Go to the 1 1 Slot Assignment screen b Assign the slot Card Type to be installed to DLC or DHLC card C Click Apply to save the card type assignment d Set Status to INS Screen output Basic Shel
175. ain Menu Press x twice Deleting a Mailbox The System Manager must delete the mailboxes that are no longer needed When another person accesses the VPS the action is automatically cancelled 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 1 for Mailbox Setup 4 Press 2 for Delete 5 Type the mailbox number 6 Press 1 to delete the mailbox Deleting a Mailbox Password When a password is forgotten the System Manager must delete the password before it can be reassigned by the subscriber 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 1 for the Mailbox Setup 4 Press 3 for Password Reset 5 Type the mailbox number 276 Installation Manual C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES 6 Press 1 to delete the password Installation Manual 277 C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Class of Service defines the set of VPS services available to mailbox owners A maximum of 64 Class of Services can be established Each Class of Service can be set using the telephone COS No 63 and No 64 are assigned to the Message Manager and the System Manager respectively For a complete explanation of COS parameters please see Table B 7 and Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Follow the steps detailed below to set the following Class of Service parameters Personal Greeting Length
176. allation Manual 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Screen output 1 3 Extension Port Assignment pw Tus al fpern e pne por To seem zi me TNI NI Perre C TNI NI Perre in pus Tus al raro zl in poo es rne d me pur Tus gl raro zl NG pus Tr sense sj ne rsedensionronassinmen ml ge ene peer ee 3 Assignment of the extension line to be connected to the VPS 8 Go to the 4 2 Extension Line 1 2 screen b Set Data Line Mode to Yes C Click Apply to save the changed data Note This programme prevents the VM port from being interrupted by Call Waiting Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override features during a call Installation Manual 61 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Screen output 4 2 Extension Line 1 2 hoc ri m mon Lal D a DID Meer if 4 2 Extension Line 1 2 4 Settings for the trunk outside line features Select the appropriate trunk outside line feature settings depending on how your customer plans to use the VPS The VPS answers all incoming outside calls promptly Go to Recommended Settings 1 The VPS answers when the operator does not take the call after a specified number of rings deli Recommended Settings 2 e The VPS answers when an extension user does not take the call after a specified number of rings Go to Recommended Settings 3 62 Installation Manual 3 3
177. ame time b Verify the Operating and Maintenance version being used Sample display DB data PC Empty Version 3 03X Note If you have an older version of the maintenance tool but have the correct ROM version in the system you may still program the KX TD1232 but you must program using the Manager s Extension C Verify the ROM version of the KX TD1232 Example P111GYMMDDB If the software version of the PBX is old you may not be able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information consult your dealer In the example above the underlined digits represent the software production date code year month day 2 Go to the Main Menu Choose System Data Programming BATCH 1 or INTERACTIVE 2 Main Menu 1 System Data Programming BATCH 2 System Data Programming INTERACTIVE 3 Disk File Management 4 DSHS Management 5 DSHS Connect Disconnect 6 Quit Select the number Installation Manual 91 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 3 Choose System from the System Data Programming Main Menu System Data Programming Main Menu 1 Line 2 Station 3 System 4 Toll Restriction 5 LCR 6 Aux Ports 7 Additional Function 8 FWD DND Information Select the number 3 4 Choose Voice Mail Integration from the System Menu System Menu 01 Day Night 11 Phantom 02 Class of Service 12 Operator Manager 0
178. ames record personal greetings set covering extensions record questions for an interview mailbox set the message reception mode set incomplete call handling status set call transfer status enter Personal Group Distribution Lists set the message waiting lamp and set notification by calling 16 Installation Manual 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 SYSTEM BASICS General The VPS is initially configured with approximately 32 h of storage and can be expanded to support 12 ports System Components Main Cabinet RS 232C Connector Earth Terminal Fuse and fuse rating AC Inlet Power Switch Power Indicator Note EIA port is at SELV Inside View of the Main Cabinet Earthing Strap Slots For Optional Port Cards Rotary Switch 3 5 Hard Disk Drive Ferrite Core Power Indicator Installation Manual 17 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS Note Ports 1 12 are at TNV System Components Power Indicator Indicates the system status when flashing the system is off line not ready to receive calls RS 232C Connector Connects an ASCII or VT terminal to the VPS that is necessary to program the system Earth Terminal Should be connected to an earth source with less than 1 Q resistance Fuse Protects the system from power line surges and should only be replace
179. ameter Value Range Description Function Default Alternate 2 5 digits Specifies an extension which requires a different Extension None transfer sequence than normal 1 32 Note The Extension Group List or Logical Extension Numbers cannot be assigned Alternate Extension Delete The system can delete extension numbers from the alternate extension group To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension Delete Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 2 236 Installation Manual B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Alternate Extension Listing Lists all of the extensions registered in the alternate extension group To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension Listing Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 3 B5 2 Custom Service Custom Service is one of 4 incoming call services By assigning a function to each key you can provide callers with a customised key operation service You can establish a maximum of 100 Custom Services with the possible depth of 8 layers The Message Manager should record Custom Service Menus so that callers will know which key to press Note Callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times To access the proper menu for Custom Service Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 2 Custom Service No 1 100
180. ample each key on the keypad there are 12 keys could be assigned to a language Record Custom Service Menu 100 so that the caller can select a language with one touch dialling For example the top menu could be For English press 1 For French press 2 For Spanish press 3 For German press 4 For Japanese press 5 For Chinese press 6 etc of course selections should be recorded in their respective languages Atthe next level create menus in each language for Day Mode For example Custom Service Menu 2 the one for English callers might be For departure information press 1 For arrival information press 2 For reservations press 3 To leave a message press 4 To send a fax press 5 Thus at this level or at an even lower level a caller can be guided in his native tongue to the right person extension the right message taker mailbox or the right device fax machine In parallel create menus in each language for Night Lunch and Break Modes For example Custom Service Menu 16 for Night Mode might be Sorry we are closed for the day Our regular business hours are from 9 am to 5 pm Monday through Friday If you would like to leave a message press 1 now If you would like to send a fax press 2 now Record a similar message for the other languages in each mode 5 2 2 Custom Service Features Time Service 1 5 2 2 Set each day of the week for the correct Day Night Lunch or Break Mode Intercom Paging 1 5
181. anager can deliver the same message to all or specified subscribers mailboxes When delivering a message to specified mailboxes he can check the distribution status of each message Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes Broadcasting Messages The Broadcasting Messages feature allows the System Manager to deliver the same message to all subscribers at the same time The message to broadcast is recorded in the System Manager s mailbox This feature is useful when informing subscribers about the current VPS status such as remaining hard disk capacity requesting that unnecessary messages be erased etc 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to deliver a message 3 Press 1 to record a broadcast message 4 Record a broadcast message and Press 1 5 Press 2 to accept the message recorded Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes Use this feature to deliver the same message to one or more subscriber mailboxes by specifying their numbers 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to deliver a message 3 Press 2 to deliver a message 4 Type the mailbox number of the intended recipient Note Enter by name by Pressing 1 first Use a System Group Distribution List by specifying its number 5 Press 2 to accept the number if it is correct Note Installation Manual 291 C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES Press 2 to add mailbox numbers Press 3 to review the mailing list Press to cancel message transfer 6
182. and sends In addition to the touchtones the following will be displayed the Incoming Call Service Voice Mail Automated Attendant Custom and Interview entered by the caller and the time periods that the ports are enabled Type PUTD The VPS will remain in this mode until PUTD is entered again The default setting of this mode for all ports is OFF PUTD Target Port Cock CR GK k cR ok ok Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting To change the mode from PUTD to OFF Type PUTD again PUTD Target Port 0000 0000 0000 Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting Note means enable for the port 0 means disable for the port To set the mode for only 1 port Type PUTD and the port number PUTD I Target Port 0000 0000 000 Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting Installation Manual 161 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Sample display PUTD Target Port for Debug akk os Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting 1 DTMF 3 1 DTMF 8 1 A Attend 1 DTMF 1 DTMF 6 1 Voice Mail 1 DTMF 1 1 DTMF 0 1 DTMF 1 1 NonSub Svc 1 DTMF 1 DTMF 9 1 Thank you WARNING PUTD is a command originally used when troubleshooting Do not use this command for any other purpose Do not disconnect the RS 232C connection while the PUTD command is enabled This could cause data overflow
183. ank you for calling For overseas travel press 1 For domestic travel press 2 For group travel press 3 122 Installation Manual 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within Custom Service after pressing this key the caller will hear the Department Dialing Menu 5 2 12 Operator Service This service when enabled can be accessed via e Voice Mail Rotary Telephone Service allows rotary callers to reach the General Delivery Mailbox or Operator Service Automated Attendant Dial 0 and your call will go to Operator Service Custom Service The Operator Service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom Service after pressing this key the caller enters Operator Service Operator Service can also be the destination of no DTMF input Operator Service offers callers many chances to reach a human operator Operator Service can be structured as a cascade so that if Operator 1 cannot take the call it goes to Operator 2 If that fails the call goes to Operator 3 If that fails the caller can record a message At each stage there are other options for busy cases and no answer cases Operator Service can be programmed differently for Day Night Lunch or Break Mode Each operator can be assigned a mailbox for message taking Installation Manual 123 5 3 SETTING PORTS 5 3 SETTING PORTS 5 3 1 Table 5 5 124 Port Service Menu Access the Port Service Menu throu
184. appear when connecting to another type of PBX Connect a KX TD series PBX and set the PBX type by using Quick Setup see Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM The cabling between the PBX extension ports and the VPS is not 4 wire or is improperly connected Confirm the cabling is connected as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION The PBX is a KX TD series but does not have the proper level of software required to support DPT Integration Consult your dealer or use Inband Integration under hardware settings Installation Manual 83 4 2 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION Table 4 2 Cause Remedy The PBX is not programmed properly to support Do required integration DPT Integration programming as described in this chapter 10 Start up completed a The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start up has been successful The delay varies according to the system s condition b ON LINE MODE is displayed c System prompt gt is displayed on the screen To enter system administration Press ENTER All parameters can be set through the menu driven programme When the System Administrator starts operation the system asks for the terminal type By choosing VT100 2 all parameters can be set through the menu driven programme Please Select Your Terminal Type 1 ASCIT TERMINAL 2 VT100 Please Enter the Number Please Enter the Nu
185. as message s and will have a chance to listen to the message s e Ifthe destination device is a beeper pager the subscriber will be notified when he has message s If the beeper pager has a display it is possible to send to it a callback number The caller can enter the callback number when he leaves a message If he does not enter a callback number either the System Callback No or the caller s number if it is received through a telephone company s Caller ID service will be sent instead To access the proper menu for Message Waiting Notification follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No 2 Device No 1 2 or 3 Notification Setting Device 1 2 or 3 Table B 5 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Dial Number Up to 32 digits Assigns a telephone or beeper pager number to consisting of 1 9 Device 1 2 or 3 The subscriber can also specify the 0 X dial number from his telephone P T M X P Pause None T Dial Tone Detection M Dial Mode Switching Code Touchtone to Pulse or Pulse to Touchtone X Callback Number Entry Code 1 9 0 X Dial Codes Note The callback number entry code X must be included in the number to be called if the Beeper Callback No Entry Mode is enabled through COS and Type of Device is set to Beeper The proper number of Pauses must be inserted before the callback entry code Type of Device 1 Te
186. as an operator backup or C to only answer calls not answered by user extensions Recommended outside CO line feature settings Installation Manual 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs a If the VPS is answering all incoming calls Outside CO Line Mode Use System Programmes 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group The KX TA series will allow incoming outside calls to hunt only if the outside CO lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt group Lines programmed as Normal do not hunt b If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator Operator Backup Flexible Ringing Assignment For each outside CO line use System Programmes 408 Day Mode 409 Night Mode and 410 Lunch Mode to enable ringing at the operator s extension jack Delayed Ringing Assignment To give the operator time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each extension connected to the VPS Use System Programmes 411 Day Mode 412 Night Mode and 413 Lunch Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each outside CO line to Normal Use System Programmes 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode and 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter C If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions KX TA se
187. at the tone 490 491 Record the prompt at the tone 491 492 Record the question at the tone 492 334 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 493 Record the recipient s name at the 493 tone 494 Record your name at the tone 494 495 Recording accepted 495 496 Remote Call Forward to CO disabled 496 497 Remote Call Forward to CO enabled 497 498 Returning to top menu automated 498 attendant service disabled 499 Returning to top menu automated 499 attendant service enabled 500 right away 185 500 501 SATURDAY 501 502 Saved message retention time is 502 85 day 503 Saved message retention time is 503 unlimited 504 SECOND 504 505 Second telephone number is 505 telephone number 506 Second telephone number is not 506 assigned 507 seconds 507 16 507 457 507 508 Selection Menu 508 509 Selection menu erased 509 510 Selection menu is selection menu 510 511 Sending report now to terminal or 511 printer connected to RS 232C port 512 SEPTEMBER 512 513 Set the answer length using the 513 following options For 4 seconds press 1 For 8 seconds press 2 For 16 seconds press 3 For 32 seconds press 4 514 SEVEN 514 515 SEVEN HOUR 515 Installation Manual 335 D9 LIS
188. at you set the password to 10 characters for maximum protection against hackers Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons Please change the password periodically for instructions see 7 2 3 Set Password PASS in 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Installation Manual 111 5 1 STARTING UP To go to the next screen without assigning the password Press ENTER 7 Date and Time Setting Screen output Quick Setup Time Setting Current time is 3 04 PM Enter new time HH MM AM PM Current date is MON 1 JAN 2001 Enter new date DD MM YY Enter the time hour minute as 2 digits comma and A or P and date day month and year in 2 digits To go to the next screen Press ENTER 8 Activating the Quick Setup Screen output Quick Setup Setup To set up the mailbox and restart select Yes To cancel and exit select No 1 Yes 2 No To activate the Quick Setup Press 1 and Press ENTER Note To cancel the Quick Setup Press 2 and Press ENTER This cancels all changes made up to this point The VPS begins to change system programming data Screen output Quick Setup To set up the mailbox and restart select Yes To cancel and exit select No 1 Yes 2 No Setup 998 Then CARD TEST SYSTEM SETUP and 1 2 3 appear on the screen one by one Screen output CARD TEST SYSTEM SETUP 1 2333 112 Installation Manual
189. ate Additional comments can be added to this message Message Waiting Lamp Light on proprietary telephones that lights when there are messages in the mailbox Message Waiting Notification The VPS can notify subscribers and the Message Manager when they have received messages if authorised by the System Administrator or the System Manager There are 3 notification methods 1 by the Message Waiting Lamp 2 by a telephone or 3 by a beeper pager Multilingual Selection Menu The Message Manager is responsible for recording this menu Allows callers to choose the language they want System User 1 or User 2 prompts when they call the VPS Non Subscriber A caller to the VPS who does not own a mailbox Notification Method See Message Waiting Notification Operator Up to 3 destinations can be assigned as operators This is the extension that receives calls when the calling party is on a rotary phone or dials 0 Owner s Name After a subscriber records her name the VPS announces her name during transfers Intercom Paging and confirmation of Dialling by Name Independent of this recording is registration of name by System Administrator This allows callers to dial parties by name Dialling by Name rather than by number For example a caller can dial S M I T Smith rather than Smith s mailbox number which can be hard to remember Password A combination of numbers selected by the subscriber to protect access to her mailb
190. ation Examples DPT Integration 45 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING SETTING 288 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING 286 Checking Mailbox Distribution 292 Checking Operation 120 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS 289 Circuit Condition Display LMON 160 Class of service COS 182 Class of Service Setting 216 Clearing the Reports 290 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 96 Company greeting 138 183 288 Company Greetings Enter 6 998 5 1 138 Company name 183 374 Installation Manual Company s Telephone Number 259 Connecting the RS 232C Cable 46 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SE RIES PBXs 57 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 86 Connecting to the PBX 43 Connection Examples 24 CONNECTIONS 43 Connections modular plug 43 Connections PBX 43 Connections port cards 44 COS Class of Service Assignments 164 COS Nos 63 amp 64 for Managers 222 Covering extension 183 Creating and Editing a Mailbox 275 Custom Service 183 237 Custom Service Features 115 Custom Service Greetings Enter 6 998 5 4 139 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR 157 Custom Service Programming 116 Custom Service Report CREP 156 Custom Service Setting Example 114 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX 302 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 105 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX 293 Customising User Prompts Enter 6 998 5 6 139 D Data Terminal
191. ault Operators 2 and 3 For KX TD500 KX TD816 KX TD1232 and KX TD612 Operators 2 and 3 can be assigned to a floating number that is assigned to a ring group Return to Program Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Menu Enter The Number 2 Program Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Operator s Parameters Menu 1 Day Mode 2 Night Mode 3 Lunch Mode 4 Break Mode SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY 1 Operator 1 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY Enter the data using the table below as a guide The table below is for Operator 1 as an example Please refer to it for Operators 2 and 3 Table 5 6 Description Value Range Description Function Default Operator 1 Disable Enables or disables the Operator Service feature Service 2 Enable Note Enable e All non touchtone input calls in Automated Attendant Service will be transferred to the General Delivery Mailbox when the Operator Service is disabled Installation Manual 127 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS Table 5 6 128 Description Value Range Default Description Function Operator s Extension Operator s Mailbox No 1 5 Digits 0 2 5 Digits 998 Specifies the extension number for Operator 1 Notes The default setting 0 cannot be used with the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature and the Remote Call Forwarding Set feature When using these features you must assign the e
192. ax machines can be assigned using this feature Outside callers can also reach the fax machine via Custom Service selection if programmed A special mailbox can be assigned to the Fax Manager In this way the VPS can notify the Fax Manager of the status of faxes See External Message Delivery Service in this Table See External Delivery Message External Message Delivery List and External Message Delivery Redial in GLOSSARY See 3 7 Checking and Setting External Message Delivery Status in the Subscriber s Guide See Fax Management 1 5 7 8 in 5 2 2 Custom Service Features See 7 3 11 Fax Call Report See 7 3 12 Fax Call Statistics Clear See Other Parameters Fax Management in B6 7 Other Parameters Group Distribution List Personal Allows a subscriber to simultaneously send a message to several mailboxes using a Group Distribution List This list is established by the subscriber Each subscriber can maintain a maximum of 4 lists with up to 20 entries on each list See Group Distribution List System in this Table See Personal Group Distribution List in GLOSSARY See 4 5 Personal Group Distribution Lists in the Subscriber s Guide See 4 6 Deleting Group Distribution Members in the Subscriber s Guide See 4 7 Deleting Group Distribution List Names in the Subscriber s Guide Group Distribution List System Allows a subscriber to send a message to several mai
193. b The current prompt mode plays Press 1 2 3 or 4 to choose the desired mode 1 System Prompt e 2 User 1 Prompt 3 User 2 Prompt 4 Selective Prompt C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 5 to accept it Return to Step 25a above Auto Forwarding 26 8 The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable If Auto Forwarding is enabled go to Step 26b below b The current forwarding destination mailbox number plays Press 1 to change the mailbox number C Type the mailbox number d Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it e The current delay time is played Press 1 to change the setting The delay time is the period of time that the VPS must wait before forwarding messages For example enter 1154 to set the delay time to 1 h 15 min 30 to set 30 min f Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it g The current forwarding mode is played Press 1 to change the setting copy or move h Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Return to Step 26a above Installation Manual 283 C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK 284 The system clock can be set directly from the telephone It is important to set the exact time because Message Waiting Notification External Message Delivery redialling and rescheduling of External Message Delivery and Automatic Message Deletion are all scheduled using
194. ble Night Service can be assigned within Day Service parameters Night Service starts when Day Service ends and ends when Day Service starts There are 3 periods for Break Service Break 1 Service Break 2 Service and Break 3 Service You can have different Time Service settings for each Time Group 1 8 In each Time Service period the parameters for Port Service Trunk Group Service and Operator s Parameters can be specified differently Note Break Service and Lunch Service are only available when they are in Day Service period If Break 3 Service is out of Day Service period for example Break 3 Service does not work To access the proper menu for Time Group Service Time Service for the selected time group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 2 Time Group No 1 8 Time Service Time Group 1 8 Day Service To access the proper menu for Day Service for the selected time group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 2 Time Group No 1 8 1 Table B 21 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mon 1 12 h Specifies the Start and End times of the Day Service Start End 00 59 min AM PM a m p m Day Mode Day Mode in effect around the clock 24 h Sun D Day Mode _ Night Mode Night Mode in effect around the clock 24 h Start End N Night Mode 9 00 AM 5 00 PM 246 Installation Manual B6 SYSTE
195. ble with DPT interface x 6 Data Port RS 232C interface port Operating Temperature Please see Table 2 1 Hard Disk Drive Usage Environment in 2 1 3 Environmental Requirements Operating Relative Humidity Please see Table 2 1 Hard Disk Drive Usage Environment in 2 1 3 Environmental Requirements Power Source 110 V to 240 V AC 50 Hz 60 Hz Power Consumption Approximately 30 W Dimensions H x W x D 470 mm x 335 mm x 110 mm Mass Weight Approximately 5 0 kg no port expansion card installed at the factory Installation Manual 175 7 5 SPECIFICATIONS 176 Installation Manual Appendix A SYSTEM FEATURES Installation Manual 177 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES A1 SYSTEM FEATURES The Voice Processing System has many features that are available to the System Administrator the System Manager and or System Subscribers The Table A 1 lists and briefly describes each key VPS system feature In addition references to specific sections of this manual and the Subscriber s Guide are provided in the references column that pertains to each feature listed The specific procedure steps required to initiate access or utilise each feature are detailed in these references Note Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX you may not be able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information consult your
196. call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not Coverage 2 Leave answered within the time period set by the Operator No Mode Message Answer Time mode 3 Disconnect Message 4 Next Operator 1 Caller Select Allows the caller to leave a message or Caller Select call another extension In some cases a call to another extension is not available For more information see the Note on Caller Select in Table 5 6 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters 2 Leave Message Instructs the caller to leave a message in Operator 1 s mailbox 3 Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling 4 Next Operator Transfers the caller to Operator 2 Message 1 3 times Specifies the number of times the VPS will play the Repeat Cycle 3 Automated Attendant top menu Note Extension Call Forwarding to the VPS can override the operator call coverage settings depending on the timing parameters of the PBX and VPS Even if the operator call coverage parameters are set to Next Operator on Busy No Answer the call may go to the VPS if the Operator has set the call forwarding to the VPS Installation Manual B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table B 13 Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 2 Operator 2
197. cally delete this recording The two way conversation may be saved in the mailbox if the PBX allows the conversation to be recorded If set to No the recording will be automatically saved Note The Live Call Screening feature is available if DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TD series telephone system Direct Mailbox 1 Yes If set to Yes a subscriber is able to directly enter Access 2 No Subscriber Service This is accomplished by calling a Yes VPS extension directly from the subscriber s extension The Subscriber Service Access Code X and mailbox number need not be dialled Password entry may be required if specified beforehand Note The Direct Mailbox Access feature is available if DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TD series telephone system Intercom 1 17 Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to Paging Group Group 1 the subscriber If set to 17 the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all groups Note The Intercom Paging feature is available if DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TD series telephone system Installation Manual B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table B 7 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language used for voice prompts played for 2 User 1 the subscriber during a
198. cation from an SLT in 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration See 7 2 13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times MWL See MWL Notification for Unreceived Message in Table B 7 and Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION See Message Waiting Lamp in GLOSSARY See 4 8 Message Waiting Notification in the Subscriber s Guide Multilingual Service Permits up to 3 languages to be used for prompt options If the Selective mode is selected callers are able to choose their desired language See Incoming Call Service Prompt in Table 5 5 in 5 3 1 Port Service Menu See System User 1 User 2 Selection Number in Table B 26 in B6 5 Prompt Setting See Recording Menus and Voice Labels and Recording User Prompts in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Multilingual Selection Menu in GLOSSARY Installation Manual 195 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES No Answer Specifies how the calls will be handled when See No Answer Coverage Coverage Mode Operator 1 2 and or 3 do not answer them within the specified Operator No Answer Time There are 4 options Caller Select caller may leave a message or call another extension Leave Message
199. ce and Caller ID Call Routing When setting specific day s as holiday s you have the following 2 options The first option is to specify a single day on which to enable the Holiday Service setting For example you can specify New Year s Day as a holiday The second option is to specify a range of days to enable the Holiday Service setting on all days within the specified range For example you can specify the start and the end dates of your Christmas holiday Note Holidays cannot overlap For example if you have set Dec 22nd to Jan 6th as holidays you cannot set Jan 1st as a holiday To provide a special message to callers on a holiday for example Today is New Year s Day and our office is closed If you wish to record a message please press 1 now you can create a Custom Service menu Use this setting to direct calls to this Custom Service on Jan 1st Use foreign languages where appropriate To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 Holiday Setting Enter To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting Enter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 1 Holiday No 1 20 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Name of Up to 16 characters For reference Any alphanumeric character and Holiday None space and can be used 248 Installat
200. change User Prompt 1 or Press 2 to change User Prompt 2 Press 1 to change specified prompts or Press 2 to change all prompts Enter the Prompt Number you want to change Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process Installation Manual 139 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 Note Prompt 645 The system prompt is This is the General Delivery Mailbox Youcan record User Prompt 1 or User Prompt 2 as Thank you for calling ABC company We are currently closed however if you leave your name and phone number we will return your call as quickly as possible 140 Installation Manual 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES The following steps complete the basic installation of the VPS For each mailbox on the system a No Answer Busy and After Hours Greetings should be recorded as well as the Owner s Name and Password Please follow the steps below to set up the mailboxes accordingly 6 2 1 Recording Personal Greetings The No Answer Greeting plays whenever the caller enters your mailbox during business hours The Busy Greeting plays when the caller is told your line is busy and then elects to leave a message in your mailbox The After Hours Greeting plays whenever the caller enters your mailbox when the VPS is in Night Mode 1 Dial the Extension Number of the VPS 2 When the VPS answers Press
201. cordable Installation Manual Remote Call Forwarding Set Available with the KX TD500 only A subscriber and the Message Manager can program her extension from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside telephone There are 6 forwarding settings available 1 Forward All Calls 2 Forward Busy Calls 3 Forward No Answer Calls 4 Forward Busy or No Answer Calls 5 Forward to a CO Line 6 Forward Cancel See Remote Call Forward to CO Remote Call Forward to CO Available with the KX TD500 only Allows the System Administrator to program Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 as the destination to which the callers are forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding is set to an outside CO line This feature must be enabled in the COS Class of Service setting to be utilised See Remote Call Forwarding Set Review Plays back a message Rewind Replays the previous 4 seconds of a message Rotary Telephone A telephone capable of pulse dial only Callers using a rotary telephone will be automatically forwarded to the operator or the General Delivery Mailbox SAVE One of the utility commands that is used to save VPS data to a personal computer Scanning Messages Allows the subscriber to listen to only the first 4 s of each message Another method is to press 2 while listening to a message this instructs the VPS to skip to the next message Service Mode The S
202. corded Call the VPS and Press 6 and the Interview Mailbox Number All your questions should be played Note When using the Custom Service setting 1 digit can be assigned to go to the mailbox of the Interview Service The mailbox owner s message waiting lamp will go on for normal Voice Mail messages and for message left in the separate interview mailbox 5 2 10 Automated Attendant Automated Attendant service answers incoming calls and waits for the caller to input an extension number It transfers the caller to the appropriate extension Callers can access Automated Attendant Service by e Automated Attendant Port This service can be programmed independently for any or all ports of the VPS Callers reaching these ports access Automated Attendant service Service Access Command A caller can switch to Automated Attendant service by dialling 8 during a call e Via Custom Service The call transfer service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom Service After pressing this key the caller enters Automated Attendant Service Note When the VPS calls an extension the VPS waits for a reply This waiting time is established by Call Transfer No Answer Time in Table B 29 B6 7 Other Parameters 5 2 11 Department Dialing Service Callers can access extensions by pressing a key 1 through 9 one touch dialling As a guide for the caller the Message Manager should record the Department Dialing Menu for example Th
203. country Custom Service is a truly powerful feature Please see Custom Service in Appendix A1 SYSTEM FEATURES for more details Notes e inthis manual there may be PBX model numbers which are not available in your country nthis manual the suffix of each model number is omitted e Throughout this manual the term he or she his or her may be used In order to improve readability rather than continually use he she we have only used one of these terms The term he or she should be taken as being interchangeable This product is only for connection behind a suitable PBX and should not be connected directly to the network This product complies with the essential requirements of the Directive 1999 5 EC Radio and telecommunications terminal equipment directive A copy of the manufacturers declaration of conformity to the essential requirements of the R amp TTE directive is available at the following web address http doc panasonic tc de Installation Manual Important Information SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Follow all product warnings cautions and instructions Handle the unit carefully Do not drop or otherwise expose the unit to physical shock If the unit malfunctions disconnect the unit from the telephone line and check the line by reconnecting the telephone If the telephone operates properly have the VPS repaired by a qualified service technician Install the unit so that the power cord is not obstructed in any way Do not co
204. ction Default No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not Coverage 2 Leave Message answered within the time period set by the Mode 3 Disconnect Message Operator No Answer Time mode S Next Oparalor 1 Caller Select Allows the caller to leave a Caller Select message or call another extension 2 Leave Message Instructs the caller to leave a message in Operator 1 s mailbox 3 Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling 4 Next Operator Transfers the caller to Operator 2 Message 1 3 Times Specifies the number of times that the VPS will play Repeat Cycle 3 the Automated Attendant top menu Note In the following cases the caller cannot select He is directed to Operator 1 s mailbox when he is transferred to the operator but the operator does not answer 1 No input to Automated Attendant 2 No input to Custom Service menu when No DTMF Operation is set to C Operator in Table B 16 in B5 2 Custom Service 3 No input to Voice Mail service when Rotary Telephone Call Coverage is set to Operator Extension in Table B 33 in B6 7 Other Parameters Installation Manual 129 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES 5 5 1 Mailbox Setting Menu Access the Mailbox Setting Menu through the following sequence System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 1 Program Enter The Number 1 Mailbox Sett
205. ctly set in System Programme 126 The programming on the KX TD500 is correctly set in the 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment screen 8 Set up Class of Service COS for each user Customise voice prompts if necessary see Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 9 Perform Administrative Programming through a personal computer see Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE CAUTION Do not turn the power off while the VPS is activated so as not to cause malfunction To turn the power off after installing the VPS unplug the power cord from the VPS a few minutes after disconnecting all extension wire s Installation Manual 2 6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS KX TVP102 OR KX TVP204 2 6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS KX TVP102 OR KX TVP204 2 6 1 General Port Expansion Cards One KX TVP102 card can support 2 VPS ports under either Inband or DPT Integration One KX TVP204 card can support 4 VPS ports under DPT Integration Expansion Capabilities of the VPS The VPS can handle up to 12 ports simultaneously when 3 KX TVP204 port cards are installed The VPS has no port expansion card installed at the factory the cards must be purchased separately CAUTION Before installing an optional port card it is very important that the power to the unit be turned off Before beginning the actual installation and touching the card or any circuitry within the unit discharge any static electricity from yo
206. d will appear on the screen when the file has been saved Continue saving the other items as needed It is not necessary to save the Program or System Prompts because they are resident on the hard drive and cannot be altered We do recommend all other data be saved including User Prompt 1 and User Prompt 2 if they have been recorded Notes Recorded caller names for the Caller Name Announcement System Personal cannot be saved by the above procedure only Caller ID numbers can be saved Installation Manual 143 6 3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM When the saved Caller ID numbers are loaded using LOAD command the following things should be done For System Caller Name Announcement the Message Manager re records caller names see Recording System Caller Names in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES For Personal Caller Name Announcement subscribers re record caller names see 4 12 Personal Caller Name Announcement in the Subscriber s Guide User Prompt files are very large and can take several hours to save Store saved files in a safe area 144 Installation Manual Section 7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Installation Manual 145 7 1 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM 7 1 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM Initialising the system clears all voice data except user prompts and returns all system parameters to their default settings Throughout this section menu selections are indicated as System Administration Top Menu Selection Numbe
207. d in a subscriber s mailbox should be set between 5 and 100 messages by the System Administrator or the System Manager Mailbox Capacity recording time The total length of time for messages in a subscriber s mailbox should be set between 5 and 100 min or unlimited length by the System Administrator or the System Manager Mailbox Extension Normally the same number as the telephone extension number Mailbox Management Allows a subscriber to alter the setting for personal mailboxes Menu A list of choices from which the user can select by using the telephone keypad or the keys from a personal computer Message Manager Mailbox 98 998 9998 or 99998 The person who takes care of the General Delivery Mailbox and records the Company Greetings Company Name Department Dialling Menu Custom Service Menus Voice Labels User Prompts User 1 User 2 Multilingual Selection Menu and System Caller Names Message Retention Time New Message Retention Time the length of time the VPS will store a new unplayed message before deleting the message Saved Message Retention Time the length of time the VPS will store an old played message before deleting the message Message Retrieval Order The order in which the subscriber retrieves messages Last In First Out LIFO or First In First Out FIFO Installation Manual Message Transfer Allows a subscriber to re route a message to another mailbox unless the message was marked priv
208. d with the same type Please see the fuse socket on the cabinet for the value of the fuse AC Inlet Connects the power cable to an AC outlet dedicated to the VPS Power Switch Starts the system and begins the self test SAFETY PRECAUTION When making any connections or removing the cover be sure the power switch is switched off Earthing Strap Protects the printed circuit board from static electricity Earth SAFETY PRECAUTION Discharge any body static by touching the metal bar Optional Port Cards The following types of port cards can be installed in the VPS Four digital port expansion cards KX TVP204 Two digital analogue port expansion cards KX TVP102 KX TVP102 consists of the following 2 cards Telephone line interface card Digital processor DSP card The telephone line interface transmits and receives analogue and digital signals to and from the telephone line The analogue input signal is digitised at a sampling rate of 8 kHz to create a 16 bit digital signal The DSP has the following features e Voice Compression and Decompression e Touchtone Detection e Touchtone Generation Call Progress Tone Detection KX TVP204 consists of a telephone line interface and a DSP The telephone interface of the 18 Installation Manual 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS Table 1 1 KX TVP204 transmits and receives ONLY digital signals with a Panasonic KX TD Digital PBX The DSP has the same features as the KX TVP102 MO
209. desired extension mailbox or next menu This tree should include all available caller options and cannot be deeper than 8 layers Moreover callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times Discuss available options with the customer before programming the system Company Greeting Custom Service 100 Main Greeting all ports day Custom 2 Custom 3 Transfer Transfer Extension List Extension List to Service to Orders 34 New Cars Used Cars The top of the tree should include what callers will hear when they are first connected to the VPS Then create a branch for each option until each caller option has been documented Next fill in each box with the action that it represents so you can easily remember what action corresponds to each keystroke 114 Installation Manual 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS Remember that it is possible and often necessary to have 1 custom service lead to another custom service For example if someone presses 1 for sales you might want another menu to say for new car sales press 1 for used car sales press 2 This way callers are routed directly to the person best suited to handle them Sample Custom Service for Foreign Languages If you are an airline or travel agency your callers might not be fluent in English You can easily accommodate several languages with Custom Service For ex
210. difiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 62 Class of service number is number 62 643 62 644 62 63 Company greeting number number 63 178 64 Company greeting number is 64 number 65 Company name name 65 66 Company name erased 66 67 Counts cleared 67 68 Covering extension is extension 68 number 69 Covering extension not assigned 69 70 Covering extension transfer disabled 70 71 Covering extension transfer enabled 71 72 Current company greeting setting is 72 disabled 738 Current company greeting setting is 73 number number 74 Current company greeting setting is 74 System Greeting 75 Current service mode for Time Group 75 312 number number 75 814 75 316 75 315 75 313 75 317 76 Custom service menu 76 76 178 77 Custom service number number 77 78 Date is date 78 79 Day mode first operator s extension is 79 extension number 80 Day mode first operator s extension is 80 not assigned 81 Day mode second operator s 81 extension is extension number Installation Manual 317 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 82 Day mode second operator s 82 extension is not assigned 83 Day mode third operator s extension 83 is extension numbe
211. ds to appropriate extensions takes and stores messages and notifies subscribers when messages are left Subscribers may send and transfer messages to other subscribers within the system The VPS is easy to use helping callers through the system with step by step voice prompts Unlike handwritten messages or those left with answering services VPS messages are confidential they are stored in a mailbox and retrieved only with the subscriber s password Other advantages of the VPS are clarity and accuracy which are commonly lacking with written messages The messages come directly from the caller in the caller s own voice To further ensure accuracy the system allows the sender to correct or change messages before saving them Messages can be erased or transferred by the recipient 1 1 2 Basic Operations 14 Greeting Callers The VPS greets callers with a pre recorded message that includes directions for leaving and editing messages The VPS can list single digit numbers for each available extension or mailbox Callers who know the extension of the person they wish to reach may dial the extension number at any time Callers with rotary phones are transferred to a pre programmed destination which is often an operator or the General Delivery Mailbox to leave a message Sending Messages Callers can review and edit messages before leaving them in a mailbox Subscribers can send messages to an individual or to several mailboxes at once The
212. e System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 1 Program Enter The Number 4 Service Setting Enter The Number 1 Automated Attendant Program Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Menu 1 Department Dialing 2 Operator s Parameters 3 Alternate Extension 5 4 2 Department Dialing Department Dialing numbers 1 9 represent department extensions the VPS will provide these numbers to the caller in the initial list of prompts Return to Program Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Menu Enter The Number 1 Program Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Department Dialing Menu 1 Department Dialing No 2 Department Dialing No 3 CaN ANAWN 126 Installation Manual Department Dialing No 1 Department Dialing No 4 Department Dialing No 5 Department Dialing No 6 Department Dialing No 7 Department Dialing No 8 Department Dialing No 9 202 204 215 236 207 208 209 210 211 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters If you enable operator service you must set the following parameters Operator s Extension and Mailbox Number Coverage Modes and Message Repeat Cycle Operator 1 The default is set at 0 which coincides with the operator of the PBX When a caller tries to leave a message for Operator 1 the message will automatically go to the General Delivery Mailbox GDM by def
213. e B 12 in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters Connected terminal RS 232C port does not operate Improper connection Improper setting of the RS 232C parameters Be sure you are using a null modem cable see 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION The terminal and VPS should have the same parameter settings for Baud Rate Word Bit Length Parity and Stop Bit Length see B7 1 RS 232C Parameters Unable to reconnect when the line is busy Improper setting of the busy signal reconnection procedure Re adjust the busy signal reconnection procedure to that of the connected PBX see Reconnect Sequence on Busy in Table B 42 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Unable to make a no response reconnection Improper setting of the no response reconnection procedure Re adjust the no response reconnection procedure to that of the connected PBX see Reconnect Sequence on No Answer in Table B 42 B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Unable to generate a call waiting tone from the VPS Improper setting of sequence Adjust the Call Waiting sequence to that of the connected PBX see Call Waiting Sequence in Table B 42 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Unable to make Intercom Paging to groups Improper setting of the Intercom Paging access code Adjust the Intercom Paging access code to that of the connected PBX see Paging Code for Group 1 16 and Paging Code for All Groups in Tabl
214. e B 34 in B6 7 Other Parameters 174 Installation Manual 7 5 SPECIFICATIONS 7 5 SPECIFICATIONS Table 7 6 Port Cards KX TVP204 4 digital port expansion card and KX TVP102 Dialling Method Touchtone Pulse 10 20 pps Flash Recall Time 100 ms 300 ms 600 ms 900 ms programmable CPC Detection None 6 5 ms 150 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms programmable Type of Line Loop start minimum Loop Current 20 mA minimum Line Voltage 7 V DC minimum Ringing Voltage 40 V AC Extension Numbering 2 to 5 digits programmable Pause Time 1 sto 9 s programmable Message Waiting Lamp Programmable Touchtone sequence Main CPU 16 bit microprocessor Hard Disk Capacity Approximately 32 h Number of Mailboxes Maximum 1024 including System Manager and Message Manager mailboxes Number of Messages Maximum 100 per mailbox programmable Personal Greeting Message Length 8 s to 60 s programmable Message Retention Time 1 to 30 days or unlimited programmable Maximum Message Length 1 min to 6 min or unlimited length programmable Reports Mailbox Assignment COS Class of Service Assignment System Service Report Call Account Report Port Usage Report Disk Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report FAX Call Report Connections Telephone Line In case of Inband 2 conductor cable x 6 In case of DPT 4 conductor ca
215. e Holiday 1 12 Service setting is activated The unspecified ports provide the usual incoming call service Note Pressing back space will clear the parameter The maximum number of ports depends on the VPS model Trunk Affected Trunk No Specifies the trunk outside line number on which the 1 48 Holiday Service setting is activated The unspecified trunks outside lines provide the usual incoming call service Note Pressing back space will clear the parameter Installation Manual 249 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Holiday Setting Delete Cancels the Holiday Service Setting by specifying a holiday number 1 20 To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting Delete follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 2 Holiday Setting Listing Displays all of the specified holiday names and dates To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting Listing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 3 B6 4 Daylight Saving Time DST Adjusts the internal clock of the VPS to the starting and ending date of daylight saving time To access the proper menu for Daylight Saving Time follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 4 Table B 25 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Start Date End DD Day Specifies the starting and ending dates of daylight Date MM
216. e Mail hunt group CO Line Setting CO 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 CPC Detection Mode 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 Out Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable DIL 1 1 EXT No Day Night EXT 265 EXT 265 EXT 265 EXT 265 EXT 265 _EXT 265 EXT 265 _EXT 265 EXT 265 _EXT 265 EXT 265 EXT 265 EXT 265 _EXT 265 EXT 265 _EXT 265 EXT 265 _EXT 265 EXT 265 _EXT 265 EXT 265 EXT 265 EXT 265 EXT 265 DIL Service Day Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Night Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 7 Follow steps 5 11 in 4 3 1 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager s Extension Installation Manual 93 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 94 The required programming is now complete and the VPS and KX TD1232 should be able to communicate through DPT Integration We recommend that the KX TD1232 system has any optional extension cards installed and telephones connected before starting the VPS When running the Quick Setup command Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM from the VPS the PBX transmit
217. e VPS if the dialled extension has the Do Not Disturb feature enabled Answer 5 Sent to the VPS when the called extension answers the call Forward to VM Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a Ringing 6 voice mail port and that voice mail port is available to accept the call Forward to VM Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a Busy 7 voice mail port and that voice mail port is not available to accept the call Forward to Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to Other 8 another non Voice Mail extension Extension Confirmation 9 Sent to the VPS when it successfully dialled a Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off Code Disconnect 9 Sent to the VPS when the other party goes on hook Note Default values in the above table vary depending on the settings of PBX type and Inband Integration PBX Interface Parameters Table B 44 KX T series Other TD816 Parameter Manufacturers 7308 T616 _ 232 rog T336 1232 TD500 TA series TD612 Ringback N A N A N A 1 A1 A1 1 1 Busy N A N A N A 2 B1 B1 2 2 Reorder N A N A N A 3 B2 B2 3 3 DND N A N A N A 4 B3 B3 4 4 Answer N A N A N A 5 A2 A2 5 5 Forward to VM N A N A N A 6 C1 C1 6 6 Ringing 270 Installation Manual B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Table B 44 KX T series Other Parameter TD816 Manufacturers 1308 T616 _ 1292 196 T33
218. e Waiting Notification on proprietary multi line sets message waiting lamp accessed by dialling on off codes If the PBX does not have these features VPS operation will be limited See 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration You will find the following information about each feature listed e Description e Limitations of the system without the feature Tests to determine whether the PBX has the feature VOICE MAIL The recommended Panasonic PBX systems have Follow on ID and Inband Integration When callers are transferred to an extension that is forwarded to Voice Mail Follow on ID sends callers directly to the mailbox Without Follow on ID the caller would have to re enter the mailbox number when connected to Voice Mail Touchtone Integration enables the VPS to recognise the current state of the call and improve its call handling performance When enabled the PBX informs the VPS of the status of the call busy answered ringing etc by sending a code with touchtones before sending the normal 20 Installation Manual 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS 1 3 4 1 3 5 Table 1 2 1 3 6 call progress tones For example when a caller hangs up before making a selection the PBX sends 9 to the VPS port that answered This informs the VPS that the caller has hung up Upon receiving these digits the VPS goes on hook and is ready to handle another call DPT Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a Panasonic KX TD series PBX
219. e e e e e e e e e e FAX 1 Main facsimile machine FAX 2 Alternate facsimile machine connect Call was answered by the facsimile machine no ans No Answer 7 3 12 Fax Call Statistics Clear The Fax Call Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again To clear the Fax Call Statistics Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 4 170 Installation Manual 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS System Reports System Report Clear Fax Call Report Clear May I clear fax call report data Y N Type Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Fax Call Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding Installation Manual 171 7 4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 7 4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Table 7 5 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Nothing is heard from the VPS when accessing the VPS Improper connection of jacks Bad connection with PBX Confirm that you are using the correct extension number for the VPS Ask your System Administrator Check if the jacks of the VPS are connected to the proper jacks of the PBX see in 1 4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION Check the 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment screen of the KX TD500 or System Programme 126 of other KX TD series telephone systems to see if the programming agrees with the actual connection Unable to utilise some of the DPT I
220. e handset The Private Mode alerts by tone and requires the telephone handset to be lifted before the message can be monitored Two way communication is established by pressing the feature button See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION See 4 4 1 Live Call Screening LCS Programming See 4 4 2 Live Call Screening Password Assignment See 4 4 3 Live Call Screening Password Cancelling See 4 4 4 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via System Programming See 4 4 5 Live Call Screening Private Hands Free Mode Assignment via Station Programming See 4 4 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming See 4 4 7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station Programming See 4 4 8 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station Programming See 4 4 13 Live Call Screening Activation See 4 4 14 Live Call Screening Password Control See Message Cancel for Live Call Screening in Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Live Call Screening in GLOSSARY See 4 13 Live Call Screening in the Subscriber s Guide Installation Manual 191 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Logical Extension All Calls Transfer to Mailbox Is an extension that always receives calls directly into its mailbox This feature is used by subscribers t
221. e jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software i e HyperTerminal Procomm Plus Smartcom Communication Parameters 9600 8 Bit None 1 Turn the power switch off at the VPS and set the Rotary Switch to position 5 Only perform this step when initially setting up the system CAUTION Setting the Rotary Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages except User 1 and User 2 prompts 9 Turn the power switch back on at the VPS and wait approximately 7 8 min while the system initialises Before starting the VPS make sure all installation and line connections have been done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing After turning the power on the system starts up in the following sequence e The Power Indicator light goes on The Power Indicator light begins to flash e CARD TEST is displayed on the screen e SYSTEM SETUP is displayed Screen output CARD TEST SYSTEM SETUP 1 2 3 4 S5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 e The VPS tests the CPU board the hard disk drive and the CO cards as SYSTEM SETUP is displayed e Active ports are displayed on the screen Screen output ActiveCOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 ON LINE
222. e phone 744 To end recording hang up or press 1 744 789 for more features 745 To end recording press 1 745 789 745 572 745 789 346 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 746 To end this call press X 804 812 746 804 812 822 760 746 807 746 798 739 724 224 234 236 746 798 739 724 224 234 746 845 838 728 835 785 746 845 838 728 835 785 833 746 798 739 728 725 223 236 746 747 To end press 2 669 747 667 747 748 To enter a new name or mailbox 662 238 805 748 press x 749 To enter another extension press X 749 750 To enter another extension press 2 781 750 751 To enter by name press the hash 463 751 sign and 1 463 751 678 463 751 226 175 751 150 751 752 To enter by name press the pound 463 752 sign and 1 463 752 678 462 752 462 752 226 175 752 150 752 753 To enter your callback number press 753 432 1 754 To erase and exit press X 819 663 755 674 754 819 661 755 754 755 To erase and try again press 3 819 663 755 674 754 819 661 755 754 819 663 755 756 To erase this message press 3 804 79
223. e phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode 2 Press the Flexible button CO or DSS BLF that you want to assign as the TWR button 3 Dial 83 or 90 Screen output 2Way Rec 4 Dial the Voice Mail extension number Screen output 2Way Hec _ _ ____ The extension number you entered 5 Press Store To exit the Station Programming mode Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 7 Repeat these steps for each telephone o Conditions This button must be a CO or DSS BLF key to be programmed as a TWR button If this key is pressed when all Voice Mail ports are busy the user will hear reorder tone 4 4 10 TWT Two Way Transfer Button Assignment via 100 Station Programming For the Two Way Transfer feature to work at an extension the extension must have a TWT button on it This key must either be a DSS BLF or CO key with a lamp Follow the procedure below to assign a TWT button on an extension This is an extension level programme and should be done at each individual telephone PC programming is also possible 1 Enter PITS Programming a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode 2 Press the desired FLEXIBLE CO or DSS BLF key that you want to assign as the TWT button 3 Dial 84 or 91 Screen output 2Way Trans 4 Dial the Voice Mail extension number Screen output 2Way Trans _ _ _ ___ The extens
224. eate and edit Subscriber Mailboxes by following the steps below At any step when editing an assigned mailbox s parameters change current settings by Pressing 1 To leave the current setting unchanged Press 2 When creating a new mailbox the following parameters can be set Mailbox Number Subscribers Name recorded by the subscriber e Extension Number e Initial 3 or 4 Letters of the Subscriber s Last Name Enter only the first 3 or 4 letters of the owner s last name e Class of Service Number Enter any COS number 1 62 e Interview Mailbox Number Interview Mailbox Numbers must be different from Subscriber Mailbox Numbers e All Calls Transfer Mailbox Follow the steps listed below to create edit or delete any mailbox parameter 1 Log in to the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 1 for Mailbox Setup 4 Press 1 to Assign or Edit 5 Type the mailbox number 6 Press 2 to accept the entry 7 As each parameter plays Installation Manual 275 C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES a Press 1 to enter the new parameter or 2 to leave the parameter unchanged b Enter the parameter C Confirm the new parameter is correct and Press 2 to accept it 8 The All Calls Transfer to Mailbox parameter is the last parameter to be entered When this entry is completed the prompt at Step 4 will appear Continue assigning or editing other mailboxes by repeating Steps 5 7 9 To return to the M
225. ecified data will be transmitted to the data terminal Notes The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software that supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol The command can be cancelled by Typing V before entering the receiving mode Once the receiving mode has been selected use the cancel command of the communication software being used Installation Manual 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS e If your data terminal supports a high speed it is recommended that you SAVE at the maximum speed of 38400 bps First change the RS 232C setting of the VPS see B7 1 RS 232C Parameters Next change the RS 232C setting of your data terminal to the same speed 7 2 8 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS LOAD Use the LOAD command to install new data or to restore saved data to the VPS Execute this command for each data file When performing this operation always wait until the process completion indication appears before proceeding 1 Type LOAD then Press RETURN LOAD VPS Disk Data Load PC gt VPS Xmodem 1 Program 2 Parameters 3 System Prompts 4 User Prompts 1 5 User Prompts 2 6 Custom Service Menus 7 Personal Greetings 8 Company Greetings Selection No 2 Select the item to be restored to the hard disk then Press RETURN To start press RETURN 3 Press RETURN When CCC appears the VPS is ready for loading 4 Set the data terminal to the se
226. ed Next Page 208 Installation Manual p Mailbox No 1 Mailbox 1 Enter Edit Entry Setting 1 Program 1 Mailbox 2 Delete 2 Notification Setting 3 Password Reset Setting 4 Mailbox Listing 2 Class of COS No 1 64 3 Remote Call Service Entry FWD to CO 1 Day Mode for each port 1 Port Service 2 Night Mode for each port 3 Lunch Mode for each port 3 Port Trunk 4 Break Mode for each port Service 1 Day Mode for each trunk group 2 Night Mode for each trunk grou 2 Trunk Service g Se 3 Lunch Mode for each trunk group 4 Break Mode for each trunk group 4 Service 1 Automated 1 Department Setting Attendant Dialing 1 Operator 1 2 Operator s Parameter 1 Day Mode 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Operator 1 2 Night Mode 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Operator 1 3 Lunch Mode 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Operator 1 4 Break Mode 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Enter Extension 3 Alternate Extension 2 Delete Extension 3 Extension Listing 2 Custom Service Custom Service No 1 100 Entry 1 Enter 3 Caller ID Call Routing 2 Delete 3 Caller ID Listing B1 SYST
227. ed is busy Reorder Tone An invalid extension number is dialled or the call is 3 inadvertently connected to another Voice Mail port also heard when no touchtone receiver is available to the Voice Mail extension 4 DND The extension dialled has set DND Do Not Disturb Answer The extension dialled is answered Forwarded to The extension dialled is forwarded to Voice Mail and 6 Voice Mail another Voice Mail port is able to answer This lets the first Ringing Voice Mail port usually an Auto Attendant send the call to the other Voice Mail port Forwarded to The extension dialled is forwarded to Voice Mail and no 7 Voice Mail Busy other Voice Mail ports are available to accept the call This signals the Voice Mail port usually Auto Attendant to let the caller to leave a message 8 Forwarded to Extn The extension dialled is forwarded to another non Voice Mail extension 9 Confirmation Tone The Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off code is dialled successfully Disconnect The caller disconnects The telephone company must send 9 a CPC signal to the PBX for this feature to work on outside calls Digit Translation Table Parameters These parameters allow PBXs that have a fixed Follow on ID sequence to be used with the VPS For example a Follow on ID sequence of X X X201 can be changed to 6201 by using these parameters Inter Digit Time Out This parameter defines the duration of incoming signals
228. eed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Installation Manual How to replace the fuse Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse cover Installation Manual 7 Table of Contents 8 1 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 13 1 1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO nin 14 1 1 1 Why Voice Processing asses see pacar idm Paid notes rebas c e crates ases acp RE Ra n HUE 14 1 1 2 CIS INDEM 14 1 1 3 VPS a Mla UD RE NE 15 1 2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MANAGEMENT AND USE 16 1 2 1 System Administration eet M 16 1 2 2 System Management i 16 1 2 3 SUDSOHDET liscia ia ili ee nC eee ee eee ere eee aa iR 16 1 3 SYSTEM BS nme D ages a cane el 17 1 3 1 General RA RIA EI 17 1 3 2 System COMPONEMS rrcillartiaaa 17 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible iii 20 1 3 4 Installer Equipment and S
229. egration only A subscriber can enter her mailbox directly when she calls the VPS from her extension She does not have to enter any special codes except for her password if one is set DPT Integration Digital integration between the VPS and the KX TD500 the KX TD816 the KX TD1232 or the KX T612 Requires upgraded software in the PBX Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX you may not be able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information consult your dealer DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Commonly referred to as touchtone External Call Forwarding Available on the KX TD500 the KX TD816 and the KX TD1232 Forwards calls to an extension that has call forwarding activated to an outside phone Installation Manual 363 364 External Delivery Message A message intended for automatic delivery to outside parties and or extensions The message can be delivered immediately or at a specified time External Message Delivery List Allows the subscriber to create 2 lists to deliver messages to outside parties Each list can have 8 destinations External Message Delivery Redial Allows the System Administrator to instruct the VPS when making external message deliveries how many attempts to make when the line is busy or when there is no answer Fast Forward Puts the user 4 s ahead in the current message Follow On ID See Called Party ID General Deliv
230. eiver will 2 User 1 be greeted by the VPS in the specified language 3 User 2 prompt However if Selective is enabled then the 4 Selective receiver has a choice of prompts See related User 1 explanation in Incoming Call Service Prompt in Table 5 5 in 5 3 1 Port Service Menu Note When Selective is enabled and the receiver uses a rotary telephone the no entry selection is specified by Prompt for Rotary Callers in Table 5 5 in 5 3 1 Port Service Menu Authorization 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS automatically forwards for Auto 2 No messages that have not been accessed for a specific Forwarding No length of time to another mailbox The sub parameters to be set for this feature include Mailbox Number Delay Time and Forwarding Mode If set to No sub parameters cannot be assigned Mailbox 2 5 digits Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be Number None forwarded Note The numbers of the System Group Distribution List cannot be specified as the destination Delay Time h min Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the 00 05 to 99 59 VPS must wait before forwarding unretrieved messages 00 30 The maximum delay time is 99 h 59 min Note The delay time must be less than the New Message Retention Time or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded Forwarding 1 Copy Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the Mode 2 Move original mailbox When set to Copy copies of
231. em programme the system administration table the voice prompts about 50 min worth and has the recording area for the messages from callers The hard disk is controlled by the central micro processor Installation Manual 19 1 3 SYSTEM BASICS Note The actual Hard Disk Drive mounted on your VPS may look different from the one shown in the corresponding illustration provided in the beginning of this section CPU Board One system Main processing unit for the system Comprised of central microprocessor ROM dynamic RAM system controller Rotary Switch and an RS 232C interface 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible We recommend integration with the following Panasonic phone systems e Panasonic KX TD500 e Panasonic KX TD1232 e Panasonic KX TD816 e Panasonic KX TA series e Panasonic KX TD612 Note The KX TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom It is only available in some countries We cannot guarantee adequate integration of the VPS with other PBX systems or with Key Systems If the customer does not have a recommended Panasonic PBX system be sure that the system has the features listed below The PBX should have the following features for successful integration e Single line tip ring port circuits Some PBXs need an OPX card to provide this connection e Extension to extension touchtone signalling e Message Waiting Notification from an SLT single line telephone e Screened transfer from an SLT e Messag
232. ension number when there is no answer FWD Busy or No Answer Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is busy or there is no answer FWD to CO Forward all incoming calls to the Telephone number 1 or 2 programmed in the Mailbox Setting or to any other number FWD Cancel Cancel the forwarding setting Must be enabled in the COS Class of Service settings to be utilised With respect to PBX programming it is possible that Call Forward to CO is disabled To enable VPS Remote Call Forwarding the KX TD1232 for example must be programmed properly For the COS of the extensions whose calls are to be forwarded to an outside CO line enable the following 504 Call Forward to Outside Line Note The extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is the Message Manager s extension However its default extension number 0 cannot be used with this feature When using this feature you must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan See Remote Call Forward to CO Setting in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Remote Call Forward to CO in Table B 7 and Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET See Remote Call Forwarding Set in GLOSSARY See 4 16 Remote Call Forwarding Set in the Subscriber s Guide
233. ensions entered in step 3 e The length of mailbox numbers The Message Manager mailbox General Delivery Mailbox might be 2 to 5 digits long 98 998 9998 or 99998 The System Manager mailbox might be 2 to 5 digits long 99 999 9999 or 99999 If both 3 and 4 digit extension numbers exist at the same time the VPS will unify all mailbox numbers to 4 digit length by entering 0 at the end of all 3 digit numbers Example Extension Mailbox Numbers Numbers 201 201 0 202 202 0 203 203 0 2000 2000 2001 2001 2002 2002 The VPS puts 0 at the end of 3 digit numbers Note After creating mailboxes for subscribers by Quick Setup the COS parameter Authorization for Message Notification see Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS for COS number 1 will be set to Yes It will stay No for COS number 2 through number 62 To program mailbox parameters other than the extension numbers and Owner s Last Name or First Name see 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES The caller can use Dial by 110 Installation Manual 5 1 STARTING UP Name feature using the Owner s Last Name when in Automated Attendant Service or Voice Mail Service 5 Port Service Setting Screen output Quick Setup Port Service Setting PORT 10 Auto PORT 11 Auto PORT 12 Auto Day Mode PORT 1 Auto Attend PORT 2 Auto Attend PORT 3 Auto Attend PORT 4 Auto Attend PORT 5 Auto Attend P
234. ep 3 9 Repeat Steps 4 8 to record other Company Greetings Custom Service Menus and or Voice Labels Recording User Prompts 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 to modify messages Installation Manual 307 D6 RECORDING MESSAGES 3 Press 6 to modify user prompts 4 Press 1 to change User Prompt 1 or 2 to change User Prompt 2 5 To change specific prompts Go to Step 6 To change all prompts in a row without reviewing the current recording Go to Step 7 6 To change specific prompts a Press 1 b Enter the prompt number you want to change There is a complete list of modifiable prompts in D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS C The VPS plays the prompt number d Press 1 to change the prompt If a prompt has not yet been recorded the VPS plays the system prompt go to Step 6g If you wish to turn off a certain prompt please first record a dummy prompt Then go back to Step 6 and you will be able to turn it off by going through these steps Note Press 2 to return to Step 6b e The VPS plays the current prompt Press 1 to change the prompt Note Press 2 to retain the current recording Return to Step 6b f Press 1 to record a new prompt Note Press 2 to erase the current recording Return to Step 6b Press 3 to turn off on the specified prompt Return to Step 6b g Record a prompt at the tone and Press 1 to end recording h Press 2 to accept the recorded prompt Note Pr
235. er 16 507 17 Any digit on the telephone keypad 17 can be used 18 APRIL 18 314 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 19 at 19 654 19 345 483 19 365 19 220 284 365 19 220 283 182 420 19 360 19 346 912 19 183 19 360 19 220 284 20 number attempts were busy 20 21 number attempts were no answer 21 22 number attempts were successful 22 23 AUGUST 23 24 Auto forwarding disabled 24 25 Auto forwarding enabled 25 26 because message retention time 181 911 26 expired 27 Pager access disabled 27 28 Pager access enabled 28 29 Pager callback number entry mode is 29 after message recording 30 Pager callback number entry mode is 30 before message recording 31 Pager callback number entry mode is 31 caller select 32 Pager callback number entry mode is 32 without message 33 being delivered now 366 33 34 Break mode first operator s extension 34 is extension number 35 Break mode first operator s extension 35 is not assigned 36 Break mode second operator s 36 extension is extension number 37 Break mode second operator s 37 extension is not assigned Installation Manual 315 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE P
236. er Note The KX TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom It is only available in some countries Deleting a Mailbox When a mailbox is deleted the Voice Processing System erases all messages in the mailbox removes the mailbox from all group distribution lists deletes the personal group distribution lists assigned to the mailbox erases the subscriber s name and cancels all external delivery messages To access the proper menu for Deleting a Mailbox follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 2 Mailbox No 214 Installation Manual B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Resetting a Mailbox Password Follow the procedure below to set the parameters for clearing a mailbox password To access the proper menu for clearing a mailbox password follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 3 Mailbox No Listing Mailboxes Follow the procedure below to display the mailbox number list To display the list of all mailbox numbers follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 4 Installation Manual 215 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS The COS Class of Service parameters define the set of services that are available to mailbox owners A maximum of 64 1 64 classes can be specified A class of service number can be assigned f
237. erminal 46 2 8 2 Connecting the RS 232C Cable 46 2 8 3 RS 232G SIAS eli 47 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS mec AAKE aana 49 3 1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION 50 Installation Manual 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 DPT or Inband Signmalligg sucia ec esae etas rasta eee cessus cric E rn pd cites 50 Why Integration is ImpoFart ida 50 How the VPS and the PBX Communicate ssssseeeen 50 PBX Requirements for Integration cccecceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 51 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS eren 53 General Guidelines and Definitions 538 RS 2320 Setting CNN TOT D 53 Porn Se a f TH 538 PBA Interface PafamMelers asili DU VR IARE KE MERE 53 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs 57 VPS Programming for Inband Integration iii 57 KX TA Series Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s Extension 58 KX TD500 Programming for Inband Integration 59 KX TD816 and KX TD1232 Programming for Inband Integration via the Managers EXIGISIQOII unies ordo iaia 69 KX TD816 and KX TD1232 Programming for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool 69 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD DIGITAL PBX TEE
238. ery Mailbox When the caller does not dial anything either because she does not want to or she is using a rotary telephone the VPS sends her to the General Delivery Mailbox Periodically daily is best the Message Manager should transfer the contents of the General Delivery Mailbox to the appropriate destinations Hash Sign The key on the telephone keypad HELP One of the utility commands that is used to list all utility commands with a brief description of each Immediate Reply Allows the message receiver to reply to a message without specifying the extension number or the mailbox number of the sender Inband Signalling The Follow On ID or Called Party ID that integrates the VPS and the PBX Uses DTMF to light message waiting lights Does not give high end features such as Intercom Paging Direct Mailbox Access Live Call Screening etc Installation Manual Incomplete Call Handling Service Calls are considered incomplete when there is no answer or if the line is busy There are 6 options for the Incomplete Call Handling Service 1 to record a message from the caller 2 transfer the caller to a covering extension 3 page the mailbox owner via the PBX 4 notify the mailbox owner via beeper pager 5 transfer the caller to the operator or 6 let the caller try another extension Integration Required between the VPS and the PBX See Inband Signalling and DPT Integration Intercept Routing No Answer Trans
239. es Before starting the VPS make sure all installation and line connections have been done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION Installation Manual 4 2 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing After turning the power on the system starts up in the following sequence The Power Indicator light goes on The Power Indicator light begins to flash CARD TEST is displayed on the screen SYSTEM SETUP is displayed Table 4 2 Screen output CARD TEST SYSTEM SETUP 1l 2 3 4 5 6 7 1L 12 13 14 15 16 17 9 10 e The VPS tests the CPU board the hard disk drive and the CO cards as SYSTEM SETUP is displayed Active ports are displayed on the screen Screen output ON LINE MODE Active COs 1 234 5 6 7 8 9 101112 The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully Screen output OFF LINE MODE Active COs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 DPT Interface Connection is not Established This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone system cannot be established Possible causes of the message DPT Interface Connection is not Established Cause Remedy The PBX is not a KX TD series system Since the VPS is configured to communicate with the KX TD1232 this message will always
240. es not support Inband Integration Installation Manual 267 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Table B 41 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Integration 1 None Specifies the method of integrating the VPS with the Mode 2 Inband PBX 3 DPT 1 None Both PBX and VPS work independently None Min without accessing information concerning the status of the other 2 Inband The PBX sends touchtone codes to the VPS to indicate the state of the call busy answered disconnect etc Inband Integration improves the VPS performance because call state recognition is faster than with standard call progress tone detection The PBX code for each call state must be set in the Inband Signaling Parameters If PBX type is set to a KX T series telephone system the Inband Signaling Parameters will automatically default to the proper codes This is available with any of the following Panasonic KX T series telephone systems TA series T96 T336 TD816 TD1232 TD612 and TD500 3 DPT The VPS communicates with the PBX via the DPT interface This is available with any of the following Panasonic KX TD series telephone systems TD816 TD1232 TD612 and TD500 To program the following 10 Parameters in the next table use the Special Commands and Dial Codes listed below You can set up to 12 digits for each parameter D Disconnecting F Flash Recall R Ringback Tone Detection S
241. es of prerecorded questions up to 10 for the caller in an Interview Mailbox As the caller answers questions answers are recorded in the mailbox After a caller records the answers the interview mailbox lights a message waiting lamp When retrieving the messages the subscriber only hears the answers to the questions There are 2 ways to access an interview mailbox Assign an interview mailbox to an existing mailbox e Assign a port as an interview mailbox Installation Manual 121 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS To structure an interview mailbox 1 From the System Administration Top Menu Type 1 1 1 Mailbox Number 1 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Mailbox Number Mailbox Setting 2 Enter the Mailbox Number that is to be assigned an interview mailbox This should be the mailbox number of the person who requires the service 3 At Interview Mailbox Number parameter Enter a Nonexistent Mailbox Number This will be the interview mailbox for this subscriber please make a written note of it for future reference It will not show up in Mailbox Listing If at a later time you want to delete the interview mailbox press backspace at Interview Mailbox Number 4 Exit System Administration Programming 5 Enter the subscriber s mailbox and Record the Questions Call the VPS and Press 6 x then Dial the Mailbox Number assigned to the interview mailbox From the Main Menu Press 6 1 6 Confirm that your questions have been re
242. ess 1 to review the recorded prompt Press 3 to erase the recorded prompt and try again Return to Step 6f Press X to erase the recorded prompt and exit Return to Step 6b i Repeat Steps 6b to 6h to record other prompts 7 To change all prompts in a row a Press 2 b Enter the prompt number you want to change There is a complete list of modifiable prompts in D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS C The VPS plays the prompt number d Press 1 to change the prompt Note Press 2 to go to Step 7g Press 3 to turn off on the prompt e Record a prompt at the tone and Press 1 to end recording 308 Installation Manual D6 RECORDING MESSAGES f Press 2 to accept the recorded prompt Note Press 1 to review the recorded prompt Press 3 to erase the recorded prompt and try again Return to Step 7e Press X to erase the recorded prompt and exit Go to Step 7g g The VPS plays the next prompt number h Repeat Steps 7d to 7g to record other prompts Note User prompts can be saved in a personal computer command SAVE through the RS 232C Once they have been saved they can be restored with the command LOAD at any time There is a complete list of modifiable prompts and prompt numbers in D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Recording System Caller Names 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 to modify messages 3 Press 8 to modify system caller names 4 Enter the Caller ID List Number 1 12
243. ess 2 769 To generate memory usage report 769 press 1 To clear memory usage counts press 2 770 To generate fax call report press 1 770 To clear fax call counts press 2 771 To generate mailbox usage report 771 press 1 To clear mailbox usage counts press 2 772 To generate port usage report press 772 4 To clear port usage counts press 2 348 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 773 To generate system service report 773 press 1 or memory usage report management press 2 or port usage report management press 3 or mailbox usage report management press 4 To generate mailbox parameter report press 5 To generate call account report press 6 To generate class of service parameter report press 7 To generate fax call report press 8 774 To go directly to a question press 4 695 841 842 774 719 841 842 774 758 841 842 774 841 842 774 775 To hold this call press 2 293 798 775 293 798 775 301 776 To initialise internal modem press 6 837 827 834 692 689 776 777 To insert a pager display command 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 777 press 8 722 663 820 668 778 779 777 778 To insert a pause press 5 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 722 663
244. et Operation Mode to Private or Hands free d To activate the LCS status Set Status to Active Note To utilise the Live Call Screening features it is necessary to first assign the LCS Password and LCS Button see 4 4 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming and then activate the LCS status 4 Click Apply 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each extension Initial Display Selection E Limit COS No Language Call Pickup Deny 98 Installation Manual 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 4 4 7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station Programming For the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension the extension must have an LCS button lit at the time of the message reception This key must either be a DSS BLF or CO key with a lamp Follow the procedure below to assign an LCS button on an extension This is station level programming and should be done at each individual telephone PC programming is also possible ol Enter PITS Programming a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode Press the desired FLEXIBLE CO or DSS BLF button you want to assign as the LCS button Dial 85 or 92 Screen output LCS Press STORE To exit the Station Programming mode Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset Repeat
245. etary telephone 7000 7300 series analogue 7200 7400 7500 series digital 4 4 1 Live Call Screening LCS Programming LCS notifies subscribers of incoming messages to their mailboxes The notification method is programmable for hands free or private Hands free allows the user to monitor a recording through the speakerphone and if desired intercept the call by lifting the handset The private mode notifies the user with an alert tone when a message is being recorded By pressing the LCS button the user can monitor the message and intercept the call by going off hook System Programming or PC Programming also determines whether the mailbox continues to record after the user intercepts the call 4 4 2 Live Call Screening Password Assignment To allow the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension the extension must have the LCS button lit To light this button on the telephone press the LCS button then enter the password This password prevents others from activating the LCS feature and listening to the messages as they are being left It is not necessary to enter PITS Programming to activate this feature PC programming is also possible 1 Lift the handset or Press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number 799 3 Enter a 3 digit password 000 999 twice You will hear a confirmation tone then a dial tone Screen output The 3 digit password you entered is displayed 4 Hang up or Press the SP PHONE button
246. ever some OPX cards do not provide all the capabilities listed in this section Following are the minimum current and voltages that the PBX must supply Minimum Loop Current 20 mA Minimum Line Voltage 7VDC Minimum Ringing Voltage 40 V AC Extension to extension Touchtone Signalling For system users to access VPS services and features they must be able to send touchtones from their telephones to the VPS port As a general rule SLTs can perform extension to extension touchtone signalling however many proprietary telephones cannot Some PBXs need to be programmed to make proprietary telephones use touchtone signalling If the PBX does not provide extension to extension touchtone signalling VPS services and features will be limited TEST Call an SLT extension from the telephone in question When the call is answered see if the person receiving the call hears touchtones when numbers are dialled Message Waiting Notification from an SLT The PBX extensions should light a lamp or receive broken dial tone when the Message Waiting Lamp On code is dialled by the VPS The VPS functions best when the extension number of the voice mailbox owner follows the Light On or Light Off code On some PBXs however the extension number is dialled first followed by a flash recall and then the On code This presents a problem if the extension is answered before the VPS sends the flash recall signal If the PBX does not prov
247. evice is not to be used 640 641 This group has no members 641 642 This is a new mailbox 642 643 This is for Message Manager 62 643 644 This is for System Manager 62 644 645 This is the General Delivery Mailbox 645 646 This is the last message 646 647 This is the last prompt number 647 648 This is your mailbox 648 649 This is your message 569 649 650 This list member already exists 650 651 This mailbox number is already 651 assigned 652 This message is from name 652 418 652 653 This message is from the general 569 653 delivery mailbox 340 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 654 This message will be delivered on 654 19 day 655 THOUSAND 655 656 THREE 656 657 THREE HOUR 657 658 THURSDAY 658 659 Time is time 659 660 times 859 660 661 To accept the prompt press 2 819 661 755 754 662 To accept press 1 662 238 805 748 663 To accept press 2 819 663 755 674 754 828 663 722 663 819 663 755 712 663 820 722 663 737 722 663 759 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 722 663 820 668 778 830 779 777 722 663 808 722 663 820 668 778 779 722 663 820 66
248. f Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2 s pus Type Status Card Type Status Card Type Status ECES n Wu aaa cose e ono mme enni fai n i a E EP ee ci fie INS cuc fesa S scams pesi ps Hs PA pz es ETC Mi fe e e o FETTE eee ee as a fig a M pesa i een Ss ee e es sx sui Le d sf pesa a eee nta aaa eg Ji e eru gei ee emnt 13 cPU 13 rgo no YI pei oa 14 TSW 14 T 7 e 14 sa ni 1 1 Slot Assignment Close Help e Check the information of Card Properties and confirm the LPR version of the card Note The LPR Version must be 2 or higher for the first VPS card 101 DHLC to which the control channel will be assigned or 1 or higher for the second VPS card 104 DHLC 78 Installation Manual 4 2 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION Screen output Card Properties 101 DHLO2 208 1018 ms miis Min imis um dl f Check the information of CPU Card Information and confirm the Software Version of the KX TD500 The software version must be Q211AB or higher for DPT Integration to be utilised Notes If the software version of the KX TD500 is lower than this you may not be able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information consult your dealer Inthe example below Q211AB represents the software version and 010917A represents the software production date code year month day The Area Code 7 indicates just for Spain
249. feature is also enabled by selecting Call Screening in 4 1 Call Transfer Status in the Subscriber s Guide The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting Intercom Paging in 4 1 Call Transfer Status and or in 4 4 Message Reception Mode in the Subscriber s Guide The Message Manager is responsible for recording System Caller Names To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 System Caller Name Announcement Enter To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement Enter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 1 Caller ID List No 1 120 252 Installation Manual B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 27 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Caller ID No Up to 20 digits Assigns the telephone number for which the VPS consisting of 1 9 0 announces prerecorded caller name to extension None Users Description Up to 20 characters Enters a name and or description of the Caller ID None number Any ASCII character except can be used System Caller Name Announcement Delete Deletes specified Caller ID List numbers from the list To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement Delete follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 2 Caller ID List No 1 120
250. fers an unanswered call to another extension or to the VPS This is a PBX feature Intercom Paging Available with DPT Integration only Allows up to 16 different paging groups An outside party can reach a subscriber who is away from her telephone using either internal or external page groups For a Caller ID caller if her name has been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature the name will be announced at the end of the page Interview Service A special type of subscriber mailbox that enables the subscriber to record up to 10 questions After the answers are recorded the Message Waiting Lamp turns on at the subscriber s telephone Good for claims departments order desks job applications etc Keypad All touchtone keys on the telephone LCD Liquid crystal display Live Call Screening Available with DPT Integration only The proprietary telephone works like an answering machine The subscriber can hear the caller through the speakerphone or the handset while the message is being recorded Installation Manual 365 366 LOAD One of the utility commands that is used to load new or saved data to the VPS from a personal computer Logical Extension All Calls Transfer to Mailbox An extension that always receives calls directly into its mailbox This feature is used by subscribers who are often unavailable or who do not have a telephone Mailbox Capacity messages The number of messages that can be recorde
251. forming any Message Manager task To access the Message Manager s mailbox three items of information must be known the telephone number answered by Voice Mail Service the Message Manager s Mailbox Number and the Message Manager s Password if assigned The Message Manager s Mailbox Number is 98 998 default 9998 or 99998 depending upon the mailbox number length specified in System Programming The Message Manager s password is assigned through the Message Manager s Service To Access the Message Manager s Mailbox 1 Dial an Extension Number providing Voice Mail Service Or Dial any VPS Extension Number and Press 6 Service Access Command Please enter the person s mailbox number To enter by name press and 1 If you are using a rotary telephone stay on the line To call the operator press 0 2 Press X then enter the Message Manager s Mailbox Number 98 998 9998 or 99998 Enter your password followed by 3 Type the Password followed by 4 The Main Menu of Message Manager s Service will be played You have number new message s To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages press 1 To set up message waiting notification press 2 To customise your mailbox press 3 To set the clock press 4 To modify message press 5 To set station call forwarding press 6 To end this call press X 296 Installation Manual D2 MANAGING THE GENERA
252. fternoon Good evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System 2 Press 6X9 9 8 to access the Message Manager s mailbox You will hear the following prompt if mailbox 998 has a password set Enter your password followed by the pound hash sign 3 Enter the Message Manager s Password if programmed Otherwise you will not hear the Main Menu of Message Manager s Service 6 1 2 Main Menu of Message Manager s Service You have number new message s To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages press 1 To set up message waiting notification press 2 To customize your mailbox press 3 To set the clock press 4 To modify message press 5 To set station call forwarding press 6 To end this call press X 6 1 3 Company Greetings Enter 6x998 5 1 1 Access the Message Manager s Main Command Menu 138 Installation Manual 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 2 Press 5 to modify messages 3 Press 1 to change the Company Greeting 4 Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process After you record the company greeting it may be necessary to enter programming through the terminal and set the company greeting assignment under the Port Settings Menu Trunk Service Menu and Holiday Service Menu This tells the system what company greeting to play on each port and trunk outside
253. g Press 1 to change the password If a password has not yet been assigned go to Step 4 Press 2 to accept the current setting Go to Step 6 4 Type the password and Press 5 The VPS plays the current password setting Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual D4 CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX 6 The VPS plays the current operator s extension setting Press 1 to change or assign the operator s extension Press 2 to accept the current setting or Press 3 to delete the current setting Go to Step 9 Note Operator 1 s extension number cannot be deleted 7 Type the extension number 8 The VPS plays the current extension setting Press 2 to accept it 9 Repeat Steps 6 8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day Night Lunch and Break Modes for each operator 10 The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting Press 1 to change the telephone number If a telephone number has not yet been assigned go to Step 11 Press 2 to accept the current setting Go to Step 13 11 Type the telephone number using 0 9 and x Notes Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code to seize an outside CO line e When connected to the KX TD500 the maximum number of characters allowed to be entered is 24 when connected to other types of PBX 16 12 The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting Press 2 to accept it 13 The VPS plays
254. g for DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool are for the KX TD1232 as examples Please refer to them for the KX TD816 and the KX TD612 4 3 1 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for 86 DPT Integration via the Manager s Extension It is important that the KX TD1232 has the proper software level to allow DPT Integration with the VPS Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level then complete the required programming before starting up the VPS Note Two methods of programming are available on the KX TD1232 The instructions below show how to program without the operating and maintenance tool For instructions on programming with the operating and maintenance tool please see 4 3 2 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming Refer to the KX TD1232 Programming Guide or Installation Manual for instructions on how to enter the system programming mode Software Verification 1 Verify Software If you are configuring a 2 cabinet system remember to check both cabinets The software must be the same in each Check the software version of the KX TD1232 using System Programme 116 Example P111GYMMDDA The underlined digits represent the software production date code year month day If the software version of the PBX is old you may not be able to utilise
255. ge the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Intercom Paging Group Number 17 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current number b Type the group number 1 17 C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Note If set to 17 Group 17 the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all groups 1 16 Subscriber Service Prompt Mode 18 8 The current setting plays Press 1 2 or 3 to change the desired mode e 1 System Prompt 2 User 1 Prompt 3 User 2 Prompt b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 4 to accept it Remote Call Forward to CO 19 8 The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Delete Message Confirmation 20 8 The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement 21 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current number b Type the number of Caller IDs 0 30 C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual 281 C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID 22 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is
256. gh the following sequence System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 1 Program Enter The Number 3 Port Trunk Service Enter The Number 1 Port Service Screen output Program Port Trunk Service Port Service Enter the Port Number 1 12 From Program Port Trunk Service Port Service Menu Enter the data using the table below as a guide Note In the table below the sub parameter Prompt for Rotary Callers is underlined This sub parameter can be assigned only when Incoming Call Service Prompt is set to Selective Description Value Range Description Function Default Company 1 32 Specifies the company greeting to be played on the port Greeting The System Greeting is Good Morning Afternoon N None Evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System System Greeting Incoming Call 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services Service 2 Auto Attn Notes 3 Interview When you specify the Interview Service one of 4 Custom Subscriber s Interview mailbox numbers should also Auto Attn be specified When you specify the Custom Service one of 100 1 100 Custom Service numbers should also be specified Installation Manual 5 3 SETTING PORTS Table 5 5 Description Value Range Description Function Default Incoming Call 1 System Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on Service 2 User 1 this por
257. gration None None Mode Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband DPT Inband DPT Inband Inband Operator Transfer FX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FX FTX FX Sequence 266 Installation Manual B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS Table B 40 PBX Type Other Manu facturers KX T series T308 T616 T1232 TA series T96 T336 TD816 1232 TD612 TD500 Extension Transfer Sequence FX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FX FTX FX Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence FX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FX FTX FX Reconnect Sequence on Busy FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F Reconnect Sequence on No Answer FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F Reconnect Sequence on Refused Call FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F Light On Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp None N A N A T701X T 91X TX9X T701X T701X Light Off Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp None N A N A T702X T 90X T 9X T700X T700X Call Waiting Sequence None N A N A N A N A Release Sequence for Call Waiting None N A N A N A N A When your KX TD series telephone system is in DPT Integration mode N A Not available Not needed Note The UK version KX T1232 do
258. hange the Owner s Name The system will say Owner s name is not recorded Hecord owner s name at the tone State the Owner s First and Last Name at the tone Press 1 when finished The VPS tells you the customer s name 9 Press 2 to accept ONO A TEST THE SYSTEM Before backing up the system call each extension to see that each port functions as it should Check for proper greetings and call transfers 142 Installation Manual 6 3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM 6 3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM 1 Choose the Utility Command Type SAVE then Press ENTER See screen output below From System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 3 Utility Command SAVE VPS DISK Data Save VPS gt PC Xmodem 1 Program 2 Parameters 3 System Prompts 4 User Prompts 1 5 User Prompts 2 6 7 8 S Custom Service Menus Personal Greetings Company Greetings elect No 2 2 2 To start Press 2 and then ENTER 3 Press RETURN or ENTER Following steps are for HyperTerminal as an example 4 Select Heceive File from the Transfer Menu 5 Specify a folder where data is to be saved if necessary use Browse 6 Select Xmodem as the protocol to save data 7 Click Receive 8 Enter desired filename and click OK The file transfer screen appears and shows download progress Download time will vary depending on the communication speed and file sizes SAVE Complete
259. hat are often unavailable or that do not have a telephone See All Calls Transfer to Mailbox in Table B 4 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Creating and Editing a Mailbox in C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See Logical Extension in GLOSSARY Mailbox Is a place where all messages to a subscriber are stored Several mailbox options exist Subscriber Mailbox Interview Mailbox System Manager s Mailbox and Message Manager s Mailbox General Delivery Mailbox See 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES See 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See 7 3 1 Mailbox Assignments See 7 3 9 Mailbox Usage Report See 7 3 10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear See B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See Section 1 Mailbox Setup in the Subscribers Guide Message Delivery Internal Allows the VPS to automatically deliver a single message to multiple mailboxes See Group Distribution List Personal Group Distribution List System and Message Delivery Status in this Table Message Delivery Status Allows a subscriber to check the status of messages that have been sent The sending subscriber has the option of cancelling any of the messages after checking their status If a recorded message has not been received the VPS will voice report the following the message s destination mailbox number and its contents Message delivery status information is automatically deleted after
260. he version of the programme CREP Displays the keypad assignments message recording status and the tree structure of a Custom service CCLR Clears a Custom service menu access count MWL Specifies the number of times the VPS attempts to turn on the message waiting lamp on the extensions MRL Sets the minimum recording length of a message MPLT Displays the user prompt recording status HELP Displays brief instructions and a list of Utility Commands QSET Perform a basic setup of your VPS so that you can use it quickly LMON Line Monitor PUTD Displays Touchtone Information WCID Wait for Caller ID 148 Installation Manual 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 7 2 1 Off line Set OFLN Use the OFLN command to turn off the VPS Answer Mode Set the VPS to Off Line Mode before deleting a mailbox since this operation involves the updating of a large number of related parameters Type OFLN then Press RETURN If no VPS ports are in use the VPS will immediately suspend the Answer Mode OFLN OFF LINE MODE If any VPS port is in use the VPS will display the following warning Now line is used WAIT The following message indicates that the VPS is in the Off Line Mode OFF LINE MODE 7 2 2 On line Set ONLN Use the ONLN command to place the VPS in the Answer Mode Type ONLN then Press RETURN ONLN ON LINE MODE 7 2 3 Set Password PASS U
261. hese parameters are set automatically when Quick Setup is conducted Most of the settings will be left unchanged The only setting that will be changed quite often is the Transfer Sequence for the operator or the extension By default it is set at FX on DPT Integration and FTX for Inband Integration In other words the voice processor dials the flash recall waits for intercom tone and dials the extension number By default the VPS will stay on the line to monitor the status of the call If the extension user answers the voice processor will announce you have a call prior to releasing the call This can be alleviated by adding the letter A or D to the sequence A stands for answer the call will be transferred without the announcement you have a call For a blind or unscreened transfer add the letter D for disconnect 5 2 3 Custom Service Programming 116 After you have finished constructing the tree enter the System Programming Custom Service Settings Menu Access the Custom Service Setting Menu through the following sequence System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 1 Program Enter The Number 4 Service Setting Enter The Number 2 Custom Service The system then asks what Custom Service number you want to edit Enter the desired number 1 100 The Custom Service screen is displayed Installation Manual 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS Program Service Setting Custom Service Setting Cu
262. ice settings If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both the system and personal caller name announcement the VPS will use the personal caller name See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION See Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement and Caller ID Screening in Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Caller Name Announcement System Personal in GLOSSARY See 4 12 Personal Caller Name Announcement in the Subscriber s Guide 180 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Caller Name Allows the System Administrator to assign up See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT Announcement to 120 Caller ID numbers Each Caller ID INTEGRATION System number can have a caller name recorded by See Caller ID Screening in DPT Integration Only the Message Manager The caller name is announced when 1 extension users listen to the messages from assigned numbers left in their mailboxes 2 the VPS transfers calls from assigned numbers to the subscribers Caller ID Screening and 3 the VPS pages the subscribers by intercom Intercom Paging Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both the system and personal caller name announcement the VPS will use the perso
263. ick Set p OSE 160 Circuit Condition Display LMON Liana 160 Touchtone Information Display PUTD 161 Wait for Caller ID NCID slice 162 SYSTEM REPORTS Gaara 163 Mailbox ASSIgnMEentis alal 163 COS Class of Service Assignments 164 System Service Hepoll aue e acess chance iena 165 Call Account Report essi es sce aos oat diras Hispa ewer eect 166 v 194 daisoo re E ETA 167 Port Usage Statistics Clear 167 Disk Usage Report 5 168 Disk Usage Statistics Clear senicccssscrerccscesevedeadncehetaaeiectanwneemeteieteustinnthntadonss 168 Mailbox Usage Report seen repe emer Euer da eter diss decer pna RC 169 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear erret eerte oe iib ns 169 Fax Call Applied 170 Fax Call Statistics Clear e Tm 170 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE iii 172 SPECIFICATIONS cc ace 175 Appendix A SYSTEM FEATURES SYSTEM FEATURE Sranan andae rna iix ad emite Eu aei Mua nu EE 178 nene B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE SYSTEM NAVIGATION 5 oen ai ira 206 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES eene 210 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS 216 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE 225 POnASSIGNIMe fet T 225 Trunk GEIOBUDJASSIOETIBIE reale 227 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS
264. ide message waiting notification from an SLT the VPS can only notify mailbox owners by dialling a beeper pager or user assigned extension number This process slows down VPS performance as it dials the beeper pager or extension number and waits to confirm notification The beeper pager or user assigned extension notification is meant to be used for necessity usually for mailbox owners who are often out of the office e g Installation Manual 51 3 1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION sales people or field representatives The only other option without message waiting notification is for mailbox owners to periodically call the VPS to check for messages TEST See if dialling the On code from an SLT can turn on an extension s message waiting indicator Screened Transfer from an SLT The PBX must provide a screened transfer from an SLT for the VPS to function properly A screened transfer 1 Puts the caller on hold usually with a flash recall 2 Dials the extension 3 Checks to see if the called subscriber is in out or on another line and whether or not that subscriber accepts the transfer 4 Completes the transfer by going on hook or returns to the caller to say that the party is busy or not available It then gives the caller an opportunity to leave a message If the PBX does not provide screened transfer from an SLT the VPS cannot give callers the option to leave a message in a subscriber s mailbox TE
265. ilable to 555 answer the call Please call back later 556 Sorry there are no more matching 556 names 556 849 557 Sorry there is no space for recording 557 558 Sorry there is no space for recording 558 in this mailbox 559 Sorry this function is not available 559 465 559 560 Sorry this group is full 560 3 560 2 561 Sorry this line is busy 561 562 Sorry this list is in use for delivery 562 If this list is edited all the deliveries will then be cancelled 563 Sorry this mailbox is in use 563 564 Sorry this name cannot be found 564 565 Sorry this number is not assigned 565 566 Sorry this pager is not available 566 567 Sorry this report is not available 567 568 Sorry you cannot deliver the 568 message The maximum number of delivery has already been reached 569 Sorry you cannot reply 569 597 569 653 569 649 Installation Manual 337 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 570 Sorry you cannot transfer a private 570 message 571 STAR X 571 572 State your comment at the tone 572 745 789 573 SUNDAY 573 574 Telephone number 1 for Remote Call 574 Forward to CO is telephone number 575 Telephone number 1 for Remote Call 575 Forward to CO is not assigned 576 Telephone numbe
266. in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Auto Forwarding in GLOSSARY 178 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Automated Answers incoming calls and routes those See 5 2 10 Automated Attendant calls to the desired extension The service Attendant can be assigned to all of Day Night Lunch See 5 4 AUTOMATED and Break time periods Available for both ATTENDANT PARAMETERS Port and Trunk Services See B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Automated Attendant in GLOSSARY Broadcasting Messages Permits the System Manager to deliver the same message to all VPS subscribers at the same time This feature is only available to the System Manager See Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes Broadcasting Messages in C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES Busy Coverage Mode Specifies how the VPS will handle calls to the operator when the line is busy The Busy Coverage options that are available include Hold No Answer Coverage Call Waiting and Disconnect Message See Busy Coverage Mode in Table 5 6 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters See Busy Coverage Mode in Table B 12 Table B 13 and Table B 14 in B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Call Services Include a series of both incoming and outgoing call services Incoming Call Services Auto
267. ing Program Mailbox Setting Menu 1 Enter Edit 2 Delete 3 Password Reset 4 Mailbox Listing 5 5 2 Entering a Mailbox From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 1 Enter the Mailbox number Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Menu 1 Mailbox Setting 2 Notification Setting 3 Remote Call FWD to CO Enter The Number 1 Enter the data using the following table as a guide Table 5 7 130 ssi Value Range spe Description Default Description Function The Extension 2 5 Digits Sets the extension to be used in conjunction with the of the Owner None mailbox Any valid number can be assigned Owner s First Up to 16 alphabet The Dial by Name feature uses the last name Both will Name be printed on mailbox report characters Owner s Last None Name Class of COS No 1 62 Defines a set of services available to each subscriber Service No 1 The Class of Services 63 and 64 are fixed to the Message and System Managers Most subscribers can be placed in the same COS Anyone who needs unclaimed messages forwarded to a cell phone beeper pager or another mailbox would need to be in a separate COS Installation Manual 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES Table 5 7 Description a Description Function Covering 2 5 Digits Specifies where a caller will be transferred when a Extension Covering Extension is specified under Incomplete Call None Handling and is
268. ion Manual Table B 24 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Date DD MM DD MM Specifies the day or the range of days on which to or enable Holiday Service setting DD MM DE Day If you want to set a single day as a holiday specify MM Month only one date None f If you want to set a range of days as holidays specify both the start and the end dates of the range Note Holidays cannot overlap Retain Holiday 1 Yes Stores the Holiday Service setting for future use If set 2 No to Yes the same setting will be activated No automatically on the same day every year If set to No the setting will be cancelled automatically after the holiday is over Service 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services for the 2 Auto Attn holiday 3 Interview 4 Custom Note When Interview Service is specified one of Auto Attn Subscribers Interview Mailbox numbers should also be specified When the Custom Service is specified one of Custom Service numbers 1 100 should also be specified Company 1 32 Specifies the Company Greeting to be played on the Greeting No S System Greeting holiday N None S System The System Greeting is Good Morning Afternoon Greeting Evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System However the Message Manager can change this Port Affected Port No Specifies the port number on which th
269. ion Number should not match the first digit of any mailbox number because mailbox extension access is possible during and after the Multilingual Selection Menu Installation Manual 251 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 26 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Position of 1 Before This parameter setting is functional only when User 1 or AM PM in 2 After User 2 Prompts are in use This parameter specifies the Time Stamp for 3 24 h following User 1 Prompt After Position of 1 Before the VPS announces AM PM before the time AM PM in e g P M 3 42 dus n 2 After The VPS announces AM PM after the time e g 3 42 P M 3 24 h the VPS announces the time in 24 h format e g 15 42 Note When System Prompts are in use the parameter is set to After B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to announce prerecorded Caller ID caller names when extension users listen to messages from the assigned numbers left in their mailbox Extension users can also hear caller names when the VPS forwards calls from the assigned numbers to them Caller ID Screening The recorded caller names will also play when the callers use the Intercom Paging features the recorded names will be added to the end of the page The Caller ID Screening feature is enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings This
270. ion number you entered 5 Press STORE Installation Manual 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 6 7 To exit the Station Programming mode Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset Repeat these steps for each telephone Conditions This button must be a CO or DSS BLF key to be programmed as a TWT button When all Voice Mail ports are busy and this key is pressed the user will hear reorder tone 4 4 11 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming This feature allows an extension user to transfer calls directly to a Voice Mailbox This is available with both DPT and Inband Integrations PC programming is also possible o Enter PITS Programming a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode Press the desired Flexible CO or DSS BLF key that you want to assign as the VTR button Dial 82 or 8 Screen output VTR Dial the Voice Mail extension number Screen output VTR _ _ _ ___ The extension number you entered Press STORE To exit the Station Programming mode Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset Repeat these steps for each telephone Conditions This button must be a CO or DSS BLF key to be programmed as a VTR button When all Voice Mail ports are busy and this key is pressed the user will hear reorder tone 4 4 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming The KX TD500 use
271. is set to an outside CO line Note While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer the Message Manager cannot access this service The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available Message Manager s Password The Message Manager can specify the password at any time using the telephone The password contains up to 10 numeric characters It must be entered to execute the message management operation Operator s Extensions When callers require help they can Press 0 on their telephone keypad to be transferred to an operator extension In each Day Night Lunch and Break Modes up to 3 operators Operator 1 2 3 can be specified The extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will be for the Message Manager Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to CO The customisation of the Message Manager s mailbox only allows you to assign Telephone number 1 and or 2 to enable call forwarding to the telephone number assigned by following the steps below follow the instructions in D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET If you should change the telephone number after you have enabled call forwarding to an outside CO line you must go back to D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET to reset the call forwarding setting otherwise you will be transferring calls to the old telephone number unknowingly Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 3 to customise Mailbox 3 The VPS plays the current password settin
272. lation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 846 To transfer this message press 7 804 793 756 813 846 232 804 811 793 756 813 822 760 846 784 804 793 756 846 232 804 811 793 756 822 760 846 784 847 To transfer with comment press 2 848 847 670 817 848 To transfer press 1 848 670 817 848 847 670 817 849 To try again press 679 720 849 556 849 850 To turn off the prompt press 3 801 757 850 722 843 850 851 To turn on the prompt press 3 801 757 851 722 843 851 852 To schedule press 1 852 To use continuously press 2 To not use press 3 853 To use the system prompt press 1 853 854 855 664 853 854 855 782 665 854 To use user 1 prompt press 2 853 854 855 664 853 854 855 782 665 855 To use user 2 prompt press 3 853 854 855 664 853 854 855 782 665 856 TONE DIALLING MODE 856 857 Total message time available per 857 374 mailbox is time 858 Total message time available per 858 mailbox is unlimited 859 Transferred number 859 660 860 Transferred 1 time 860 861 Trunk group number is number 861 862 TUESDAY 862 863 TWELFTH 863 864 TWELVE 864 865 TWEL
273. lboxes using a Group Distribution List Also allows a caller to record a message into all mailboxes within the list The System Administrator must establish this list The VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a maximum of 20 entries on each See System Group Assignment Mailbox Group in B6 1 System Group Assignment See C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES See System Group Distribution List in GLOSSARY Installation Manual 187 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Hold Provides the caller with the option of temporarily holding when the line is busy The VPS automatically recalls the extension after a specified period of time When several callers are holding for the same extension callers are connected in the order in which they originally called See Other Parameters Call Hold in B6 7 Other Parameters Holiday Service Permits the VPS to record store and play several different holiday greetings Up to 20 Holiday Service settings can be programmed It is possible to either specify a single day or a range of days on which to enable the Holiday Service setting Note Holidays cannot overlap See B6 3 Holiday Setting Inband Integration Allows the PBX using Inband Integration to send information to the VPS using Touchtones Inband integration is characterised as Voice Mail Integration and Touchtone Integration Voice Mail Integration works with the Call
274. le below shows the modifiable prompts Record prompts as User 1 or User 2 Some of the modifiable prompts are listed along with their linked prompt number Whenever possible record related prompts together so that the assembled sentence flows naturally and sounds like one voice If you wish to change some of service prompts to User 1 or User 2 but not all of them please see the following sections e B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Prompt Mode of Table B 7 and Table B 8 B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Incoming Call Service Prompt of Table B 9 and Table B 10 e B5 2 Custom Service Prompt Mode in Table B 16 e B6 5 Prompt Setting Table B 26 Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 1 1 through number 1 2 20 members maximum 560 2 3 8 members maximum 560 3 4 After hours greeting is message 4 5 After hours greeting is not recorded 5 6 All pager entry modes are disabled 6 7 All caller ID numbers deleted 7 8 All calls transfer to mailbox disabled 8 9 All calls transfer to mailbox enabled 9 10 All mailboxes are assigned 10 11 All messages erased 11 12 All transfer services disabled 12 13 AM 13 14 and 14 359 15 14 367 14 15 and transferred via mailbox number 359 15 14 15 16 Answer length is numb
275. lephone Specifies the device to receive notification This is 2 Beeper automatically set to Beeper when X is used in the Telephone Dial Number above The subscriber can also specify the type of device from his telephone 212 Installation Manual B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Table B 5 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Use Mode 1 Not Use Specifies how Device 1 2 or 3 is to be used The 2 Continuously subscriber can also specify the use mode from his 3 Scheduled telephone Continuously 1 Not Use Device 1 2 or 3 is not used for a notification call 2 Continuously Device 1 2 or 3 is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox 3 Scheduled Device 1 2 or 3 is called on a schedule basis when a message has been left in the mailbox No of Retries 0 4 times Specifies the number of times that a notification call to 0 Device 1 2 or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no answer condition is received Busy Delay 2 120 min Specifies the time in minutes the VPS must wait after Time 3 a busy condition is received before making another notification call to Device 1 2 or 3 No Answer 2 120 min Specifies the time in minutes the VPS must wait after Delay Time 30 a no answer condition is received before making another notification call to Device 1 2 or 3 Time Frame 1 1 12 h Specifies the daily schedule for Message Waiting
276. ler ID Screening MN Authorisation for Message Waiting Notification Authorisation for External AF Authorisation for Auto Message Delivery Prompt Forwarding Mode mbox Mailbox No SY System U1 User 1 dl Delay Time U2 User 2 SL Selective md Forwarding Mode M move C copy Note An X displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to Yes 7 3 3 System Service Report The System Service Report provides information about the VPS s usable ports trunk outside line groups and Holiday Services It also indicates the services assigned to each VPS port and each trunk outside line group for Day Night Lunch and Break modes each Holiday Service and all incoming and outgoing call services To select the System Service Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 3 Installation Manual 165 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS System Service Report 9 APR 2001 11 31 AM Port Day mode Night mode Lunch mode Break mode Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv 1 SYS A A SYS AA SYS AA SYS A A 2 SYS AA SYS A A SYS AA SYS AA 3 SYS A A SYS AA SYS AA SYS AA 4 SYS AA SYS A A SYS AA SYS A A 5 SYS AA SYS AA SYS A A SYS A A 6 SYS A A SYS A A SYS AA SYS AA 7 SYS A A SYS AA SYS AA SYS AA 8 SYS A A SYS A A SYS AA SYS A A 9 SYS AA SYS AA SYS A A SYS A A 10 SYS A A SYS A A SYS AA SYS A A 11 SYS AA SYS AA SYS AA SYS AA
277. line group A company greeting should be very short Example Thank you for calling ABC Company It is not necessary to give any other instruction within the company greeting because instructions will follow the company greeting automatically If Interview Service follows explanations should be included in the first question work for the subscriber who maintains the Interview Service mailbox If Custom Service follows explanations should be included in the first menu work for the Message Manager 6 1 4 Custom Service Greetings Enter 6x998 5 4 A amp OoONMNA Access the Main Menu of Message Manager s Service Press 5 to modify messages Press 4 to change the Custom Service Menu Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process Example Custom Service Greeting Thank you for calling ABC Company If you know your party s extension you may dial it at any time during this message Note This prompt should match the prompt that is selected for each port The recording will be played directly after the call is received 6 1 5 Customising User Prompts Enter 6x998 5 6 The customer may want to enter user prompts in place of the factory provided system prompts To change the user prompts Noah QOD Access the Main Menu of Message Manager s Service Press 5 to modify messages Press 6 to modify the User Prompts Press 1 to
278. llation Manual D6 RECORDING MESSAGES 2 Press 5 to modify messages 3 Select the desired number to be recorded 1 Record the Company Greetings 2 Record the Company Name 3 Record the Department Dialling Menu 4 Record the Custom Service Menus 5 Record the Voice Labels for System Group Distribution Lists 7 Record the Multilingual Selection Menu 4 For the item selected in Step 3 follow these steps e For the Company Greetings Enter the Company Greeting Number 1 32 e For the Company Name Go to Step 5 e For the Department Dialling Menu Go to Step 5 e For the Custom Service Menus Enter a Custom Service Number 1 100 Enter 0 to record the Custom Service exit prompt e For the Voice Labels Enter a System Group Distribution Lists number to be labeled The System Administrator assigns list numbers e For the Multilingual Selection Menu Go to Step 5 5 The VPS plays the current message Press 1 to change the message If a message has not yet been recorded go to Step 7 6 Press 1 to record the message Press 2 to erase the current message and return to Step 3 or 4 7 Record the message at the tone and Press 1 8 Press 2 to accept the message Note Press 1 to review the recorded message Press 3 to erase the recorded message and try again Return to Step 7 Press 4 to add a message e Press X to erase the recorded message and exit Return to St
279. llers and provide relevant information This feature allows the use of up to 32 different greetings for each individual Time Service period Day Night Lunch and Break as well as holidays Available for both Port and Trunk services Note The System Manager can change the Company Greeting setting by simply calling the VPS Only the System Administrator can assign specific greetings for holidays See 6 1 3 Company Greetings Enter 6 998 5 1 See C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING SETTING See Company Greeting No in Table B 9 and Table B 10 in B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE See Company Greeting No in Table B 24 in B6 3 Holiday Setting See D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Company Greeting in GLOSSARY Company Name Is used by External Message Delivery Service when the intended receiver enters the password incorrectly 3 times The VPS announces the Company Name so that the receiver realises what company placed the call to him See D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Company Name in GLOSSARY See 3 5 Receiving External Delivery Messages in the Subscribers Guide Covering Extension Forwards calls to a second extension when the first extension s subscriber is not available to take the call The caller can also access the Covering Extension by pressing 0 while a Personal Greeting is being played or while leaving a message See Covering Extension in Table B 4 in B2 SYSTEM
280. lling is important Like an attendant the VPS places calls by going off hook and dialling numbers It starts call transfers with a flash recall to put callers on hold and then dials the extension number By recognising call progress tones from the PBX the VPS decides how calls should be handled Inband Integration allows the PBX to send certain digits touchtone to the VPS allowing it to recognise the status of the extension and take the appropriate action VPS PBX COMMUNICATION PBX to VPS VPS to PBX Call Progress Tones SLT Signals ringback e on off hook busy flash recall reorder e touchtones Touchtones The VPS must also have access to certain PBX features For example if the VPS takes a message one way it can notify the mailbox owner is by dialling the PBX s Message Waiting Lamp On code Once new messages are retrieved the VPS dials the Message Waiting Lamp Off code for that same mailbox owner 50 Installation Manual 3 1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration The PBX must have certain capabilities and features to work with the VPS Although this section includes tests to help you evaluate the PBX it may be necessary to refer to the PBX s documentation for detailed capability and feature descriptions Single Line Tip Ring Port Circuits Table 3 2 The VPS can only be connected to a PBX that supports SLTs Some PBXs need an OPX card to provide this connection How
281. lls to a desired extension number when the line is busy or there is no answer e FWD to CO Forward all incoming calls to Telephone number 1 or 2 preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting or to any other telephone number e FWD Cancel Cancel the forwarding setting Notes The Remote Call Forwarding Set feature is available with DPT Integration only Bydefault the extension number for the Message Manager s extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is 0 However the default setting cannot be used with this feature When using this feature you must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan FWD to CO must be enabled in the COS Class of Service setting to be utilised see Remote Call Forward to CO in Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Assigning the Remote Call Forwarding Set 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 to set Remote Call Forwarding 3 Press 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 to select the desired forwarding setting e 1 FWD All 2 FWD Busy 3 FWD No Answer 4 FWD Busy or No Answer 5 FWD to CO e 6 FWD Cancel 310 Installation Manual D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET 4 For the items selected in Step 3 follow these steps e For FWD All Go to Step 5 e For FWD Busy Go to Step 5 For FWD No Answer Go to Step 5 For FWD Busy or No Answer Go to Step 5 e For FWD to CO Go to Step 7
282. m the VPS for optimal signalling and performance with the PBX Installation Manual 265 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS To access the proper menu for PBX Interface Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 Dialing Parameters These parameters specify how the VPS will initiate and control call transfers setup outgoing calls and control message waiting lamps on extensions The procedure for verifying the correct code sequences for non Panasonic KX T series telephone systems is to manually execute the sequences from a single line telephone SLT with the PBX To access the proper menu for Dialing Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 1 Table B 39 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default PBX Type 1 Other Manufacturers Specifies the type of PBX connected to the VPS In 2 KX T Series the case of a Panasonic KX T series telephone 1 T308 system the model number should also be specified 2 T616 3 T1232 TA series Note The Dialing Parameters are set automatically 4 T96 to each PBX default value after selecting the PBX 5 T336 type except when setting Other Manufacturers 6 TD816 7 TD1232 8 TD500 9 Reserved Other Manufacturers Table B 40 KX T series Other PBX Type Manu 232 facturers T308 T616 TA Tes Tase 9816 1292 TD500 series Inte
283. mailbox number entered in Step 5 is the start of the range For example to specify the mailbox range 201 through 309 enter 201 in Step 5 and 309 in Step 6 Note While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer a System Installation Manual 289 C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS 290 Report will not be generated The System Report starts to be generated after the System Administrator has completed programming and system prompt gt is displayed on the personal computer Clearing the Reports The Port Usage Disk Usage Mailbox Usage and Fax Call Reports can be cleared Log in the Main Menu Press 5 for the System Report Menu Press 2 to clear the Disk Usage Reports 3 to clear the Port Usage Reports 4 to clear the Mailbox Usage Reports or 8 to clear the Fax Call Report Press 2 to clear the report To clear the Mailbox Usage Reports Go to Step 5 Type the mailbox number of the start of the range Note If a 4 is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers e g for 3 digit mailbox numbers reports for all mailboxes will be cleared and the System Report Menu will appear In this case Step 6 can be skipped Press 1 to specify the mailbox range and Type the mailbox number of the end of the range Press 2 to clear all Mailbox Usage Reports Installation Manual C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES The System M
284. mated Attendant Service Voice Mail Service Interview Service Custom Service Outgoing Call Services Message Waiting Notification and External Message Delivery See Port Service Setting in 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup See Incoming Call Service in Table 5 5 in 5 3 1 Port Service Menu See Incoming Call Service in Table B 9 in B4 1 Port Assignment See Incoming Call Service Pager in Table B 10 in B4 2 Trunk Group Assignment Call Transfer Status Permits subscribers to specify how the VPS will handle calls to their individual extensions Call Transfer Status options include Call Screening Call Blocking Intercom Paging and Calling a Beeper Pager See Calling a Beeper Pager and Intercom Paging DPT Integration Only in this Table See Call Transfer in GLOSSARY See 4 1 Call Transfer Status in the Subscriber s Guide Installation Manual 179 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Callback Number Entry Caller ID Call Routing DPT Integration Only Enables the caller to leave a callback number in several different ways depending upon which option is programmed into the VPS The VPS can forward the callback number to a beeper pager Allows the System Administrator to assign up to 120 Caller ID numbers and program the route for the calls from these assigned numbers to the desired extension mailbox System Group Distribu
285. mber 2 Select 2 because Quick Setup is only available when using a personal computer that can emulate a VT100 terminal 11 Go to the System Administration Top Menu Select 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions TEST Press the INTERCOM button and then 2065 If the VPS answers you have a DPT connection Set the Rotary Switch to position 0 after initialisation is complete 84 Installation Manual 4 2 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX TD500 should be able to communicate through DPT Integration We recommend that the KX TD500 system has any optional extension cards installed and telephones connected before starting the VPS When running the Quick Setup command Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM from the VPS the PBX transmits the extension information automatically This saves time when programming the VPS Installation Manual 85 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 Notes Do not use System Programmes 106 131 602 or 813 for DPT Integration Thenexi2 sections 4 3 1 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager s Extension and 4 3 2 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programmin
286. mber extension 180 number 181 External delivery message for name 181 911 26 182 External delivery message scheduled 182 420 19 for name 183 External delivery message scheduled 183 19 on date 184 External delivery message will be 184 sent right away 185 External delivery message will be 185 500 sent to name 186 External message delivery disabled 186 187 External message delivery enabled 187 188 FAX messages 920 188 189 FEBRUARY 189 190 FIFTEEN 190 191 FIFTEEN HOUR 191 192 FIFTEEN MINUTE 192 193 FIFTEENTH 193 194 FIFTH 194 195 FIFTY 195 322 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 196 FIFTY MINUTE 196 197 FIFTY EIGHT 197 198 FIFTY EIGHT MINUTE 198 199 FIFTY FIVE 199 200 FIFTY FIVE MINUTE 200 201 FIFTY FOUR 201 202 FIFTY FOUR MINUTE 202 203 FIFTY NINE 203 204 FIFTY NINE MINUTE 204 205 FIFTY ONE 205 206 FIFTY ONE MINUTE 206 207 FIFTY SEVEN 207 208 FIFTY SEVEN MINUTE 208 209 FIFTY SIX 209 210 FIFTY SIX MINUTE 210 211 FIFTY THREE 211 212 FIFTY THREE MINUTE 212 213 FIFTY TWO 213 214 FIFTY TWO MINUTE 214 215 FIRST 215 216 First telephone number is telephone 216 number 217 First telephone
287. message sender can then verify that the other subscriber has received the message Receiving Messages There are several different message notification methods that subscribers can use They can choose to be notified by message waiting lamp beeper pager or a call from the system to another line System programming determines whether a subscriber will be notified each time a message is left Subscribers can choose to receive message notifications differently depending on the time of day Mailbox parameters which accommodate 5 100 messages determine the maximum length of messages If the system is connected using DPT Integration subscribers can press a pre assigned button to record conversations into their own mailboxes or other subscriber s mailboxes while talking on the phone DPT Integration also allows subscribers to screen messages as they are being left and intercept them if required Installation Manual 1 1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO 1 1 3 VPS Limitations The VPS does not support UCD functions UCD Uniform Call Distribution is a service that distributes calls evenly among extensions when all extensions are unavailable it returns to callers to say that all extensions are busy Calls can be forwarded by the VPS to the KX TD500 1232 816 floating number of a UCD group The call then rings at the next available phone The VPS supports UCD functions with very limited capabilities Because the incoming call is forwa
288. message will always appear when connecting to another type of PBX Connect a KX TD series PBX and set the PBX type by using Quick Setup see CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM The cabling between the PBX extension ports and the VPS is not 4 wire or is improperly connected Confirm the cabling is connected as described in INSTALLATION The PBX is a KX TD series but does not have the proper level of software required to support DPT Integration Consult your dealer or use Inband Integration under hardware settings The PBX is not programmed properly to support DPT Integration Do required integration programming as described in this chapter Installation Manual 89 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 11 Start up completed a The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start up has been successful The delay varies according to the system s condition b ON LINE MODE is displayed C System prompt gt is displayed on the screen To enter system administration Press ENTER All parameters can be set through the menu driven programme When the System Administrator starts operation the system asks for the terminal type By choosing VT100 2 all parameters can be set through the menu driven programme Please Select Your Terminal Type 1 ASCII TERMINAL 2 VT100 Please Enter the Number Please Enter the Number 2
289. ming 100 4 4 10 TWT Two Way Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming 100 4 4 11 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming 101 4 4 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming seeeeseeee 101 4 4 13 Live Call Screening Activation i 103 4 4 14 Live Call Screening Password Control iii 103 4 4 15 TWR Two Way Recording into Mailbox eeeeeeene 104 4 4 16 TWT Two Way Transfer into MailbOX 104 4 4 17 A Restriction on TWR TWT Activation ii 104 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM 105 Installation Manual 9 10 5 1 STARTING UP m 106 5 1 1 Before Programming cacca 106 5 1 2 QUIESCUP eT e 106 5 1 3 Starting the Quick SUP 107 5 2 PORFSETTINGOPTFIONS licia aaa 114 5 2 1 Custom Service Setting Example iii 114 5 2 2 Custom Service Features olii la 115 5 2 3 Custom Service Programming 116 5 2 4 Recording Un T c 119 5 2 5 Checking Operation m 120 5 2 6 Voice IMAI P 120 5 2 7 Mailbox Groups 120 5 2 8 Extension GroUPS cT T 121 5 2 9 Interview SETS 121 5 2 10 Automated Attendant ini 122 5 2 11 Department Dialing Service iii 122 5 2 12 Operator Service eee E
290. more information consult your dealer Installation Manual 311 D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE There are over 900 voice prompts all listed in the next section and they come in 3 types 1 System Prompts in English cannot be modified 2 User 1 Prompts recordable 3 User 2 Prompts in Spanish can be erased or modified However in many cases it is not necessary to record all the voice prompts recording over 900 voice prompts is a big undertaking When an outside party calls AA service or VM service he only hears some of the following prompts Therefore it is necessary only to record or modify these prompts Please change prompts as needed for your application For example prompt no 915 could be Thank you for calling ABCD Travel instead of Welcome to the Voice Processing System The maximum length of a prompt is fixed at 6 min Note To identify the prompt s linked to each prompt listed below refer to the next section D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Prompts Common to VM and AA Services Table D 1 312 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 273 Good afternoon 274 Good evening 275 Good morning 915 Welcome to the Voice Processing System 752 To enter by name press the pound sign and 1 152 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person s last name 221 For Q press 7 222 For Z
291. mp 704 status press 1 To change the device status press 2 To assign the telephone or pager numbers press 3 705 To change the no answer greeting 705 696 694 press 1 705 696 694 697 706 To change the owner s name press 3 709 708 706 836 709 708 706 836 698 709 708 706 836 698 691 707 To change the password press 1 707 716 708 To change the password press 2 715 708 710 717 709 708 706 836 709 708 706 836 698 709 708 706 836 698 691 709 To change the personal greeting 709 708 706 836 press 1 709 708 706 836 698 709 708 706 836 698 691 710 To change the recipient s name 715 708 710 717 press 3 711 To change the selection menu press 699 700 702 701 718 786 711 714 7 702 701 718 786 711 714 712 To change the setting press 1 712 663 820 713 To change the specified prompt 713 press 1 To change all prompts press 2 714 To change the system caller name 699 700 702 701 718 786 711 714 announcement press 8 702 701 718 786 711 714 715 To change the telephone number 715 708 710 717 press 1 716 To change the time and date press 2 707 716 682 716 717 To change the time and date press 4 715 708 710 717 344 Installation Manual
292. mpt data SYSTEM ERROR 9 Error loading of MWL control data SYSTEM ERROR 10 Error loading of disk identify data SYSTEM ERROR 11 Error writing of VBI chain data SYSTEM ERROR 12 Error writing of BLK chain data SYSTEM ERROR 13 Error loading of user prompt modify data SYSTEM ERROR 14 Error loading of Class of Service data No CO lines are active COs are all disabled No Port cards present All Ports are malfunctioning Ports are malfunctioning for DPT Integration because telephone lines are disconnected or Integration with PBX is not set to DPT integration mode DPT Interface Connection is not Established Table 7 4 Error and Warning Indications During System Operation Indication Meaning DISK STORAGE SPACE IS NOW 80 or more of the HDD voice storage EXCEEDING area is used 80 ASCII TERMINAL program Load Error Error loading of ASCII terminal control programme VT100 program Load Error Error loading of VT100 control programme 7 2 7 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device SAVE All system programming data and voice prompts 8 functional areas can be saved in separate data files To save this data connect a data terminal to the RS 232C port of the VPS Save the files individually Execute the SAVE command for each data file It will require several minutes Installation Manual 153 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 154 to execute this command for all the dat
293. ms are Compatible 20 Why DPT Integration is Important 76 Why Integration is Important 50 Why Voice Processing 14 Wiring 31 Installation Manual 379 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Copyright This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd KME You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model Except above you may not reproduce this manual in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of KME 2001 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan PSQX1276XA KK0202YKO E
294. n Intercept Time parameter 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Note This parameter tells the KX TD500 how long to let a call ring at an extension before forwarding redirecting 68 Installation Manual 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Screen output Hold Recall Time 0 240 s r Call Forwarding No Answer Time 1 12 rings po E 3 ring s r Transfer Recall Time 0 48 rings r Extension to CO line Call Duration Time 12 ring s Lm 10 min m Pickup Dial Waiting Time 0 5 S CO to CO Line Call Duration Time 1 54 min 1 S 10 min Call Duration Count Start Time 0 60 s r Automatic Redial Interval Time 30 1200 s First Digit Time 5 120 s Automatic Redial Repeat Times 0 30 times 10 s 10 time s Inter digit Time 1 30 s Door Opener Timer 0 10 s 5 s 5 s Intercept Time 1 48 rings 12 ring s 2 4 System Timer 1 2 OK Apply Cancel Help 3 3 4 KX TD816 and KX TD1232 Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s Extension Select a maximum of 2 extension ports to be connected to the VPS Plug each extension into a Voice Mail port Go into System Programme 602 and assign the Voice Mail extensions to a different extension group By default all extensions are in Extension Group 1 Go into System Programme 106 and assign the ne
295. n mode Inband Integration None One KX TVP102 2 jacks can support 2 VPS ports under either Inband or DPT Integration Table 2 3 The Number of Ports VPS Cards Can Support 44 Card Type Integration Mode DPT Inband None KX TVP204 4 Not available KX TVP102 2 2 Note Only 1 integration mode among DPT Inband and None can be used at a time Expansion Capabilities There are 3 SLOTs available in the VPS Four VPS ports are assigned to each SLOT The VPS can support a maximum of 12 VPS ports When using a KX TVP102 card only the first 2 ports of the 4 available ports can be used For example when you mount the KX TVP204 in SLOT 1 the VPS supports ports 1 4 When the KX TVP102 is installed in SLOT 1 the VPS is only able to support ports 1 and 2 When installing ensure that the proper number of VPS ports have been set up and correspond to the port parameters established by the System Administrator See Table 2 4 Card Configuration Examples DPT Integration for card configuration examples and the available number of ports in each case Installation Manual Table 2 4 Card Configuration Examples DPT Integration 2 7 CONNECTIONS Pattern No SLOT 3 SLOT 2 SLOT 1 Total Number Port 9 12 Port 5 8 Port 1 4 of Ports 1 TVP204 TVP204 TVP204 12 Port 9 12 Port 5 8 Port 1 4 2 TVP102 TVP102 TVP102 6 Port 9 10 Port5 6 Port 1 2 3 TVP102 TVP204 6 Por
296. n the subscribers have set Intercom Paging for Call Transfer or when the subscribers have set Intercom Paging for Incomplete Call Handling The caller is briefly placed on hold while the VPS announces the page and until the subscriber answers the page The subscriber can answer the page from any extension using the paging answer code this code is specified in the PBX User Manual For a Caller ID Caller if his name has been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature the name will be announced at the end of the page If the callers name has been recorded for both the System and Personal Caller Name Announcement the VPS will use the personal caller name To utilise this feature follow the procedure below 1 Go to the System Administration Top Menu and type 1 2 Program Class of Service and COS No 1 62 Select an Intercom Paging Group 1 17 for this COS If set to Group 17 the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all groups 2 From the System Administration Top Menu type 1 5 7 7 Program System Parameter Setting Others Intercom Paging Parameters Adjust the No Answer Time for Intercom Paging to your preference the default is 5 s For the Intercom Paging Group you selected in Step 1 set the Intercom Paging access code in Paging Code for Group 1 16 and Paging Code for All Groups See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION See Intercom Paging 1 5 7 7 in 5 2 2 Custom Service Features See I
297. nal caller name Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Recording System Caller Names in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Caller Name Announcement System Personal in GLOSSARY Installation Manual 181 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Calling a Beeper Pager Allows a subscriber to be notified by a beeper pager when he has message s If the beeper pager has a display it is possible to send to it a callback number The callback number can be recorded when a caller leaves a message If the caller does not leave a callback number the System Callback No or the caller s number if it is received through a telephone company s Caller ID service will be sent instead To utilise this feature follow the procedure below 1 Go to the System Administration Top Menu and type 1 2 Program Class of Service and COS No 1 63 Select Yes in the Authorization for Message Notification parameter Make 1 selection from the available options in the Beeper Callback No Entry Mode parameter 2 From the System Administration Top Menu type 1 1 1 Mailbox No Y 2 Device No 1 3 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Mailbox No Entry Do you want to edit this mailbox Notification Setting Device No Entry For the Dial N
298. ncel for live call 342 screening enabled 343 Message delivery cancelled 343 344 Message erased 344 345 Message for name 345 483 19 346 Message from name 346 912 19 347 Message from the interview mailbox 347 348 Message from the Message Manager 348 349 Message from the System Manager 349 350 Message length is time 350 374 351 Message length is unlimited 351 352 Message Manager 352 353 Message notification disabled 353 354 Message notification enabled 354 355 Message reception mode is interview 355 mode 356 Message reception mode is message 356 recording mode 357 Message reception mode is set to 357 interview mode 358 Message reception mode is set to 358 message recording mode 359 Message recorded by mailbox 359 15 14 number 360 Message recorded on date 360 19 360 19 220 284 361 Message retrieval order is first in 361 first out 362 Message retrieval order is last in first 362 out 363 Message scanning with information is 363 disabled 364 Message scanning with information is 364 enabled Installation Manual 329 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 365 Message sent on date 365 19 220 284 365 19 220 283 366 Message to name 366 33 367 Message
299. nd functions include Remote Call Forwarding Set Auto Configuration Caller ID Call Routing Caller Name Announcement System Personal Direct Mailbox Access Intercom Paging Live Call Screening Personal Greeting for Caller ID Time Synchronisation with PBX Two Way Record and Two Way Transfer Note Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX you may not be able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information consult your dealer See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION See Direct Mailbox Access in Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Direct Mailbox Access in GLOSSARY See Voice Mail in 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible See 1 4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION See 2 7 CONNECTIONS See 3 1 1 DPT or Inband Signalling See Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD DIGITAL PBX See DPT Integration in GLOSSARY Extension Group Places several extensions into the same mailbox to share information using an Extension Group The System Administrator must establish this list The VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a maximum of 20 entries on each See 5 2 8 Extension Groups See System Group Assignment Extension Group in B6 1 System Group Assignment Extension Numbering Plan Permits the VPS to recog
300. nding Call mode Xmodem Then enter the backup filename Press ENTER The backup data will be restored to the hard disk 5 When the load to the VPS has been completed power off and restart the VPS Notes The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software that supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol The command can be cancelled by Typing before entering the sending mode Once the sending mode has been selected use the cancel command of the communication software being used If your data terminal supports a high speed it is recommended that you LOAD at the maximum speed of 38400 bps First change the RS 232C setting of the VPS see B7 1 RS 232C Parameters Next change the RS 232C setting of your data terminal to the same speed Installation Manual 155 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 7 2 9 Print All of the VPS Parameters GPRN Use the GRPN command to print all VPS parameter settings output to screen Use Ctrl C at any time to stop printing Type GPRN then Press RETURN GPRN All Parameters Mailbox Setting Class of Service Setting Port Trunk Service Setting Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Service Setting Custom Service Setting Service Setting Caller ID Call Routing System Parameter Setting System Group Assignment System Parameter Setting Time Group Service Holiday Daylight Saving Time 9 System Parameter Setting Prompt Setting 10 System
301. ng extensions Interview Mailbox Number 2 5 digits None Permits a mailbox owner to own an interview mailbox The interview mailbox number must be an unassigned mailbox number Note The replies to an interview session constitute one message If the subscriber expects many interview messages Mailbox Capacity Maximum Messages see Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS should be raised to a higher value Possibly the subscriber should be assigned to a different COS All Calls Transfer to Mailbox 1 Yes 2 No No If this parameter is set to Yes all calls routed to the extension are automatically forwarded to the extension s mailbox without ringing the telephone Forwarding is accomplished through the Automated Attendant service Callers are permitted to leave a message Note When this feature has been set to Yes the mailbox owner s extension does not necessarily need to exist as a phone extension of the PBX Installation Manual 211 B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Notification Setting Follow the procedure below to set the parameters for the Message Waiting Notification Device feature A maximum of 3 destinations Device 1 2 3 can be specified per mailbox Class of Service programming determines if the subscriber is able to use this feature e Ifthe destination device is a telephone the subscriber will be called when he h
302. nise an extension number as valid See Other Parameters Extension Numbering Plan in B6 7 Other Parameters Installation Manual 185 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES External Message Delivery List External Message Delivery Service Allows a subscriber to send a message to outside parties and or extensions with a single operation One subscriber can maintain up to 2 lists with a maximum of 8 entries on each This feature is only available when External Message Delivery has been authorised for the subscribers COS Allows a subscriber to send a message to several subscribers and non subscribers including outside parties at a specified time or immediately This feature also permits the receiver to reply to the message without having to specify the mailbox number If the sender wishes he can require the receiver to enter a 4 digit password to receive the sender s message If the receiver enters the password incorrectly 3 times the VPS 1 plays the Company Name if it has been recorded 2 plays the Company s Telephone Number if registered and 3 plays the sender s extension if both the Company s Telephone Number and the Extension of the Owner have been registered With this information the receiver can possibly track down the message even if he does not remember the password COS programming determines whether this feature can be used or not
303. nnect this unit to an extension cord Keep the unit free of dust moisture condensation high temperature exposure more than 40 C and vibration Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight Mount the unit on a stable wall surface Do not mount the VPS inside of a separate enclosure unless it is properly ventilated Read all the information contained in this manual This unit is designed to operate at one specific voltage and current setting The proper voltage and current required for this unit are listed on the product label This unit is equipped with a 3 wire earthing plug The plug will only fit into a earth power outlet Do not modify this plug in any way If it cannot be inserted into the outlet have the outlet replaced by a licensed electrician Unplug and transport the unit to a service technician if the power supply cord is frayed or damaged if the cabinet is cracked or broken or when the unit has been exposed to moisture has been dropped or is not otherwise operating properly Unplug the unit from its power source before cleaning Do not block the vent slots and openings located on all sides of the unit Do not disassemble this product Dangerous electrical shock could result The unit must only be disassembled and repaired by qualified service technicians Do not insert wires pins or any other material into the unit s vent slots or access points This could result in electrical shock and serious unit malfunction
304. nouncement Announcement Personal 1 Yes If set to Yes subscribers can utilise the personal Greeting for 2 No greeting feature for Caller ID CID Yes Caller ID 1 Yes If set to Yes subscribers can utilise the Caller ID Screening 2 No Screening feature Yes Installation Manual 219 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table B 7 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Authorization 1 Yes If set to Yes subscribers are able to utilise the for Message 2 No Message Waiting Notification feature The sub Notification No parameters to be set include Beeper Callback No Entry Mode MWL Notification for Unreceived Message and Device Notification for Unreceived Message If set to No sub parameters cannot be assigned Note This parameter in COS No 1 is set to Yes when the Quick Setup procedure is used to create Subscriber Mailboxes Beeper 1 Caller Select Permits subscribers to use the Callback Number Entry Callback 2 Without feature No Entry 3 Before Mode 4 After 5 Disable Caller After recording a message the caller is Disable Select asked if the message is urgent If urgent the caller is asked to enter the callback number Without Without recording a message the caller is asked to enter the callback number Before Before recording a message the VPS asks the caller to enter the callback number After After recording a me
305. nsfer the message 4 Type the destination mailbox number Installation Manual 297 D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX 5 Press 2 to accept the number 6 Press 2 to transfer with comment Note Press 1 to transfer messages without comment Press 3 to add a mailbox number Press 4 to review the Mailing List 7 Record the comments and Press 1 8 Press 2 to accept the comments entered 298 Installation Manual D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION The VPS can notify the Message Manager when unplayed messages are waiting in his mailbox Two types of Message Waiting Notification are available Notification by Message Waiting Lamp and Notification by Calling Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status The VPS illuminates the message waiting lamp on the extension when a new message is recorded in the Message Manager s Mailbox Note The extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is the Message Manager s extension However its default extension number 0 cannot be used with the Message Waiting Lamp feature When using this feature you must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to set Message Waiting Notification 3 Press 1 to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status 4 Press 1 to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status or 2 to accept i
306. nsuccessful attempts to enter this 604 905 mailbox 906 Use call waiting on busy signal 906 disabled 907 Use call waiting on busy signal 907 enabled 908 Use the hash sign key as a wild card 157 908 character 909 Use the pound sign key as a wild card 157 909 character 910 Verification deleted 910 911 was erased 181 911 26 912 was sent on date 346 912 19 913 WEDNESDAY 913 914 Welcome to the general delivery 914 mailbox 915 Welcome to the Voice Processing 275 915 System 273 915 274 915 915 916 When you are finished hang up stay 461 918 99 916 on the line to confirm or change your number 917 You can add up to number 917 377 917 376 918 You can enter up to number 151 918 99 461 918 99 461 918 99 916 139 918 99 168 918 99 919 You can not add any more digits 919 Installation Manual 357 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 920 You have number 920 882 920 372 920 188 921 You have a Call 921 922 You have a call from name 922 923 You have 1 FAX message 923 924 You have 1 message 924 925 You have 1 new message 925 926 Your extension is call forwarded all 926 calls to extension extension 927 Your extension is call f
307. ntegration features even though DPT Integration has been established properly Your PBX cannot support the feature The software version of your PBX is lower than required Consult your dealer The VPS does not operate Bad printed circuit board Bad connection with PBX Incomplete card insertion Have the unit repared by your Panasonic dealer Check the connection between the VPS and PBX Insert the card firmly into the card slot Dialling is not recognised A pulse phone is being used by mistake Improper setting of integration mode Change to a touch tone phone Adjust the integration mode properly between the VPS and your PBX see Integration Mode in Table B 40 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters 172 Installation Manual 7 4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Table 7 5 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Line disconnection occurs while transferring an outside call Unable to transfer an outside call Improper setting of the sequence Improper setting of the flash recall time Improper setting of the CPC signal Adjust the transfer sequence to that of the connected PBX and reset see Operator Transfer Sequence and Extension Transfer Sequence in Table B 42 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Adjust the flash recall time to that of the connected PBX and reset see Recall Time in Table B 38 in B7 2 Port Setting Adjust the CPC signal to
308. ntercom Paging Group in Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Intercom Paging Parameter in B6 7 Other Parameters See Intercom Paging in GLOSSARY Installation Manual 189 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Interview Service Plays a set of recorded questions when a caller accesses the service The caller is provided an opportunity to answer each question after it has been asked Subscribers are able to record questions directly into their own Interview Mailbox See 5 2 9 Interview Service See Interview Mailbox Number in Table B 4 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Creating and Editing a Mailbox in C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See Interview Service in GLOSSARY See 4 9 Interview Mailbox in the Subscriber s Guide 190 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Live Call Screening DPT Integration Only Permits the subscriber to monitor incoming calls as messages are being recorded The subscriber has the option of answering calls while monitoring or allowing the message to be recorded without interruption There are two modes in this feature Hands free and Private Hands free permits the subscriber to hear the caller through the telephone s speaker and answer the call by lifting th
309. number is not 217 assigned 218 FIVE 218 219 FIVE HOUR 219 220 for 220 365 19 220 284 365 19 220 283 360 19 220 284 221 For Q press 7 152 221 222 222 For Z press 9 152 221 222 223 For a system report press 5 798 739 728 725 223 236 746 Installation Manual 323 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 224 For automated attendant status 798 739 724 224 234 236 746 press 4 798 739 724 224 234 746 225 For Day time press 1 225 For Night time press 2 For Lunch time press 3 For Break time press 4 226 For department dialling press X 462 752 226 462 751 226 227 For example to enter 5 o clock press 227 5 and the hash sign or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and the hash sign 228 For example to enter 5 o clock press 228 5 and the pound sign or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and the pound sign 229 For example to enter January press 229 1 and the hash sign 230 For example to enter January press 230 1 and the pound sign 231 For external message delivery press 231 3 232 For help press 0 172 232 172 741 232 804 793 756 813 846 232 804 793 756 846 232 163 232 161 232 171 232 171 740 232
310. o a desired destination enter P For an Out of Area call enter O 240 Installation Manual B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table B 17 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Description Up to 20 Enters a name and or description of the Caller ID characters number Any ASCII character except can be used None Note When nothing is registered in this parameter but the caller s name is transmitted from the Telephone Company the name will be automatically registered in this parameter When this is done an asterisk X will appear with the Call Transfer parameter if PUTD is enabled See 7 2 19 Touchtone Information Display PUTD for more information For example you might see this Custom 3X This indicates the name was automatically registered in the VPS Call Transfer Custom Extn Mbx None Specifies the destination to which the call from an assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded The Custom setting enter C forwards callers to the specified Custom Service menu The Extn setting enter E forwards callers to the specified extension The Mbx setting enter M enables callers to leave messages in the specified mailbox A System Group Distribution List number can be specified here instead of a mailbox number Caller ID Call Routing Delete Permits specified Caller ID List numbers to be deleted from the list
311. o identify the forwarding extension this directs the caller directly to that extention s mailbox Installation Manual 361 Caller ID Call Routing Available with DPT Integration only The VPS automatically sends calls from pre assigned Caller ID numbers to the desired extension mailbox including System Group Distribution List or Custom Service Caller Name Announcement System Personal Available with DPT Integration only The VPS announces pre recorded Caller ID callers names when 1 extension users listen to messages from pre assigned numbers left in the their mailboxes 2 the VPS transfers calls from pre assigned numbers to the users Caller ID Screening and 3 the VPS pages the users by intercom Intercom Paging If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both system and personal caller name announcements the VPS will use the personal caller name Company Greeting Up to 32 Company Greetings can be recorded to greet callers One or System Greeting or none can be selected for each Day Night Lunch Break and Holiday service on a port basis and trunk outside line basis Company Name This is played by the VPS to the intended receiver of an External Delivery Message when she does not enter the password if required correctly This helps her to realise where the call came from Covering Extension This can be a destination for Incomplete Call Handling Service This can also be accessed by pressing 0 while a
312. oftware Requirements 21 1 3 5 Specificato MS cte p 21 1 3 6 HardWate 21 1 3 7 Expansion CapablililiBS uicit ru Ep Ia NE Cob Addo qud cx sme EGER paru la t cada MR Lcd maa 22 1 3 8 Recommendations for System Configuration 22 1 4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION 12 ineo oric enar lieti 24 1 4 1 General 24 1 4 2 Connection Examples e nnna 24 MEDIE BE Y e T 29 2 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS soccer 30 2 1 1 Installation unica ia 30 2 1 2 ULI PR 31 2 1 3 Environmental Requirements nennen 32 2 2 dlgicudiice 33 2 3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL eeeeeeeenennnenenn nnne nnn nennen nnne nnns 34 2 4 FRAME EARTH CONNECTION inocentes oras kia sion oen phase cea puni R spa e 36 2 5 INSTALLATION ISTEPS clai ai 37 2 6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS KX TVP102 OR KX TVP204 39 2 6 1 General ores wen ecard ats T 39 2 6 2 Installing the KX TVP102 or KX TVP204 Port Card 39 2 7 CONNECTIONS m 43 2 7 1 e un enlisBeRi Suc fmm E 43 2 7 2 Opening the Ferrite Core i 43 2 7 3 Modular Plug Connectiohisri nenene 43 2 7 4 if c 44 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION nina 46 2 8 1 Requirements for Connecting Programming T
313. on Setting Device 1 2 or 3 212 Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name An nouncement 281 Number of Messages 280 O Obtaining System Reports 289 376 Installation Manual Off line Set OFLN 149 On line Set ONLN 149 Opening the Ferrite Core 43 Operator Service 123 196 Operator s Extensions 302 Operator s Parameters 127 230 Operator s Parameters Break Mode Operator 1 2 3 235 Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 1 231 Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 2 233 Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 3 234 Operator s Parameters Lunch Mode Operator 1 2 3 235 Operator s Parameters Night Mode Operator 1 2 3 235 Other Parameters 253 Other Parameters Call Hold 259 Other Parameters Dialing Parameter 255 Other Parameters Disconnect Parameter 263 Other Parameters Extension Numbering Plan 253 Other Parameters External Message Delivery 258 Other Parameters Fax Management 261 Other Parameters Intercom Paging Parameter 260 Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification 257 Other Parameters Rotary Telephone Service 260 Other RS 232C Terminals ASCII Terminals 206 P Password administration 196 Password Reset 134 PBX Integration 196 PBX Interface Parameters 53 265 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS 53 PBX Requirements for Integration 51 Personal greeting for Caller ID 197 Personal Greeting Length 279 Personal greetings 197 Pin Configuration of the RS 232C 47 Play Personal Greeting fo
314. one of the Incomplete Call Handling service options If set to Disable the VPS immediately offers callers the Incomplete Call Handling service Call Queuing 1 Disable If set to Enable callers on hold are informed of their Announcement 2 Enable current position in the call hold queue One other person is queuing Call Retrieval 1 30 s Specifies the interval between the voice guidance Announcement 2 message that asks whether or not calls are to be Timing retrieved during call holding Example To cancel holding press 2 now Otherwise I ll try your party again Installation Manual 259 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 32 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Redialing 1 15s Specifies the interval between the voice guidance Cancel Timing 2 30 s messages that ask if continuous redials are to be 3 45 S attempted during call holding 4 60 s Example 30 To continue holding press 1 Otherwise press 2 Other Parameters Rotary Telephone Service Specifies how to treat callers who are calling from rotary telephones unable to input touchtone signals or who are unable to properly respond to VPS guidance shown To access the proper menu for Rotary Telephone Service follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 6 Table B 33 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Rotary 1 G D
315. onnect etc if the Voice Mail integration and Touchtone Integration features are also enabled Enable System Programme 103 to turn on Touchtone Integration On extensions with the Voice Mail port parameter enabled the KX TA series can send codes touchtones to indicate call states this increases VPS efficiency Codes apply to all transferred calls outside calls only indicate disconnect provided the KX TA series is programmed for CPC Detection and the Telephone Company sends the CPC signal Refer to the Table 3 3 3 2 4 PBX Interface Parameters in Section 3 2 4 PBX Interface Parameters Put all extensions connected to the VPS into 1 extension group using System Programme 600 Reserve this extension group for these extensions Do not mix other extensions into this group Enable hunting for the VPS extension groups using System Programme 100 Set the hunting type for the VPS extension groups to circular using System Programme 101 At every VPS extension temporarily connect an SLT or butt set go off hook and dial 7301 to turn on Data Line Security This prevents the KX TA series from sending Executive Override or Call Waiting tones to these extensions We recommend that all Voice Mail port extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording Select the appropriate outside CO line feature settings depending on how your customer plans to use the VPS A to answer all incoming calls B
316. or an External Delivery Message receiver hears 3 User 2 when he cannot enter any digit Prompt Selection System Number after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been played Delayed 0 15s Specifies the delayed answer time Answer 0 Time Time Group 1 8 Assigns a time group number to the port No 1 Port 1 12 Night Mode 226 To access the proper menu for Night Mode features for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 12 2 Installation Manual B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Port 1 12 Lunch Mode To access the proper menu for Lunch Mode features for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 12 3 Port 1 12 Break Mode To access the proper menu for Break Mode features for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 12 4 B4 2 Trunk Group Assignment This assignment is effective only with DPT Integration To access the proper menu for Day Night Lunch or Break Mode for the selected PBX trunk outside line group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 48 Note For KX TD series except for KX TD500 trunk outside line group number in this section assignment means CO line number Trunk 1 48 Day Mode
317. or each mailbox More than 1 subscriber can share the same class of service COS number 63 is only available to the Message Manager while COS number 64 is only available to the System Manager The procedure below determines the utilisation of the following special features on a COS basis Hemote Call Forward to CO available for COS numbers 1 63 Delete Message Confirmation available for COS numbers 1 64 Message Waiting Notification available for COS numbers 1 63 External Message Delivery available for COS numbers 1 62 Auto Forwarding available for COS numbers 1 62 To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 1 64 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No 1 64 Note In Table B 7 and Table B 8 sub parameters are underlined These sub parameters can be assigned only when the corresponding authorisation parameter is set to Yes Class of Service Setting COS Nos 1 62 for subscribers To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 1 62 for subscribers follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No 1 62 216 Installation Manual B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table B 7 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Personal 8 60 sin 4s Defines the maximum length of the personal greeting Greeting increments message that
318. or sector number DSP SCAN DSP SCAN error DSP is out of order Check the hardware DSP FIFO DSP FIFO error During the system is handling calls there was a temporary problem with the DSP and FIFO memory CPU APPLICATION x Application error While the system is handling calls temporary application error occurs x port number port number 1 12 Examples of a terminal display when errors are generated Table 7 3 Error Indications at System Startup Indication Meaning ROM ERROR Sum Error ROM checksum error DISK ERROR Initialize Error HDD initialisation error DISK ERROR No System No system HDD present DISK ERROR Program Load Error Programme could not be loaded from system HDD DISK ERROR Program Sum Error Checksum error in programme loaded from system HDD 152 Installation Manual Table 7 3 Error Indications at System Startup 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS DISK ERROR System Data Error Error Loading of administrator data from system HDD SYSTEM ERROR Administrator data error SYSTEM ERROR 2 Error loading of report data SYSTEM ERROR 3 Clock error SYSTEM ERROR 4 Mailbox data error SYSTEM ERROR 5 Message data error 1 SYSTEM ERROR 6 Message data error 2 SYSTEM ERROR 7 Error loading of control data SYSTEM ERROR 8 Error loading of voice pro
319. or to access critical VPS functions See 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Voice Mail Service Permits a caller non subscriber to leave a message in any mailbox See 5 2 6 Voice Mail See B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE See Voice Mail in GLOSSARY Installation Manual 203 A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Voice Prompts Are announcements that instruct the caller There are 3 kinds of voice prompts 1 System Prompts recorded at the factory in English 2 User 1 Prompts not recorded and 3 User 2 Prompts recorded at the factory in Spanish See 6 1 5 Customising User Prompts Enter 6 998 5 6 See Prompt Mode in Table B 7 and Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See B6 5 Prompt Setting See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Recording User Prompts in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Voice Prompt in GLOSSARY 204 Installation Manual Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Installation Manual 205 B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION Use either a VT100 or compatible terminal or other RS 232C terminals ASCII Terminals to perform System Administration which includes the setting and changing of system parameters This can be a personal computer with emulation software Keyboard Use VT100 or Compatible Terminals
320. orwarded busy 927 calls to extension extension 928 Your extension is call forwarded busy 928 or no answer calls to extension extension 929 Your extension is call forwarded no 929 answer calls to extension extension 930 Your extension is call forwarded to 930 telephone number telephone number 931 ZERO 931 Linked Prompts List Subscriber Service Table D 5 920 You have number 604 There were number of failure 380 new message 905 unsuccessful attempts to enter this mailbox Receive Message Table D 6 359 Message recorded by mailbox number 367 Message transferred via mailbox number 15 and transferred via mailbox number 14 and mailbox number 14 and mailbox number 360 Message recorded on date 920 You have number 358 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 6 19 at time 372 Messages Message Scan Table D 7 346 Message from name 912 was sent on date 19 at time Message Delivery Table D 8 654 This message will be delivered on day 19 at time Personal Group Distribution List Table D 9 917 You can add up to number 377 more members Check Mailbox Distribution Table D 10 345 Message for name 365 Message sent on date 483 received on date 19 at time 19 at time 220 for mailbox number 220 fo
321. ote While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer the System Manager cannot access this service The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 3 to customise the mailbox 3 The VPS plays the current password setting Press 1 to change the mailbox password If a password has not yet been assigned go to Step 4 Press 2 to accept the current setting 4 Type the password and Press Note If a password is not needed Press 7 It is recommended that the password be set to maintain security 5 The VPS plays the current password setting Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual 293 C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES 1 Log in the Main Menu 294 2 The VPS plays the number of new messages Press 1 to listen to the messages 3 The VPS plays each message identifying the sender and indicating when the message was recorded Press 0 to listen to the entire menu Installation Manual 1 Repeat this message 1 1 Replay the Previous Message 2 Play the Next Message 3 1 Erase this Message 4 Reply 5 Rewind 6 Fast Forward 7 Transfer 8 Message Scan Appendix D MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Installation Manual 295 D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX The Message Manager s Mailbox must be accessed before per
322. ouchtone Signalling 51 External Message Delivery 283 External message delivery list 185 External message delivery service 186 External message delivery status 186 F Fax Call Report 170 Fax Call Statistics Clear 170 Fax Management 186 Fax Management 1 5 7 8 115 FINAL SETUP 137 Following steps are for HyperTerminal as an example 143 Follow on ID or Called Party ID 52 FRAME EARTH CONNECTION 36 Frame Ground FG 47 G General 17 24 39 General Guidelines and Definitions 53 GLOSSARY 361 Greeting Callers 14 Group distribution list personal 187 Group distribution list system 187 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION 76 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION 50 H Hard Disk Drive Usage Environment 32 Hardware 21 Hardware settings 53 264 Hold 187 Holiday service 187 Holiday Setting 248 Holiday Setting Delete 250 Holiday Setting Enter 248 Holiday Setting Listing 250 How the VPS and the PBX Communicate 50 IMPORTANT 36 Inband Integration 187 Inband Signaling Parameters 269 Inband Signalling 55 Inband None Integration 24 27 Incomplete call handling service 188 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM 146 146 Inside View of the Main Cabinet 17 INSTALLATION 29 30 INSTALLATION STEPS 37 Installer Equipment and Software Requirements 21 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS KX TVP102 OR KX TVP204 39 Installing the KX TVP102 or KX TVP204 Port Card 39 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 49 INTEGRATING THE
323. oup The extensions in the group cannot have a personal mailbox When a message is left in this mailbox it lights all of the message waiting lamps of the phones that are in this group There are 20 groups available and each group can have up to 20 entries When a message is left for the extension group it will light the message waiting lamps on each phone The first person that retrieves the call cancels the message waiting lamp on the other phones Extension groups work well in areas where the call would not be intended for a specific person e g a Parts Centre Technical Support Group etc To establish an extension group 1 From the System Administration Top Menu Type 1 5 1 2 1 Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Extension Group Enter 2 Enter an Extension Group Number that has not been assigned to another mailbox or Extension Group this must be a vacant number Enter the Extensions that are to be assigned to this group 3 Enter the Extension Numbers that are to be assigned to the Extension Group da Return to the Main Program Menu 5 Type 1 1 1 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Assign the Extension Group Number to a mailbox If you used the number 700 for an Extension Group number assign the number 700 as a new mailbox You must also enter 700 as an extension Messages can be delivered to the new number through normal operation 5 2 9 Interview Service The subscriber can leave a seri
324. ox Enter a followed by a mailbox number Transfer to Extension Transfers the caller to a specific extension Enter b followed by an extension number Operator Connects the caller to the operator Exit Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects the caller The Message Manager is responsible for recording this prompt Previous Menu lf programmed returns the caller to the previous menu Custom Service lf programmed transfers the caller to another Custom Service Voice Mail Service Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service Call Transfer Service Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service Subscriber Service Allows the caller to access Subscriber Service If this option is enabled it is strongly recommended that each subscriber establish a password this will prevent unauthorised callers from accidentally or intentionally accessing subscribers mailboxes Department Dialling Transfers the caller to the Department Dialling menu Dial by Name Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 letters of a last name of the person they wish to reach then transfers him to the corresponding extension Repeat Menu Repeats the Custom Service menu prompts Main Menu Returns the caller to the Custom Service top menu FAX Transfer Allows the caller to send fax messages to an extension specified as the fax extension Installation Manual 239 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRA
325. ox If forgotten the System Administrator or System Manager can clear it so that the subscriber can select a new password Installation Manual 367 Personal Greetings A subscriber can record messages to greet callers There are 3 kinds of Personal Greetings 1 No Answer Greeting 2 Busy Signal Greeting 3 After Hours Greeting Personal Greeting for Caller ID Available with DPT Integration only Each subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting messages for calls from pre assigned Caller ID numbers Each greeting supports up to 8 Caller ID numbers Personal Group Distribution List A subscriber can maintain up to 4 distribution lists each containing a maximum of 20 mailboxes Using this list she can send the same message to all members of a specific distribution list at once Port The point of connection between the PBX and the VPS Private Message A message recorded as a private message cannot be forwarded You can specify privacy when delivering a message to other subscribers Subscriber s Guide Section 3 1 Prompt Pre recorded VPS sentences that guide subscribers and non subscribers through specific VPS functions The VPS supports 3 prompts 1 System prompts prerecorded by the factory in English 2 User 1 prompts recordable by the Message Manager and 3 User 2 prompts prerecorded by the factory in Spanish Prompts are numbered the Message Manager can turn off and on the prompts individually re re
326. pecified 201 Numbering through 264 and 301 through 364 specify the numbers Plan 1 4 16 as follows None 2XX Indicates any 3 digit extension number starting with 2 3XX Indicates any 3 digit extension number starting with 3 b If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 400 through 450 and 3300 through 3399 specify the numbers as follows 4XX Indicates any 3 digit extension number starting with 4 33XX Indicates any 4 digit extension starting with 33 Note Auto Configuration will set this parameter automatically The Automated Attendant will dial any 2 5 digit PBX extension number except numbers beginning with O whether valid or not If the dialled number is included in the numbering plan the Automated Attendant will immediately send it to the PBX without waiting for further input If not the Automated Attendant will wait until the dialled number is recognised as an extension number the internal inter digit timer expires or the caller dials 5 digits If the number for an outgoing call is not found on the Numbering Plan the VPS will consider it an outside number The VPS will then attempt to dial it using the Outgoing Call Setup Sequence Other Parameters Dialing Parameter To access the proper menu for Dialing Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 2 Installation Manual 255 Table B 29 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYST
327. pecifies the intercom paging release code required Intercom sisting of 0 9 x by the PBX This can be programmed using up to 12 of Paging and special codes the 8 letters and 12 dial digits as specified above FW No Answer 1 30 s Specifies the length of time in seconds the VPS must Time for 5 wait before concluding Intercom Paging when there is Intercom no answer Paging The VPS will return to the caller if the paged party does not respond before this timer expires Announcement 1 3 times Specifies the number of times to announce the Repeat Cycle 1 intercom page Example I have a call for mailbox owner s name Intercom 1 10 times Specifies the number of times to retry paging when the Paging Retry 2 paging destination is busy or if there is no answer Note This setting applies only when the subscriber has enabled Intercom Paging in Incomplete Call Handling Status Paging Code Up to 12 digits Specifies the intercom paging access code required by consisting of 0 9 X 4t for each group None the PBX Note The Intercom Paging Group Number available for each subscriber is determined on a COS by COS basis Other Parameters Fax Management You can program the VPS to automatically forward incoming fax calls to a fax extension You can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for the Automatic Fax Transfer Installation Manual 261 B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETT
328. play the message press 1 791 To check the previous message press 1 twice To check the next message press 2 792 To play the next caller ID number 735 792 press 2 793 To play the next message press 2 804 793 756 813 846 232 804 811 793 756 813 822 760 846 784 810 793 790 804 793 756 846 232 804 811 793 756 822 760 846 784 811 793 793 794 To play the next schedule press 2 815 794 806 796 794 806 796 795 To play the next press 2 735 795 796 To play the previous schedule press 815 794 806 796 794 806 796 797 To reach the covering extension 797 press 2 350 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 798 To receive the message press 1 293 798 775 293 798 775 301 798 739 724 224 234 236 746 798 739 724 224 234 746 798 739 728 725 223 236 746 799 To record a message for external 799 delivery press 1 To check external delivery message status press 2 To set up mailing list press 3 800 To record a message press 1 800 To add new mailbox number press 2 To review the mailing list press 3 801 To record a new prompt press 1 801 757 850 801 757 851 802 To record the question press 1
329. pps Ims 44 O Regular DDI DDI DIOI O O O O eIO DTMF 10pps S6ms 44 r Regular DDI DDI HiBiBiBiIpminmiBilMM DTMF 10pps Ims 4 D Regular DDI DDI DOIODODOICIDOIDINIK DTMF 10pps 96ms M O Regular DDI DDI HipnipirEibE nini DTMF 10pps Ims 4 r Regular DDI DDI BIBEIBIBDBDEIBIBEIN DTMF 10pps Ims 4 m Regular DDI DDI O0DJIOJIOICIOJOIO M DTMF 10pps Ims 44 Li Regular DDI DDI DIJO O C CI O O M DTMF 10pps Ims 44 m Regular DDI DDI BIBIBHIBIDEIBHIDEIMNM DTMF 10pps S6ms 44 Li Regular DDI DDI BHIBIBIBIDEIDBHIDBIM DTMF 1Opps S6ms 44 Li Regular DDI DDI DIDO oa a DTMF Topps dome 44 r Regular DD DDI BEIDBIBIDBEIEIBIBABIM DTMF 10pps Sms 44 un Regular DDI DDI rFiriririr ririm DTMF l pps Sims 44 r Regular DDI DDI OOGO C O O Ie DTMF Topps Sims 44 r Regular DDI DDI DOD Oo D oOo o M DTMF Opps S amp ms 4 E Regular DDI DDI EIBEIBEIBEFEIBIBRIM DTMF 10pps Ims 44 O Regular DDI DDI ODID OIC OIOM DTMF 10pps 96ms 44 m Regular DDI DDI DBIBEBEIDIDIDPIBIDnIM DTMF 10pps 96ms 44 Lun Regular DDI DDI Note The extension numbers are different depending on your PBX eg 265 266 267 4 Follow steps 5 11 in 4 3 1 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager s Extension Installation Manual 95 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES The following features can be used on any KX T propri
330. programming using a telephone She can create delete mailboxes clear subscriber passwords when they are forgotten set Class of Service parameters set the System Clock and generate System Reports System Report The System Administrator or System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to monitor the VPS operating status as required TIME One of the utility commands that is used to confirm or set the time and date of the VPS Time Group A time frame in which Day Night Lunch or Break time period can be programmed It is possible to assign up to 8 different Time Groups Installation Manual Time Synchronisation Available with the KX TD500 only When the PBX sets a new date and time or when DPT Integration is established the data is sent from the PBX to the VPS Two Way Recording TWR Available with DPT Integration only Allows a subscriber to record a conversation into her mailbox Two Way Transfer TWT Available with DPT Integration only Allows a subscriber to record a conversation into another person s mailbox Unlimited Message Length Permits a mailbox owner to record two way conversations of unlimited length into her or another person s mailbox Two Way Recording or Two Way Transfer The maximum recording time for other messages will automatically be set to 6 min Voice Mail A general term used for messages recorded over the phone from one person to another Voice Prompt Recorded VPS instructions to calle
331. quence on Refused Call Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension s owner has enabled Call Screening to not take the call PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Light On Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must use to turn on a message waiting lamp at an extension Light Off Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must use to turn off a message waiting lamp at an extension Call Waiting Sequence This sequence is carried out by the VPS to perform call waiting when the called extension 54 Installation Manual 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS is busy PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Release Sequence for Call Waiting This sequence is carried out by the VPS to release call waiting PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Inband Signalling These parameters are used when the Integration Mode is set to Inband If the PBX type is set to a KX T series system these parameters will be automatically set If another type PBX is used check that system s installation manual for settings Table 3 4 Code Call State Sent to the Voice Mail Port When default 1 Ringback Tone The extension dialled is ringing 2 Busy Tone The extension diall
332. r This means that the System Administration Top Menu must first be accessed On the first menu displayed make the menu selection corresponding to the first menu displayed Repeat this process for each subsequent menu when additional selection numbers are listed To initialise the system follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 4 Note In the following steps steps 1 through 6 the output of the VT100 TERMINAL mode is presented The output of the ASCII TERMINAL mode is slightly different For example in Step 1 5 Quick Setup does not appear when you are in the ASCII TERMINAL mode There are other differences but the basic steps are the same 1 Go to the System Administration Top Menu 1 Program 2 System Reports 3 Utility command 4 System Reset Clear 5 Quick Setup SELECT ITEM and PRESS Return Key 2 Type 4 for System Initialisation System Reset Clear Menu Mailbox No Length 3 System Manager s Mailbox No 999 Message Manager s Mailbox No 998 Will you change the settings Y N Note Depending on the PBX extension numbering the Mailbox No Length might be 2 to 5 146 Installation Manual 3 Type Y this places the VPS in the off line mode System Reset Clear Menu Mailbox No Length 3 System Manager s Mailbox No 999 Message Manager s Mailbox No 998 Reset System Parameters Press 4 Type LLLLLLL
333. r 84 Day mode third operator s extension 84 is not assigned 85 days 85 381 85 502 85 86 DECEMBER 86 87 Delay time is time 87 289 374 87 289 87 374 88 Delete message confirmation 88 disabled 89 Delete message confirmation 89 enabled 90 deleted 329 90 91 Delivering message to name 91 92 Delivery list number is number 92 93 Department dialling menu erased 93 94 Department dialling menu is menu 94 95 Device notification for unreceived 95 message disabled 96 Device notification for unreceived 96 message enabled 97 Device number is number 97 98 DIAL TONE 98 99 digits 151 918 99 461 918 99 461 918 99 916 139 918 99 168 918 99 100 Direct mailbox access disabled 100 101 Direct mailbox access enabled 101 102 EIGHT 102 103 EIGHT HOUR 103 318 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 104 EIGHTEEN 104 105 EIGHTEEN HOUR 105 106 EIGHTEEN MINUTE 106 107 EIGHTEENTH 107 108 EIGHTH 108 109 EIGHTY 109 110 EIGHTY EIGHT 110 111 EIGHTY FIVE 111 112 EIGHTY FOUR 112 113 EIGHTY NINE 113 114 EIGHTY ONE 114 115 EIGHTY SEVEN 115 116 EIGHTY SIX 116 117 EIGHTY THREE 117 118 EIGHTY TWO 118
334. r LIFO 1 LIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the most recent 2 FIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest Message 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS adds the message sender s Scanning with 2 No name and the recording date and time to the message Information No during the message scan Installation Manual 217 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table B 7 218 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Play System 1 Yes If set to Yes directions for recording a message are Prompt after 2 No given to the caller immediately after the personal Personal No greeting has been played Greeting The following guidance messages are played To end recording hang up or press 1 for more features To pause and restart recording press 2 Use Call 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS signals the busy extension that Waiting 2 No another call is waiting on Busy No Note To use Call Waiting on Busy you must also enable the use of the Call Waiting feature at your PBX Message 1 Yes The Live Call Screening feature permits the subscriber Cancel for Live 2 No to monitor incoming messages as they are being Call Screening Yes recorded or intercept them if desired If the subscriber chooses to speak to the caller if not disabled by the PBX beforehand the VPS will record the two way conversation If set to Yes the VPS will automati
335. r mailbox number 283 has been erased because message retention time expired 284 has not been received External Message Delivery Table D 11 182 External delivery message scheduled for 652 This message is from name name 420 on date 418 of company name 19 at time 181 External delivery message for name 185 External delivery message will be sent to 911 was erased name Installation Manual 359 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 11 500 right away 26 because message retention time expired 366 Message to name 297 l Il redial number 33 being delivered now 379 more times Message Waiting Notification Table D 12 461 Please enter your callback number 461 Please enter your callback number 918 You can enter up to number 918 You can enter up to number 99 digits 99 digits 916 When you are finished hang up stay on the line to confirm or change your number 635 This call is for name 271 from name Interview Mailbox Management Table D 13 16 Answer length is number 507 seconds Fax Management Table D 14 920 You have number 859 Transferred number 188 FAX messages 660 times 360 Installation Manual GLOSSARY Alternate Extension Group Transfers the call coming into the extensions in this group following the sequence specified by Alternate
336. r 1 is telephone 576 number 577 Telephone number 1 is not assigned 577 578 Telephone number 2 for Remote Call 578 Forward to CO is telephone number 579 Telephone number 2 for Remote Call 579 Forward to CO is not assigned 580 Telephone number 2 is telephone 580 number 581 Telephone number 2 is not assigned 581 582 Telephone number deleted 582 583 Telephone number is telephone 583 number 584 Telephone number is not assigned 584 585 TEN 585 586 TEN HOUR 586 587 TEN MINUTE 587 588 TENTH 588 589 Thank you 589 590 Thank you for calling 590 591 The callback number is telephone 591 722 432 number 592 The callback number is not assigned 592 722 432 593 The FAX transfer situation is as 593 follows 594 The first 4 letters of the owner s last 594 name are name 338 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 595 The mailbox number entry failure 595 Check the mailbox number 596 The message is message 596 597 The message sender is unknown 569 597 598 The prompt is now turned off 598 599 The prompt is now turned on 599 600 The system reserved mailbox cannot 600 be edited 601 There are number 601 54 602 There are no messages 602 603
337. r Caller ID 282 Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting 197 280 Port 1 12 Break Mode 227 Port 1 12 Day Mode 225 Port 1 12 Lunch Mode 227 Port 1 12 Night Mode 226 Port Assignment 225 Port Cards 44 Port Expansion Cards 39 Port service 197 Port Service Menu 124 Port Setting 265 Port Setting 1 6 2 116 Port Setting Menu 265 PORT SETTING OPTIONS 114 Port Settings 53 Port Usage Report 167 Port Usage Statistics Clear 167 Precaution 6 Print All of the VPS Parameters GPRN 156 Print Reports at Specified Time PSET 151 Private message 198 Program Version Display VERS 156 Programming Guidance 207 Programming Menu Structure Diagram 208 Prompt Setting 251 Prompts Common to VM and AA Services 312 Q Quick Setup 106 107 160 Quick Setup QSET 160 R Receive message 198 Received Data RXD input 47 Receiving Messages 14 Recommendations for System Configuration 22 Recommended Settings 1 63 Recommended Settings 2 64 Recommended Settings 3 67 Recording Menus 119 Recording Menus and Voice Labels 306 RECORDING MESSAGES 306 Recording Personal Greetings 141 Recording System Caller Names 309 Recording the Owner s Name 141 Recording User Prompts 307 Remote Call Forward to CO 213 281 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET 310 Remote call forwarding set 199 310 Request To Send RTS output 47 Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal 46 Resetting a Mailbox Password 215 Rotary switch 19
338. rating devices such as sewing machines elevators or electric welders on or near computers telexes or other office equipment near microwave ovens or air conditioners Ideally the VPS should not be in the room with these items and should be at least 1 8 m away from televisions Do not obstruct the areas around the PBX and the VPS Both require space above for cooling and space on the sides for maintenance and inspection 30 Installation Manual 2 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 1 2 Wiring Do not wire the telephone cable parallel to an AC power source computer etc If cables are run near those wires shield them with metal tubing or use shielded cables and earth the shields Use protectors if running cables on the floor Avoid running cables under carpets e Avoid sharing a 110 V 240 V AC power supply for computers telexes and other office equipment with the VPS Induction noise from such equipment may interrupt the VPS operation When making any connections or removing the cover be sure the power switch is turned off When installing telephone wiring basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following e Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm e Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations e Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
339. rded as an intercom path and not a DIL direct in line the following items will not work e time table overflow function e DISA message from a DISA card IRNA Integration with the wrong PBX or with certain Key Systems presents limitations to the VPS standard functions We do not recommend these systems for integration with the VPS The section 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible explains problems with compatibility Installation Manual 15 1 2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MANAGEMENT AND USE 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MANAGEMENT AND USE System Administration System Administration is accomplished by the installer using terminal emulation software It concerns setting and changing system parameters and diagnosing system problems System Management Two system functions are performed by the customer System Management and Message Management System Management concerns changing system parameters through the System Manager s Mailbox Message Management concerns recording voice prompts through the Message Manager s Mailbox These messages include Company Greetings Company Name Department Dialling menu Custom Service menus voice labels for System Group Distribution Lists user prompts multilingual selection menu and System Caller Names 1 2 3 Subscriber Use System users are called subscribers Subscribers are assigned personal mailboxes which they can customise Subscribers can record their n
340. receives operator seeking calls when Operator 1 is busy or does not answer and Operator 1 s parameters are set as follows Busy Coverage Mode No Answer Coverage No Answer Coverage Mode Next Operator To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters Day Mode Operator 2 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 1 2 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator s 1 5 digits Specifies the extension number for Operator 2 Any valid Extension None extension number can be assigned Operator s 2 5 digits Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 2 Callers to Mailbox No None Operator 2 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are set Busy Coverage 1 Hold Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 2 Mode 2 No Answer extension is busy Coverage 3 Call Waiting 4 Disconnect 1 Hold Automatically places the caller on hold and the Message Operator 2 extension is called again Hold 2 No Answer Coverage Offers the option specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller 3 Call Waiting Signals Operator 2 when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message Disconnects the call after playing Thank you for calling Installation Manual 233 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table B 13 Table B 1
341. ries Flexible Ringing Assignment For each outside CO line use System Programmes 408 Day Mode 409 Night Mode and 410 Lunch Mode to enable ringing on every extension jack that you want to have ring Delayed Ringing Assignment To give users time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each extension connected to the VPS Use System Programmes 411 Day Mode 412 Night Mode and 413 Lunch Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each outside CO line to Normal Use System Programmes 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode and 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter a Extension 106 VPS Port 1 Extension 207 Port 2 Extension 208 Mailbox for Extension 106 3 3 3 KX TD500 Programming for Inband Integration Whenever possible we recommend that you use DPT Integration However in some cases this is not possible In the following situations you need to use Inband Integration Note Your PBX is a third party telephone system You have a KX TD500 but all the extension cards are analogue types You have a KX TD500 but the DHLC DLC cards are ancient versions therefore cannot support DPT Integration The KX TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom It is only available in some countries 1 Assignment of the extension card to be connected to the VPS Installation Manual 59 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs
342. rivate Hands Free Mode Assign ment via Station Programming 97 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via Sys tem Programming 97 LOAD 155 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS LOAD 155 Logical extension 192 M Mailbox 192 Mailbox Assignments 163 Mailbox Group Delete 243 Mailbox Group Enter 242 Mailbox Group Listing 243 Mailbox Groups 120 Mailbox Listing 134 Mailbox Setting Menu 130 Mailbox Usage Report 169 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear 169 Main Cabinet 17 Main Menu of Message Manager s Service 138 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX 297 Message Cancel for Live Call Screening 280 Message delivery status 192 Message delivery internal 192 Message Length 279 Message Management 16 138 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 295 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 138 Message Manager s Password 302 Message Notification 282 Message reception mode 193 Message Retrieval Order 280 Message scan 193 Message Scanning with Information 280 Message transfer 193 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times MWL 158 Message Waiting Notification from an SLT 51 Message waiting notification device 194 Message waiting notification lamp 195 Modified Prompt List MPLT 158 Modular Plug Connection 43 Mounting on a Concrete or Mortar Wall 34 Mounting on a Wooden Wall 34 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL 34 Multilingual service 195 N New Message Retention Time 279 No answer coverage mode 196 Notification Setting 212 Notificati
343. rs These are either system prompts or user prompts VPS Voice Processing System e g Panasonic KX TVP200 Installation Manual 371 372 Installation Manual INDEX Installation Manual 373 A A Restriction on TWR TWT Activation 104 AA Prompts 313 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX 296 138 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX 274 Alternate Extension Assignment 236 Alternate extension group 178 Alternate Extension Group Enter 236 Alternate Extension Delete 236 Alternate Extension Listing 237 Assigning Notification Numbers 300 Assigning the Remote Call Forwarding Set 310 Assigning the Service Mode 286 Auto configuration 178 Auto Forwarding 178 283 Automated Attendant 122 179 Automated Attendant Menu 126 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS 126 230 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM 143 Basic Operations 14 Before Programming 106 Broadcasting messages 179 Busy coverage mode 179 Button Assignment via PC Programming 101 C Call Account Report 166 Call services 179 Call Transfer No Answer Time 122 256 Call transfer status 179 Call Waiting on Busy 280 Callback number entry 180 Caller ID call routing 180 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters 240 Caller ID Call Routing Delete 241 Caller ID Call Routing Enter 240 Caller ID Call Routing Listing 241 Caller ID Screening 180 282 Caller name announcement personal 180 Caller name announcement system 181 Calling a beeper 182 Card Configur
344. rs can assign buttons via PC programming Follow the procedure below to assign each button Note 1 2 3 The KX TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom It is only available in some countries Go to 4 2 Extension Line 1 2 screen refer to the screen image in 4 4 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming Select the Card No and Port No which you are going to program Click CO Key in the upper right corner Flexible CO Key screen for all CO Keys displays Installation Manual 101 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES Screen output Flexible CO Key EXT1007 SS CO 20 CORI co22 C023 5 ee COLA da pa sa e e Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored i CO 13 CO 14 CO 15 CO 16 CO17 CO 18 meme cae ee aaa ne Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored co 07 CO 08 CO 08 CO 10 CO 11 CO 12 zer s sli Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored es es i Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored OK Cancel Help 4 Click the Key Number to which a button will be assigned Flexible CO Key screen displays Screen output Flexible CO Key 10 KeyType Not Stored con co 02 co 03 co 04 CO 05 CO 06 Ringing due OK Cancel Help 5 Select the desired Key Type When 2WAY REC 2WAY TRN or VTR is selected
345. ry Mode is enabled through COS and Type of Device is set to Beeper The proper number of Pauses must be inserted before the callback entry code Type of Device 1 Telephone Specifies the device to receive notification This is 2 Beeper automatically set to Beeper when X is used in the Telephone Dial Number above The subscriber can also specify the type of device from his telephone Use Mode 1 Not Use Specifies how Device 1 2 or 3 is to be used The 2 Continuously subscriber can also specify the use mode from his 3 Scheduled telephone 1 Not Use Device 1 2 or 3 is not used for a notification call 2 Continuously Device 1 2 or 3 is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox 3 Scheduled Device 1 2 or 3 is called on a schedule basis when a message has been left in the mailbox No of Retries 0 4 times Specifies the number of times that a notification call to 0 Device 1 2 or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no answer condition is received Busy Delay 2 120 min Specifies the time in minutes the VPS must wait after Time 3 a busy condition is received before making another notification call to Device 1 2 or 3 No Answer 2 120 min Specifies the time in minutes the VPS must wait after Delay Time 30 a no answer condition is received before making another notification call to Device 1 2 or 3 Installation Manual 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES Table 5 8
346. s e Work with the owner manager and receptionist to build the Custom Service Greetings and Holiday Greetings e Figure out which ports are to be answered by which greetings Check the software level of the PBX 2 Use System Administration and your personal computer for the startup sequence 3 After the system becomes on line disconnect the outside CO lines going into the system until the greetings have been completed 4 Work with the receptionist to record the system greetings These are listed in Appendix D6 RECORDING MESSAGES e It is important to spend time training the receptionist Making sure that the receptionist understands the system and is capable of answering basic questions will save you time in the end Show the receptionist how to transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages See Appendix D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX 5 1 2 Quick Setup Quick Setup provides a quick way to set the following programming items Each of these must be initially set to start the VPS operation Notes Quick Setup requires VT100 emulation software Quick Setup cannot be performed in ASCII mode PBX type Extension numbers of VPS ports Extension numbers for mailboxes Creating mailboxes Port service setting Password setting Date and time setting Activating the Quick Setup Depending on your PBX type some steps will be skipped as shown below oe 00 5060 N 106 Installation Manual
347. s 4 837 827 834 692 689 776 693 To change Telephone number 1 693 press 1 To change Telephone number 2 press 2 694 To change the after hours greeting 705 696 694 press 3 705 696 694 697 695 To change the answer length press 1 695 841 842 774 696 To change the busy signal greeting 705 696 694 press 2 705 696 694 697 697 To change the caller ID greetings 705 696 694 697 press 4 698 To change the caller name and 709 708 706 836 698 number press 5 709 708 706 836 698 691 699 To change the company greeting 699 700 702 701 718 786 711 714 press 1 700 To change the company name press 699 700 702 701 718 786 711 714 2 701 To change the custom service menu 699 700 702 701 718 786 711 714 press 4 702 701 718 786 711 714 702 To change the department dialling 699 700 702 701 718 786 711 714 menu press 3 702 701 718 786 711 714 Installation Manual 343 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 703 To change the first telephone 703 number press 1 To change the second telephone number press 2 To change the third telephone number press 3 704 To change the message waiting la
348. s is especially true if you do not want to explain Call Transfer Any Time in your Custom Service menu recording Wait for Second Digit 1 5s 1 Resolves the problem when the first digit of the extension or mailbox number is the same as one of the Custom Service menu choices The VPS waits the specified period of time for a second digit to be dialled If the time period expires without a second digit being entered the system assumes the caller has selected a menu choice Use this parameter only if Call Transfer Anytime is set to Extn or Mbx Operation NoDTMF Input a f c See the following Keypad Assignment Specifies how to handle a call when there is no response to the menu message No response usually indicates that the caller is using a rotary phone The factory setting is C Operator which allows the caller to be automatically connected to an operator after message playback Installation Manual B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table B 16 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Keypad a n Any of the 14 services listed below a n can be Assignment d 0 c assigned to the 0 through 9 X and keys on the 0 9 X Others None telephone keypad Callers are able to access these services by pressing the corresponding keys on their telephones a Transfer to Mailbox Allows the caller to leave messages in a specific mailb
349. s mailbox 3 Disconnect message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling Notes An operator seeking call will always reach Operator 1 first The call will then be transferred to Operator 2 and Operator 3 sequentially depending on system programming Next Operator is not applicable for No Answer Coverage Mode of Operator 3 Operator s Parameters Night Mode Operator 1 2 3 Same as Day Mode Operator s Parameters Lunch Mode Operator 1 2 3 Same as Day Mode Operator s Parameters Break Mode Operator 1 2 3 Same as Day Mode Installation Manual 235 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Alternate Extension Assignment Assigns extensions that should be transferred differently from the normal extension transfer sequence Calls to the extensions in this group will be transferred following the sequence defined by Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence see Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence in Table B 42 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension Assignment Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 Alternate Extension Group Enter The system can create up to 32 extensions that use the same alternate transfer sequence To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension Enter Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 1 Table B 15 Par
350. s step unless setting flexible numbering System Programme 127 or 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment is automatically set This programme allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port Since a jack connected to the VPS provides 2 extensions this enables you to assign extension numbers to each port You can assign any extension number that is not already assigned to another port To reach the VPS users dial these extension numbers It is not necessary to change the default programming for the extensions 265 and 266 or 165 and 166 From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 127 or 118 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output VM NO C Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output VM 01 __ 1 265 or 165 __ the port number you entered in programme 126 or 117 d Enter the Extension Number that you want this port to have The default extension number for port 1 265 or 165 port 2 266 or 166 e Press STORE Installation Manual 87 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 88 f Repeat steps c d and e until all extension numbers are entered Conditions No 2 jacks on the system can have the same extension number If you try to enter a number that is already assigned you will hear an error tone Each digital extension connected provides 2 Voice Mail ports and must have 2 different extension numbers assigned Connect th
351. s the appropriate device in Notification for 2 No numerical order until all unplayed messages are received Unreceived No Message Installation Manual B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE One of 4 incoming call services can be assigned to each VPS port and each PBX trunk outside line group Voice Mail Automated Attendant Interview or Custom Service The Port Assignment menu and Trunk Group Assignment menu allow the prompt mode and delayed answer time to be programmed Services have this order of priority Holiday Service gt Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday Service has the highest priority To access the proper menu for Port Trunk Service Menu follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 B4 1 Port Assignment To access the proper menu for Day Night Lunch or Break Mode for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 12 Port 1 12 Day Mode To access the proper menu for Day Mode features for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 12 1 Note In Table B 9 and Table B 10 the sub parameter Prompt for Rotary Callers is underlined This sub parameter can be assigned only when Incoming Call Service Prompt is set to Selective Ins
352. s the extension information automatically This saves time when programming the VPS B Programming based on Windows Application 1 Select File gt New Open BATCH Mode or Connect gt DSHS Connect Disconnect INTERACTIVE Mode Note When you select INTERACTIVE Mode connect the RS232 c cable between your PC and the TD1232 unit 2 Select System gt Voice Mail gt Voice Mail Ports and set the Voice mail Jack No into the Jack column of Odd Port No as below and press OK a Voice Mail Ports 24 Records OK Apply Cancel 126 Voice Mail Port Assignment PPD Programming Forms Programming List System Map 1 2 3 4 5 B 7 8 3 Installation Manual 4 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 AND KX TD612 3 Select Line gt CO Lines and assign first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group into the DIL 1 1 column as below and press OK n CO Lines 24 R 407 D L1 1 Extension Day CO Group ERG Te ee Te Te Te o TE To 5 BIO O O O O O 0 44 m Regular 2 BHIMIBIBHBIDEIBHIDBILD 44 r Regular DDI DDI EHipnivmirErErinmninirm DTMF 10pps S6ms 44 O Regular DDI DDI DIPIcIlIreP OOOO DTMF 10pps Ims 44 O Regular DDI DDI Oioiojoimi ojoo DTMF l ps Gms 44 r Regia DDI DDI HIHIEIEIE minit DTMF 10
353. se the PASS command to create change and clear system passwords Valid passwords are created using up to 10 characters any alphanumeric character space and can be used IMPORTANT e We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for maximum protection against hackers Do notcarelessly reveal the password to other persons Please change the password periodically 1 Type PASS then Press RETURN PASS 1 Administrator Password 2 System Reset Clear Password 2 To create a password or change an existing password Go to Step 3 To clear a password Go to Step 4 Installation Manual 149 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 3 To create a password or change an existing password a Type 1 or 2 Maximum 10 characters NEW PASSWORD Note When you press 2 to change the System Reset Clear password you should type the current OLD password before entering a new one b Type the password VERIFICATION c Type the password again for verification 4 To clear a password a Type 1 or 2 Maximum 10 characters NEW PASSWORD b Press ENTER Do not type a password on this screen VERIFICATION c Press ENTER Do not type a password on this screen Note The password entered on the screen will not appear The VPS does not distinguish capitals from lower cases 7 2 4 Set Time TIME Use the TIME command to set the
354. ssage the VPS asks the caller to enter the callback number Disable Disables the Callback Number Entry feature Note To utilise this feature the callback number entry code must be included in the subscriber s beeper pager number When Disable is selected or if the caller does not enter a callback number System Callback No see Table B 30 will be displayed on the beeper s pager s display If a callers number is received through a telephone company s Caller ID service the caller s number will be displayed instead of System Callback No MWL 1 Yes If set to Yes the message waiting lamp will illuminate Notification for 2 No when unplayed messages remain after the subscriber Unreceived Yes has accessed the mailbox for Subscriber Service Message Device 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS calls the appropriate device in Notification for 2 No numerical order until all unplayed messages are Unreceived No received Message 220 Installation Manual B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Table B 7 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Authorization 1 Yes If setto Yes subscribers are able to utilise the External for External 2 No Message Delivery feature The sub parameter to be set Message No is Prompt Mode If set to No sub parameter cannot be Delivery assigned Prompt Mode 1 System When an external message is delivered the rec
355. stallation Manual Section 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Installation Manual 49 3 1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 Table 3 1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION DPT or Inband Signalling There are 2 types of integration available on the VPS Inband Signalling and DPT The VPS used with any other brand of telephone equipment requires inband equipment Note Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX you may not be able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration see 4 1 1 Why DPT Integration is Important For more information consult your dealer Why Integration is Important The VPS works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard single line tip ring telephone interface However the VPS operation depends on the capabilities and features provided by the PBX its performance will vary when connected with different PBX systems For example Follow on or Called Party ID is a feature of the PBX If the PBX does not have this feature the VPS cannot transfer calls directly to the correct mailbox and play the Busy or No Answer greeting for that mailbox How the VPS and the PBX Communicate To the PBX the VPS looks like an SLT The PBX thinks that the VPS is an SLT and the VPS mimics all actions a live attendant would carry out from an SLT For the VPS and the PBX to communicate proper signa
356. stom 1 Not recorded 1 Description 2 Prompt Mode System 1 System 2 User1 3 User2 3 Menu Repeat Cycle 3 1 3 times 4 Call Transfer Anytime Extn Extn Mbx No 5 Wait for Second Digit 1 5 s 6 No DTMF Input Operation c a f a Transfer to Mailbox b Transfer to Extension c Operator d Exit e Previous Menu f Custom Service Select Operation 7 Keypad Assignment Keypad 0 c a Transfer to Mailbox h Call Transfer Service b Transfer to Extension i Subscriber Service c Operator d Exit e Previous Menu j Department Dialing k Dial by Name 1 Repeat Menu f Custom Service m Main Menu g Voice Mail Service n Fax Transfer Enter data into the Custom Service menu use the table below as a guide Table 5 3 Description Value Range Description Function Default Description Up to 32 The information typed in this field is for reference only characters Any ASCII character except can be used None Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language that the caller will hear when 2 User 1 calling this Custom Service 3 User 2 System Menu Repeat 1 3 Times Specifies the number of times the Custom Service Cycle 3 menu will be repeated before the No DTMF Input entry is used Installation Manual 117 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Description Value Range Default Description Function Call Transfer An
357. system date and time A number of system functions require that the system time and date be set correctly These functions include message waiting notification external message delivery call retries after initial failure to connect and automatic deletion of messages Time Synchronisation If you have DPT Integration between the VPS and your PBxX latest software version the date and time are automatically sent from the PBX to the VPS whenever the PBX sets the date and time Also this transfer occurs whenever DPT Integration is established 1 Type TIME then Press RETURN TIME Current time is 12 34 PM Enter new time HH MM AM PM 2 Type the current time Current date is MON 1 JAN 2001 Enter new date DD MM YY 150 Installation Manual 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 3 Type the current date For the year type the last 2 digits Note Enter the exact time and date This command cannot be used when either the System or the Message Manager is accessing the time setting feature 7 2 5 Print Reports at Specified Time PSET Use the PSET command to issue system usage reports Disk Usage Report Port Usage Report Call Account Report at a specified time each day A printer or data terminal must be connected to the VPS at the RS 232C port for the reports to be printed or displayed 1 Type PSET then Press RETURN PSET Report Print Out Service Disable 1 Enable 2 Disable
358. t Quick Setup Mailbox Editing Extension and mailbox list Assigned 17 Vacant 1005 Page 1 2 EXTN MBX OWNER Last Name MAKE Make Delete eec 201 0000000000000000 Make 210 210 00000000000 00000 Make 21 211 eccccccccocccccc9o Make 212 212 ecccccccccccccc0 Make 213 213 ecccccccccccccc90 Make 214 214 eccccccccocccccc0 Make 215 215 ecccccccccccccc9o Make 216 216 eccccccccocccccc0 Make 217 217 ecccccccccccccc0 Make P Previous menu N Next menu S Next Screen Installation Manual 109 5 1 STARTING UP a To create or discard mailboxes In the MAKE Make Delete field Type M Make to create the mailbox Type D Delete to discard the mailbox If there are more than 1022 mailboxes the first 1022 of them are displayed with Make and the rest are displayed with Delete screen output Assigned 1022 Vacant 0 To change the status of a mailbox from Delete to Make first change the status of a mailbox from Make to Delete screen output Assigned 1021 Vacant 1 Then change the status from Delete to Make b Owner s last name Up to 16 alphabet characters can be assigned as an Owner s Last Name Note e Mailbox numbers displayed on this screen Panasonic KX TD Series System The same numbers as the extensions of the KX TD series system that were automatically transmitted to the VPS Auto Configuration Non KX TD Series System The same numbers as those of the ext
359. t Setting Notification by Calling Status The VPS calls the preset telephone or beeper pager when a new message is recorded in the Message Manager s Mailbox Set the following parameters as appropriate Setting Device Status For each device the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule The Message Manager cannot enable a device according to a schedule The System Administrator must accomplish this task see Time Frame 1 2 in Table B 5 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to set Message Waiting Notification 3 Press 2 to change the Device Status 4 Type the device number 1 3 Installation Manual 299 D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION Note If a telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number you cannot set the device status See Assigning Notification Numbers to assign a telephone number 5 Press 1 2 or 3 to select the device status 1 Schedule enabled on the schedule 2 Continuously enabled whole day 3 Not Use disabled whole day Assigning Notification Numbers Up to 3 telephone or beeper pager numbers can be set for message notification Use the number keys 0 to 9 the tone pulse switch and the Beeper Callback Number Display Entry Code X to make these assignments When the Beeper Callback No Entry Code is added at the end of a beeper pager number the VPS will ask the caller
360. t When set to Selective the caller can select the Prompt 3 User 2 language of his choice provided the Message Manager i has recorded the Multilingual Selection Menu and the 4 Selective System Administrator has specified a Prompt Selection User 1 Number in System User 1 User 2 Prompt Selection Number in Table B 26 in B6 5 Prompt Setting Note e If Selective is specified you will need to select a prompt available for rotary callers See Prompt for Rotary Callers below Prompt for 1 System Specifies which language System User 1 User 2 a Rotary Callers 2 User 1 rotary caller or an External Delivery Message receiver 3 User 2 hears when he cannot enter any digit Prompt Selection Number after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been System played Delayed 0 15 s Specifies the delayed answer time Answer Time 0 Time Group 1 8 Assigns a Time Group number to the port in Day Mode No 1 setting menu Installation Manual 125 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS Automated Attendant parameters include Department Dialing Operator Parameters and Alternate Extension If the VPS needs a special transfer procedure for an extension such as modem extension alternate extension should be assigned see Alternate Extension Assignment in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters 5 4 1 Automated Attendant Menu Access the Automated Attendant Menu through the following sequenc
361. t 5 6 Port 1 4 4 TVP102 TVP102 TVP204 8 Port 9 10 Port 5 6 Port 1 4 5 TVP102 2 Port 1 2 6 TVP102 TVP102 4 Port 5 6 Port 1 2 7 TVP204 4 Port 1 4 8 TVP204 TVP204 8 Port 5 8 Port 1 4 9 TVP204 TVP204 TVP102 10 Port 9 12 Port 5 8 Port 1 2 Installation Manual 45 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION 2 8 14 Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal The programming terminal must be connected with a serial cable with an RS 232C connector at the RS 232C port This must be a null modem cable This enables system administration system setup mailbox setup and system diagnosis to be performed Communication parameters of the VPS have been set to the following values at the factory Table 2 5 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS Baud Rate 9600 bps Word Bit Length 8 Bits Parity None Stop Bit Length 1 Bit 2 8 2 Connecting the RS 232C Cable RECOMMENDED Before connecting the cable switch off the power on both the data terminal and the VPS RS 232C Cable Data Terminal Or Printer RS 232C port Insert the RS 232C cable into the VPS with the connector indicating the same direction The cable must be shielded and no longer than 2 m 46 Installation Manual 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION Standard IBM 25 Pin Connection ircui i
362. t Stored Not Stored 24 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 25 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored 26 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 27 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored Installation Manual 73 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs 3 Select Line gt CO Lines and assign first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group into the DIL 1 1 column as below and press OK Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular Reaqular Fiegular 4q 9999099790799 a a a a a a a E a a a 71137373371713 111 Frasi n ANTANI A oag Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular O Te rin rinm rr ninm Dn rnm rinm Oo lo non rn Li LJ DO DO Do OO rn ninm rn En Limp ri rn qa 74 Installation Manual Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD DIGITAL PBX Installation Manual 75 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION 4 1 1 Why DPT Integration is Important The VPS works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard single line tip ring telephone interface However the communication between the PBX and VPS is best when DPT Integration is used the VPS is already set up to communicate through DPT Integration Once D
363. tallation Manual 225 B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Table B 9 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Company 1 32 Specifies the company greeting to be played on the port Greeting No S System Greeting The System Greeting is Good Morning Afternoon N None Evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System System Greeting Incoming Call 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services Service 2 Auto Attn 3 Interview Note 1 When you specify the Interview Service one of 4 Custom subscriber s Interview Mailbox numbers should also be Auto Attn specified Note 2 When you specify the Custom service one of 100 1 100 Custom service numbers should also be specified Incoming Call 1 System Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on Service Prompt 2 User 1 this port When set to Selective the caller can select the 3 User 2 language of his choice provided the Message Manager 4 Selective has recorded the Multilingual Selection Menu and the User 1 System Administrator has specified Prompt Selection Number in System User 1 User 2 Prompt Selection Number in Table B 26 in B6 5 Prompt Setting Note If Selective is specified you will need to select a prompt available for rotary callers See Prompt for Rotary Callers below Prompt for 1 System Specifies which language System User 1 User 2 a rotary Rotary Callers 2 User 1 caller
364. te Default 9600 8 N 1 Port Settings There is no need to change these in a typical installation Only change these parameters when connecting the VPS to a PBX other than a KX T series PBX Each port on the VPS should match the type of signalling the PBX expects If you need to change these settings refer to the PBX manual or customer support office to get the correct values for these settings Flash Recall Time 100 ms 300 ms 600 ms 900 ms The minimum length of time that the PBX requires to recognise a flash recall signal Choose the amount that is equal to or greater than the PBX s setting CPC Signal Calling Party Control Signal NONE 6 5 ms 150 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms The length of time allowed for the short break in loop current that is used to indicate that the caller has hung up usually set to NONE since most PBXs do not provide this signal to single line ports If choosing a setting other than NONE use an amount equal to or less than the PBX or telephone company provided CPC signal Disconnect Time 1 s 8 s The length of time that the line is temporarily unavailable after a call has ended Dial Mode Touchtone Pulse 10 pps Pulse 20 pps The type of signalling the PBX single line port expects to receive pps pulses per second PBX Interface Parameters Dialing Parameters PBX Type Specifies the type of PBX which is connected to the VPS Installation Manual 53 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AN
365. te This parameter tells the KX TD500 how long to let a call ring at an extension before forwarding redirecting Installation Manual 65 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Screen output 2 4 System Timer 12 ff fn ERR 66 Installation Manual 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Recommended Settings 3 If the VPS is only answering incoming outside calls not answered by user extensions a Assignment of DIL 1 1 line 1 Go to the 4 1 Trunk Line screen 2 Assign Destination Day Night Lunch Break for each trunk outside line to a specific extension number 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Notes Please Set First Ring Delay Timer to 5 s default 0 s Screen output 4 1 Trunk Line r e 1919119 s TOT MIONTE SE IVE 1019 DE P DELNE FRE b Assignment of IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer destination 1 Go to the 3 1 Trunk Group 1 2 screen 2 Assign Intercept Destination Day Night for the trunk outside line group 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Notes Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned Installation Manual 67 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Screen output 1 Trunk Group 1 2 c Assignment of IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer timer 1 Go to the 2 4 System Timer 1 2 screen 2 Assig
366. te If Selective is specified you will need to select a prompt available for rotary callers See Prompt for Rotary Callers below Prompt for 1 System Specifies which language System User 1 User 2 a rotary Rotary Callers 2 User 1 caller or an External Delivery Message receiver hears 3 User 2 when he cannot enter any digit Prompt Selection System Number after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been played Delayed 0 15s Specifies the delayed answer time Answer 0 Time Time Group 1 8 Assigns a time group number to the trunk outside line No 1 group Trunk 1 48 Night Mode 228 To access the proper menu for Night Mode features for the selected PBX trunk outside line group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 48 2 Installation Manual B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Trunk 1 48 Lunch Mode To access the proper menu for Lunch Mode Features for PBX trunk outside line group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 48 3 Trunk 1 48 Break Mode To access the proper menu for Break Mode Features for the selected PBX trunk CO line group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 48 4 Installation Manual 229 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS
367. te 1 The default setting 0 cannot be used with the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature An extension number must be assigned that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan Note 2 The extension number must not be assigned anywhere else in particular the extension must not have a mailbox Otherwise you will get an error message Operator s 2 5 digits Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a message in Mailbox No 998 this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are set Installation Manual 231 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Table B 12 232 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator No 10 60 s When a call to Operator 1 2 or 3 is not answered within Answer Time 30 the time set the VPS will offer other options as defined by the No Answer Coverage Mode Note 1 This timer applies to Operator 1 2 and 3 Note 2 If more than 1 operator is assigned we recommend to reduce the time on the Operator No Answer Time to 15 s Busy Coverage 1 Hold Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1 Mode 2 No Answer extension is busy Coverage 3 Call Waiting 4 Disconnect 1 Hold Automatically places the caller on hold and the Message Operator 1 extension is called again Hold 2 No Answer Coverage Offers the option specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller 3 Call Waiting Signals Operator 1 when another
368. tension numbers 2 digits S Next Screen Enter extension numbers of VPS ports with 2 digit numbers This improves the VPS integration with the KX T308 or KX T616 by allowing the VPS to discriminate between VPS extensions and non VPS extensions Type S to go to the next screen 3 Extension Numbers for Mailboxes Installation Manual 5 1 STARTING UP Screen output Quick Setup Enter Extensions for Mailboxes What extensions need a mailbox on this system 1 Di 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Please enter extension numbers P Previous menu N Next menu S Next Screen Enter extension numbers of subscribers who need personal mailboxes 2 to 5 digits For example to enter the extension number 201 Press 201 and Press ENTER You can also enter multiple extensions Enter the extensions from No 201 to No 210 by Pressing 201 210 and Pressing ENTER The VPS will create mailboxes with the extension numbers entered See Step 4 Note The VPS accepts any extension numbers within a 2 to 5 digit range Up to 1022 extension numbers can be entered 4 Creating Mailboxes To go to the next screen S or to change the menu P or N the cursor must be in the MBX column Screen outpu
369. th followed by the 161 232 pound sign 162 Enter the new time followed by the 162 232 hash sign 163 Enter the new time followed by the 163 232 pound sign 164 Enter the operator s extension 164 number 165 Enter the owner s extension number 165 166 Enter the port number 166 272 167 Enter the prompt number 167 168 Enter the telephone number 168 918 99 169 Enter the telephone number and wait 169 To insert a pause or special command enter the partial number and wait for the options menu 170 Enter the Time Group number 1 170 through 8 171 Enter the time followed by the hash 171 232 sign 171 740 232 Installation Manual 321 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 172 Enter the time followed by the pound 172 232 sign 172 741 232 173 Enter the total message time 173 available per mailbox Valid entries are from 5 to 100 minutes or 0 for unlimited time 174 Enter the trunk group number 174 272 175 Enter your party s mailbox number 175 752 175 751 176 Enter your password followed by the 176 hash sign 176 839 177 Enter your password followed by the 177 pound sign 177 840 178 erased 63 178 76 178 179 Extension extension number 179 180 Extension nu
370. the message has been received by the subscriber or when the subscriber cancels the delivery or when a new message arrives after 84 delivery status messages have been stored in the subscriber s mailbox the oldest status message is always deleted first See 3 2 Checking Mailbox Distribution in the Subscriber s Guide 192 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Message Reception Mode Message Scan Allows incoming calls to be received by either a subscriber s regular or interview mailbox This mode is effective for 1 Incomplete Call Handling Service when the subscriber s line is busy or he cannot take the call or when he has enabled Call Blocking and 2 when the transfer destination of calls is set to a Logical Extension Permits the subscriber to scan the first 4 s of each message The subscriber can replay the previous message play the next message or play the entire message See Interview Service and Logical Extension All Calls Transfer to Mailbox in this Table See All Calls Transfer to Mailbox in Table B 4 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See 4 4 Message Reception Mode in the Subscribers Guide See Message Scanning with Information in Table B 7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Scanning Messages in GLOSSAR
371. the option chosen by the caller Interview 2 5 Digits Used to permit a mailbox owner to have an interview Mailbox N mailbox Must be an unused mailbox Number None All Calls 1 Yes If set to Yes calls coming to the extension through Transfer to Automated Attendant go directly to the mailbox without i 2 No mo ii i Mailbox ringing the extension Message Waiting Lamp will not be No turned on From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 1 Enter the Mailbox number Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Menu 1 Mailbox Setting 2 Notification Setting 3 Remote Call FWD to CO Enter The Number 2 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Notification Setting 1 Ist Device 2 2nd Device 3 3rd Device Enter The Number Enter the data using the following table as a guide Installation Manual 131 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES Table 5 8 132 Continuously Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Dial Number Up to 32 digits Assigns a telephone or beeper pager number to consisting of 1 9 Device 1 2 or 3 The subscriber can also specify the 0 X dial number from his telephone P T M X P Pause None T Dial Tone Detection M Dial Mode Switching Code Touchtone to Pulse or Pulse to Touchtone X Callback Number Entry Code 1 9 0 X Dial Codes Note The callback number entry code X must be included in the number to be called if the Beeper Callback No Ent
372. these steps for each telephone 4 4 8 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station Programming This button assignment allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Live Call Screening Cancel button PC programming is also possible Enter PITS Programming a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PT PGM Mode Press the Flexible CO DSS button that you wish to assign as a Live Call Screening Cancel button Dial 86 or 93 Screen output LCS Cancel Press STORE The STORE indicator light turns on The display shows the initial programming mode To exit the Station Programming mode Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset Repeat these steps for each telephone The Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment is optional Live Call Screening can also be cancelled by Pressing the FLASH RECALL button Installation Manual 99 4 4 COMMON DPT INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 4 4 9 TWR Two Way Recording Button Assignment via Station Programming For the Two Way Recording feature to work at an extension the extension must have a TWR button on it This key must either be a DSS BLF or CO key with a lamp Follow the procedure below to assign a TWR button on an extension This is a station level programme and should be done at each individual telephone PC programming is also possible 1 Enter PITS Programming a With th
373. this setting The System Administrator and Message Manager are also able to set the clock The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins and ends Note The System Manager cannot set the system clock while the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer the Message Manager sets the system clock records the Voice Labels and System Caller Names and customises the Message Manager s Mailbox The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 3 to set the time and date 4 Press 1 to change the current time 5 Type the current time and Press Note Press 0 for help For example to enter 5 o clock press 5 and or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and 6 Press 1 for AM or 2 for PM Note This selection is not available if 24 h is selected in Position of AM PM in Time Stamp in Table B 26 in B6 5 Prompt Setting 7 Press 2 to accept the time 8 Press 1 to change the current date 9 Type the current month and Press t Note Press 0 for help For example to enter January press 1 and Installation Manual C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK 10 Type the day and Press 11 Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press 12 Press 2 to accept the date Installation Manual 285 C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING C5 286
374. tion List included or Custom Service The Company Greetings will not play when calls are routed as programmed by this feature See Notification Setting in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Beeper Callback No Entry Mode in Table B 7 and Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DPT INTEGRATION See B5 3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters See Caller ID Call Routing in GLOSSARY Caller ID Screening DPT Integration Only Allows extension users to hear prerecorded caller names when calls from assigned numbers are transferred from the VPS to the extension users See Caller Name Announcement Personal and Caller Name Announcement System in this Table Caller Name Announcement Personal DPT Integration Only Allows subscribers to assign up to 30 Caller ID numbers and record a caller name for each Caller ID number from their telephone The caller name is announced when 1 subscribers listen to the messages from assigned numbers left in their mailboxes 2 the VPS transfers calls from assigned numbers to the subscribers Caller ID Screening and 3 the VPS pages the subscribers by intercom Intercom Paging Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Serv
375. tion of COS parameters please see Table B 7 and Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS To select the COS Assignments Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 2 COS Assignments 29 JUL 2001 11 30 AM COS GL RtN RtS Ln CaN CaT RO SI SP CW MC DM PG Pr RCDCCN GC CS MN ED pr AF mbox dl md 1 16 10 10 5 10 10 L N N N NN 1U NN30Y Y X X Ul 2 16 7 7 3 10 10 L Y N N N N 2U NN 30 Y Y X X Ul 3 8 7 7 3 1010 F Y N N N N 3 S NN30Y Y X S 63 30 6 Un 100100 L N UN N X 64 30 6 6 100100 L N Ul N COS Class of Service number GL Personal Greeting Length 164 Installation Manual 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS RtN Ln CaT SI CW PG RC CN CS ED pr New Message Retention RtS Saved Message Retention Time Message Length Time CaN Maximum Message Un Unlimited Maximum Message Time RO Message Retrieval Order Un Unlimited L LIFO F FIFO Message Scanning with SP Play System Prompt after Information Personal Greeting Use Call Waiting on Busy DM Direct Mailbox Access Intercom Paging Group Pr Prompt Mode S System Prompts U1 User 1 Prompts U2 User 2 Prompts Remote Call Forward to CO DC Delete Message Confirmation Maximum number of names for GC Play Personal Greeting for Personal Caller Name Caller ID Announcement Cal
376. tored 25 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 27 Disable Busy O Not Stored Not Stored Set the Voicemail extension No into each of the Agent Extension columns and press OK 131 Hunting Group Agent Extension Number Assignment 02 Intercept UCD Table Agent Extension Ty Poe nef e qe om I Ls dom en fe Je T Te I I 1 Disable Busy Not Stored Mot Stored 2 Disable Busy n Not Stored Not Stored a Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 4 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored S Disable Busy n Not Stored Not Stored 6 Disable Busy n Not Stored Not Stored Di Disable Busy uU Not Stored Mot Stored 8 Disable Busy D Not Stored Not Stored g Disable Busy o Not Stored Not Stored 10 Disable Busy Not Stored Not Stored 11 Disable Busy o Not Stored Not Stored 32 Disable Busy Not Stored Mot Stored 13 Disable Busy Not Stored Mot Stored 14 Disable Busy o Not Stored Not Store 15 Disable Busy o Not Stored Not Store 16 AA Busy o Not Stored Not Store ipd Disable Busy o Not Stored Not Stored 18 Disable Busy o Not Stored Not Stored 19 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 20 Disable Busy D Not Stored Not Stored 21 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 22 Disable Busy 0 Not Stored Not Stored 23 Disable Busy 0 No
377. transferred via mailbox 367 14 number 368 Message waiting lamp notification 368 disabled 369 Message waiting lamp notification 369 enabled 370 Message waiting lamp notification for 370 unreceived message disabled 371 Message waiting lamp notification for 371 unreceived message enabled 372 Messages 372 920 372 373 number messages to verify 373 374 minutes 374 350 374 857 374 87 289 374 87 374 375 MONDAY 375 376 more caller ID numbers 917 376 377 more members 917 377 378 MORE THAN ONE HUNDRED 378 379 more times 297 379 380 New message 380 381 New message retention time is day 381 85 382 new messages 920 382 383 Night mode first operator s extension 383 is extension number 384 Night mode first operator s extension 384 is not assigned 385 Night mode second operator s 385 extension is extension number 386 Night mode second operator s 386 extension is not assigned 330 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 387 Night mode third operator s extension 387 is extension number 388 Night mode third operator s extension 388 is not assigned 389 NINE 389 390 NINE HOUR 390 391 NINETEEN 391 392 NINETEEN HOUR 392 393 NINETEEN
378. try Function a Transfer to Mailbox Allows the caller to leave messages in a specific mailbox b Transfer to Extension Transfers the caller to a specific extension c Operator Transfers the caller to the operator d Exit Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects the caller e Previous Menu Returns the caller to the previous menu f Custom Service Transfers the caller to another Custom Service and plays the menu g Voice Mail Service Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service 118 Installation Manual 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS Table 5 4 Entry Function h Call Transfer Service Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service i Subscriber Service enabled it is strongly recommended that each Allows the caller to access Subscriber Service Digits received after entering this code are assumed to be the subscriber s mailbox number If this option is subscriber establish a password this will prevent unauthorised callers from accidentally or intentionally accessing subscribers mailboxes j Department Dialling Transfer the caller to the Department Dialling menu Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 letters of k Dial by Name the last name of the person they wish to reach then transfers him to the corresponding extension I Repeat Menu Repeats the Custom Service menu prompt m Main Menu Re
379. ts long Installation Manual 135 5 6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER 5 6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER 136 The System Administrator should explain the basic functions of the VPS to all the subscribers He should explain which service Voice Mail service Automated Attendant service Interview Service or a Custom service will play during the day and what services will play during night lunch and breaks He should explain that outside callers are called non subscribers because they do not have mailboxes VPS guidance prompts will assist non subscribers in reaching the extension or mailbox they need He should explain the responsibilities of the System Administrator the Message Manager and the System Manager and how each can be contacted phone number and or mailbox number The System Administrator should also explain the special privileges of VPS subscribers Subscribers can call from any touchtone telephone in the world and get their messages To check messages or change mailbox parameters from an outside telephone do the following As soon as the VPS plays a guidance message Press code 6 x and then the mailbox number For example a subscriber who has extension 215 and mailbox 215 would press code 6 X 215 If the subscriber has a password enabled the password must be entered If the subscriber forgets his password he should contact either the System Administrator or the System Manager Either one can clear the password so
380. turns the caller to the Custom Service top menu n Fax Transfer Allows the caller to send fax messages to the extension specified as the fax extension 5 2 4 Recording Menus After you have finished entering the parameters in each menu record the menu messages Menu messages inform the caller of available options and their corresponding keys For this reason the prompts must match the programming that has been input Note a F amp F WN o The Message Manager s mailbox might be 98 998 9998 or 99998 Dial an Extension Number that is connected to the VPS to access the Message Manager s mailbox 998 When the VPS answers Press 6 998 to enter the Message Manager s mailbox Press 5 to modify messages Press 4 to change the Custom Service Menu You will hear Enter the Custom Service prompt number 1 through 100 To record Custom Service Exit prompt press 0 Enter Custom Service Number you want to record You will hear Custom Service number entered number Record menu at the tone Follow the instructions until all Custom Service prompts have been recorded using the tree that you created as a guide Installation Manual 119 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS 5 2 5 Checking Operation After you have entered and recorded all menus it is important to try the programme yourself to see that all functions perform properly Dial into the system and try all the choices to see
381. ual 1 4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION Inband None Integration Connection Example KX TVP102 x3 Inband None Integration Mode PBX KX TD1232 VPS o o o 2 9 SLOT3 wie 1 Bo SLOT2 Tig Bo SLOT 1 SLOT1 Jn LPT Telephone Line oOo Modular Jacks The lowest numbered jack on the slot Connect both jacks on each KX TVP102 card to your PBX see the diagram above The VPS will support 2 ports for each KX TVP102 card with both jacks connected Installation Manual 27 1 4 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION 28 Installation Manual Section 2 INSTALLATION Installation Manual 29 2 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Please read the following precautions before installing the VPS 2 1 1 Installation The VPS needs to be mounted on a wall Improper placement of the system may result in malfunction noise or discolouration Avoid installing the VPS in the following places in direct sunlight in hot cold or humid places in areas where there are thermal springs etc where sulphuric gas may damage the equipment or contacts where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong in dusty places or places where water or oil may come in contact with the unit near high frequency gene
382. umber parameter enter your PBX s line access code before the beeper pager number for dialing outward enter an X after the beeper pager number The X is for the caller to enter his number as the callback number which will later appear on your beeper pager Finally select Beeper in the Type of Device parameter See Dial Number and Type of Device in Table B 5 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Authorization for Message Notification and Beeper Callback No Entry Mode in Table B 7 and Table B 8 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See System Callback Number in Table B 30 in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Class of Service COS There are 62 COS levels for subscribers COS 63 is for the Message Manager and COS 64 is for the System Manager Either the System Administrator using a personal computer or the System Manager using a telephone can change COS assignments See 7 3 2 COS Class of Service Assignments See B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Creating and Editing a Mailbox in C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS 182 Installation Manual A1 SYSTEM FEATURES Table A 1 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Company Greeting Is a prerecorded message designed to greet all incoming ca
383. ur body by touching the earthing strap This is a critical step that must be performed to protect the printed circuit board and any other electronic components from static electricity Refer to the manual accompanying the optional card concerning the precautions that must be taken and the steps for completing the installation 2 6 2 Installing the KX TVP102 or KX TVP204 Port Card 1 Remove the adhesive tape from the card KX TVP102 Card KX TVP204 Card TEE auem gm Installation Manual 39 2 6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS KX TVP102 OR KX TVP204 2 KX TVP102 only Loosen remove and discard the screw under the tape with a screwdriver 3 Loosen two screws on the right side of the main unit then open the front cover in the direction of arrow S 40 Installation Manual 2 6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS KX TVP102 OR KX TVP204 5 Insert the optional port card into SLOT 1 using the guide rails KX TVP102 Card pp N j a RSI eZ HZ rir Guide Rails 6 Press the latches at both ends of the card firmly then fix the earthing strap to the unit with a screwdriver KX TVP102 Card Latches Installation Manual 41 2 6 INSTALLING PORT EXPANSION CARDS KX TVP102 OR KX TVP204 KX
384. utomated attendant or voice mail service sets system passwords and sets the time and date Finally it confirms that you want to activate the system based on the information you entered modified or confirmed To proceed press Enter To exit and cancel Quick Setup now press 1 PBX Type a Press ENTER Installation Manual 107 5 1 STARTING UP Screen output Quick Setup PBX type Please select your PBX type 1 KX T308 KX T616 KX T1232 TA series KX T96 KX T336 KX TD816 KX TD1232 TD612 KX TD500 Reserved OTHERS C2 O00 lI OV UC peo B3 b Select your PBX type The required steps are different for some models Go to the step indicated below for that type Table 5 2 108 1 KX T308 2 KX T616 Go to Step 2 3 KX T1232 KX TA series 4 KX T96 5 KX T336 0 Others 6 KX TD816 7 KX TD1232 TD612 8 KX TD500 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Note DPT Integration with the KX TD816 KX TD1232 or KX TD500 will be activated automatically by selecting 6 KX TD816 7 KX TD1232 TD612 or 8 KX TD500 DPT Integration provides a quicker way to create mailboxes and set the time and date by transferring extension and time information from the PBX automatically 2 Extension Numbers of VPS Ports Screen output Quick Setup Enter extension number of VPS Port Please enter extension number of VPS 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 Please enter ex
385. ve 262 263 FOUR 263 264 FOUR HOUR 264 265 FOURTEEN 265 266 FOURTEEN HOUR 266 267 FOURTEEN MINUTE 267 268 FOURTEENTH 268 Installation Manual 325 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Table D 4 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 269 FOURTH 269 270 FRIDAY 270 271 from name 635 271 291 271 292 271 272 from 1 to 166 272 174 272 273 Good afternoon 273 915 273 274 Good evening 274 915 274 275 Good morning 275 915 275 276 Greeting erased 276 277 greeting is message 49 277 278 greeting is not recorded 49 278 279 Group member deleted 279 280 Group name erased 280 281 Group name not recorded 281 282 Group number number 282 283 has been erased because message 365 19 220 283 retention time expired 284 has not been received 365 19 220 284 360 19 220 284 285 HASH 285 286 Hello this is the voice processing 286 system 287 Hello this is the voice processing 287 system The system Cooling fan has stopped Please call for engineer 288 Hello this is the voice processing 288 system Available memory space is less than 20 96 Please erase unnecessary messages 326 Installation Manual D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
386. ve all passwords 4 Press STORE 5 To exit the Station Programming mode Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 6 Repeat these steps for each telephone 4 4 15 TWR Two Way Recording into Mailbox This feature allows extension users to record conversations into their mailboxes by pressing the Two Way Recording TWR button 4 4 16 TWT Two Way Transfer into Mailbox This feature allows an extension user to record a conversation into another person s mailbox by pressing the Two Way Transfer TWT button and dialling the mailbox number This is commonly used by a person who is taking a detailed message for someone else and wants the message recorded in the mailbox at the same time 4 4 17 A Restriction on TWR TWT Activation 104 If your PBX is a basic KX TD500 you can have only 8 simultaneous activations of Two Way Recording and Two Way Transfer because the basic KX TD500 supports only 8 three way conferences However if you add the KX TD50104 TSW CONF TSW Conference Expansion Card to your PBX then the PBX supports an additional 64 three way conferences In this case the PBX will not limit the VPS on Two Way conversation recordings Note The KX TD500 is not sold in the United Kingdom It is only available in some countries Installation Manual Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM Installation Manual 105 5 1 STARTING UP 5 1 5 1 1 STARTING UP Before Programming 1 Determine the customer s need
387. w Extension Group to Auto Attendant AA Then go into System Programme 813 and assign a floating number to the hunting group If your KX TD816 or KX TD1232 supports System Programme 131 Hunting Group Assignment program as follows Go into System Programme 131 and enter the Voice Mail extensions into a hunting group Go into System Programme 106 and assign the hunting group to Auto Attendant AA Then go into System Programme 813 and assign a floating number to the hunting group 3 3 5 KX TD816 and KX TD1232 Programming for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool A Programming based on DOS terminal 1 Go to the Main Menu Choose System Data Programming BATCH 1 or INTERACTIVE 2 Installation Manual 69 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Before choosing Batch Programming you must open a file in the Disk File Management Menu Item 3 Before choosing Interactive Programming you must connect with the system in the DSHS Connect Disconnect menu Main Menu 1 System Data Programming BATCH 2 System Data Programming INTERACTIVE 3 Disk File Management 4 DSHS Management 5 DSHS Connect Disconnect 6 Quit Select the number 2 Choose Station from the System Data Programming Main Menu System Data Programming Main Menu 1 Line 2 Station 3 System 4 Toll Restriction 5 ARS 6 Aux Ports 7 Additional Function 8 Caller ID Select the number
388. will leave the number of Coverage Mode 2 Mbx unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager s mailbox 3 Ext No Example The FAX transfer situation is as follows One attempt was no answer 1 If set to Ext the VPS will call the Fax Manager s extension to specify the number of unanswered fax calls received 2 If set to Mbx the VPS will leave the number of unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager s mailbox 3 If set to No the VPS will take no action concerning unanswered fax calls 262 Installation Manual B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS Table B 35 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Fax Notification 1 No If set to Mbx the VPS will leave the number of Mode 2 Mbx successfully received fax calls in the Fax Manager s 3 Ext mailbox No Example You have 1 FAX message 1 If set to Ext after a fax extension successfully receives a fax call the VPS will automatically call the Fax Manager s extension and play a voice prompt You have 1 FAX message The VPS will also leave the total number of received fax calls in the Fax Manager s mailbox 2 If set to No the VPS will not take any action concerning successfully received fax calls Other Parameters Disconnect Parameter Table B 36 To access the proper menu for Disconnect Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 9
389. xtension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan The extension number must not be assigned anywhere else in particular the extension must not have a mailbox Otherwise you will get an error message Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are set Operator No Answer Time 10 60 s 30 When a call to Operator 1 2 or 3 is not answered within the time set the VPS will offer other options as defined by the No Answer Coverage Mode Notes This timer applies to Operator 1 2 and 3 f more than 1 operator is assigned we recommend to reduce the time on the Operator No Answer Time to 15 s Busy Coverage Mode 1 Hold 2 No Answer Coverage 3 Call Waiting 4 Disconnect Message Hold Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1 extension is busy 1 Hold Automatically places the caller on hold and the Operator 1 extension is called again 2 No Answer Coverage Offers the option specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller 3 Call Waiting Signals the Operator 1 when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling Installation Manual 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS Table 5 6 Description Value Range Description Fun
390. y Time Extn Mbx No Extn Specifies where a caller will be transferred when dialling an extension or mailbox number during the menu If this entry is set to Extn the caller will be transferred to the corresponding extension If it is set to Mbx the caller will be sent directly to the corresponding mailbox If it is set to No extension transfer and mailbox transfer are disabled only 1 digit entries work following the Custom Service menu Note This parameter should be set to No when Subscriber Service is specified as a Custom Service option and it is desired that digits can be entered very quickly to specify a mailbox Therefore in most cases No is the best setting for this parameter This is especially true if you do not want to explain Call Transfer Any Time in your Custom Service menu recording Wait for Second Digit 1 5s 1 Used when the first digit of an extension is also a menu choice within the Custom Service If a second digit is not dialled within the specified time the menu choice is used No DTMF Input Operation a f c Used when a caller does not dial anything when hearing the menu usually rotary callers Keypad Assignment a n d 0 c Others None Specifies the action to be performed when a keypad digit is dialled Callers can access specific services by pressing the appropriate keys on their telephones Keypad Assignment Options En
391. ystem Administrator or the System Manager can change the call handling method programmed for each Time Group 1 8 Station Programming Programming via the proprietary telephone Installation Manual 369 Subscriber A person who has been assigned a mailbox System Administration System programming can be performed in 2 ways 1 Locally personal computer connected directly to the RS 232C port of the VPS or 2 remotely personal computer connected via the telephone network and the external modem of the VPS Note Local programming and remote programming are mutually exclusive System Administrator Unlike the Message Manager and the System Manager who use a telephone to perform their duties the System Administrator uses a personal computer to program the VPS The System Administrator s handbook is the Installation Manual System External Message Delivery Duration Time The maximum time allowed for an external message that is to be delivered by the VPS specified by the System Administrator System Group Distribution List The VPS can maintain up to 20 distribution lists each containing a maximum of 20 mailboxes Each list is referenced by a System Group Distribution List number and is assigned via system administration A recording into a System Group Distribution List number will go into the mailboxes of all group members System Manager Mailbox 99 999 9999 or 99999 The person who can perform very basic and limited system

Panasonic KX-TVP200 Answering Machine User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents